You are on page 1of 404

bW

3. dJ

COywYvm^ \ J^

Oav

V ^Ma;6/va

CUM}! ouv\

Ova

^^

awe* CVm^

imci^AXA iKp

brei-QJelW

-('vi

/^

Tf^iVA^C^

Cw^

/
..^'^^^

2jlly\^ >vuv

ci

'si
y

</

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

:>^
THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
NEW YORK

BOSTON CHICAGO DALLAS


SAN FRANCISCO

ATLANTA

MACMILLAN &
LONDON

CO., Limited

BOMBAY CALCUTTA
MELBOURNE

THE MACMILLAN

CO. OF
TORONTO

CANADA,

Ltd.

THE
FIRST

YEAR OF GREEK

BY

JAMES TURNEY ALLEN,

Ph.D.

ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR OF GREEK


UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA

"Ntta

gork

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY


1917
All rights reserved

258

COPTEIGHT, 1917,

THE MACMILLAX COMPANY.


Set up and electrotyped.

Published August, 1917.

Nortoooti ^rees

Berwick & Smith Co.


Norwood. Mass., U.S.A.

J. 8. Gushing Co.

PREFACE
However

regrettable

may

it

seem, during the past

decade or so Greek has come to be in this country largely


Already approximately four thousand
a college subject.
students each year begin the study of Greek after entering

and this number is certain to increase. Nor are


many are juniors,
all of these freshmen and sophomores
Statistics show, moreover,
seniors, and even graduates.
that the majority do not continue the study beyond two
Indeed, many are content with but a single year.
years.
These new conditions under which the study of Greek
is begun have given rise to a new and serious problem.
For it is clear that students of college age do not desire,
and should not be expected, to begin the study of a language in precisely the same manner as children of fourteen or fifteen.
The course must be more compressed
college,^

the content of the

first

Just so far as

year, richer.

possible in so brief a period the student

is

must be given the

opportunity of reading in their original form choice por-

Greek

tions of

literature

of the Hellenic

the finest flower and revealing

To

mind.

this

end

all

other objects are,

for the majority, subordinate.^


1

See

my

article

Classical JotirnaL
2

"College Students Beginning the Study of Greek,"

XII (1917),

my "Old Wine

See

Chronicle,

caption "

XV

The

in

pp. 331-332.

New

(1913), pp. 235-242

First

Year

of

Bottles,"
;

Greek "

University

of California

reprinted in revised form luider the


in

pp. 262-266.

The Classical Journal,

(1915),

PREFACE

VI

More than

eight years have passed since I

myself to this problem.

first

addressed

and exercises was prepared,' and these, annually revised, were used
with successive classes until more than three hundred
students had been introduced to the study of Greek by
their means.
They were used, moreover, by five different teachers both in preparatory school and in college.
This book is the fruition of this long-continued experiment.

As

title

its

series

lessons

of

indicates, it is designed to provide

material for an entire year for pupils of high-school age

and

for college students

three times each week.

times a week

may

who

recite in this subject

but

College classes which meet five

complete the work in

less

than a year.

The plan

of the book is simple.


It consists of two parts
Part I contains lessons
by a vocabulary.
and exercises
Part II, a grammar Qy
The scheme of the lessons is fairly
uniform.
Each begins with a numeral, followed in many
instances by a quotation to be learned by heart.
Follow-

followed

(^)
).

(^)

ing these in turn are references to the


a vocabulary,

notes

grammar (Part

II),

one or more selections for reading, and

(').

The

selections have been chosen for their

and graded with greatest care, and deserve


and re-read many times. In fact, there are
only a few that are not worthy to be memorized, which
indeed was one of the chief considerations in determining
their choice.
For in learning a language like Greek there
is hardly any exercise more helpful than memorizing and
reproducing from memory suitable passages both in prose
and verse.
Many of the lessons, moreover, are followed by a supplement
which may be treated in one of two
intrinsic merit

to be read

(')^

PREFACE
ways.
others

Some may be used


may be assigned as

Vll

as exercises in reading at sight,

additional lessons.

All of the

and in these
have
been taken directly from Greek literature. Occasionally
a passage containing a rare word or an unusual construcBut these are exceptional. In
tion has been admitted.
the main only common words and standard constructions
will be found in these pages.
The exercises
which conclude Part I, are
intended to accompany the lessons and should be regarded
as suggestions admitting of indefinite imitation and exAlthough very incomplete, they will be found
pansion. ^
to provide, if treated in this manner, abundant material
for both oral and written work, even for those teachers
who desire to employ the " direct " method. Experience
has demonstrated, however, that this method in the case
of Greek is not very successful with mature students.
These yield themselves more readily to the memorizing
of selections, writing from dictation, and similar exercises.
Such exercises cannot be repeated too frequently.
selections both in the lessons

(^)^

The grammar (Part

II) contains practically all that the

Homer and
have been omitted, while forms
of infrequent occurrence, such as those of the pluperfect,
receive but slight attention.
But a sincere attempt has
been made to state all fundamental principles not only
briefly but clearly, and this feature of the grammar,
coupled with the fact that lessons and grammar have been
carefully articulated, should make this portion of the
book one of invaluable service. The marking of the long
vowels in such words as
Bevrepa, and the like may

pupil will need until he begins the reading of

drama.

Non-essentials

See the note prefixed to Exercise

II, p. 178.

vni

PREFACE

seem unnecessary, but has been adhered

to consistently

throughout for the sake of its pedagogical value.


Although few of the selections in this volume are taken
from Xenophon, and these entirely from his Memorabilia^
pupil who successfully completes these lessons
ready for the Anabasis or any similar text.
the

is

To all vho have aided in the preparation of this book,


and especially to my students whose good-will and forbearance have made possible its thorough testing, I make
grateful acknoAvledgement.
University of California,
June 1, 1917.

CONTENTS
PART

PAGES

Lessons

I-LXXX

Additional Selections for Reading


Exercises

....

1-149

150-176
177-214

PART

II

The Grammar

217-339

Vocabulary

341-375

MEPOX

TO

PART

THE LESSONS

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


19

I.

/txtct,

eV.

'.

To

'^
(The) beginning

(is the)

half of

),

" Well begun, half clone.

all.

''^

Greek proverb.

see Part II (TO


a;i
Punctuation Marks, 2;
1, 1
Pronunciation, 3 (Vowels), 4 a (Diphthongs: at, av, et,
Breathings, 6 a-e
ev, 01, ou), 5 b, c, e (Consonants)

For the Alphabet (o

Accents, 9

a, b, c

Quantity,

8,

f.

()
he (she,

it) is.

-.
v

in (the) beginning.

08

Cf. Lat. semi.

the god, god.

Ace. rbv

to

the lesson.

in

the presence of God.

and.

the.

24

a.

loord,

speech.

of all (things).
Cf prototype.

first.

the note.

Cf. Lat. scholium.

the

mathe-

this (one) he.

Cf. theology.

irpos

Cf.

matics.

, ,

See

half.

erat.

it) icas.

()
Cf. archaic.

the beginning.

Iv in.

he (she,

est.

PI.

Cf.

logic, -logy.

The

pupil need learn at

in this lesson.

first

only so

much

of the alphabet as occurs

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

,,), .,
.,

EN APXHI HN

o.pxfj

iv

^.

iv

Eng.

debs

Pron. like

bed,

171

on time,

^v

the predicate,

b.

The

article is omitted, as in

etc.

The

\6yos.
^eoj is

See

put

article is

first

', '-'.

omitted with

because this

is

in

for emphasis, see 198.

. 8.
To AcvTcpov

Thorough review

Lesson I, including a mastery of


both quotations. These should be studied until they can
be reproduced from memory either orally or in writing
Improper Diphthongs, 4 b.
(see Preface).
For Aristotle and Menander, see VocabuCrasis, 15.
lary of Proper Names.

<

(before a vowel,

of

).

()
13 b.

Cf. allopathic.

another.

automaton.

Cf.

self.

ytup-^/os

(0)

farmer.

he (she,

ireSCov

()

it)

nourishes, rears.

plain,

even

--

Cf. Irene.

and, also, even.

(/cat iv)

even

hndly,

in.

ill.

beautifully, well.

189.

rock, rocky hillside. Cf.

(),
Peter.

and, but.

() peace.

in the (fertile) plain.

Cf. George.

Ace. Tbv yewpyov.

()

See il/aii^ewxvi.
even

among

() war.

ivise, clever.

dear.

18.

(the) rocks.

Cf. polemic.
Cf.

sophomore.

the friend.

() one fond of wisdom,

philosopher.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

]
4

1.

2.

\.

See

scheme

of this line

'

hillsides of

and a

^-.
in which the sign

..

.
^

MevavBpov.

103 a.

The

wirpais.

>

half

v/_i.

The

Greece are very rocky.

from Menander

v^^^_:_

w-i.

is

metrical

KU\y-iI

w_i_

represents a long syllable where the meter strictly

calls for a short.

Beginning with this lesson each noun is accompanied in the word-list


by the appropriate form of the article in parenthesis. These should be
pronounced and memorized in the reverse order, thus rj
6
:

(Supplement

See Exercise 1

(H.

).

to the

,.

Second Lesson)
i

\rCjrHE^\>

2]^ [^
Fragment

Synagogue of

the

Hebrews

inscription from a synagogue at Corinth (c/. Acts


perhaps not impossible that this was the synagogue in
which Paul preached, and this the very inscription which stood over the
door in his day
Note the capital letters ( 1 c).

xviii. 4).

of

an

It is

{)
1

For the use

of

the Supplements

see the Preface.

(,)

and the Exercises

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

III.

" ,
To

'

ov8eU

epyop

'.

'

oyvL9, 901-902.
Thorough review

'

no one,

of Lessons I

, 10

accented

'

c,

ovbiv there

and

is

'

before.

II, as

ovScis there is

nothing, 180

21 (learn the full declension of each)

and

the use of

, 190, 191; Agreement, 100;


Accusative of Specification, 113 d.
For Theognis and the Elegiac couplet see the Vocabulary

and U,

of Proper

Names,

s.v. Gco-yvis.

better.

() human

being.

anthropology.

()

(()

all things.

book.

PI.

Cf.

()

Lat. viola

.'

(-

Gf.

-,

oiSeis

no one

poSov

() rose. Cf.
() parsley.
loise, skilled.

Cf. Bible.

each.

deed,

work

Meya

2.

els)

Rhodes.
Cf. celery.
-

worse.

.
)(

6
;

/,

{).

megaphone.

these, here {they are).

(fepy-).

Cf Germ. Werk.
1.

violet.

large, great.

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

The Elegiac

couplet quoted above from Theognis has the following

metrical form

-i_ww

l-i-ww

I-:

-:

|_l.ww

!_:

_:_-1-^^

-:

-J-^^

|_:

_i.

The first verse is an hexameter the second, a so-called pentameter.


The latter always has a strongly marked pause in the third foot.
;

()

oi/5eis

The

avros no one of

verses beginning

human

kind

{is in) himself, etc.

are a fragment of an ancient Flower song,

which was sung by a chorus of girls and their leader the first verse by
the leader, the response by the chorus who danced as they sang. The
metrical form ( 8, 9 f.) is as follows:
;

>_^

>^wv^

^-J-

>-L.

v^

v:y

\y\yK^

\y-L-

v^

]Miere for

Supply kari

( 103 b) roses 9

my

vi/

me

>_:_

w_:_

w vv
|

<^

v-/

<^

v:/

w_i_
|

(are) the roses?

\^_l.
i.e.

\J /\
\

Where are my

( 100).

The ancient Greeks greatly


admired the feathery leaves of the parsley, and frequently used them in
the making of chaplets. The city Seli'nus was named from the plant.
aiWva

Exercise 2

beautiful parsley.

).

(
IV.

'

To
6

.
'

-.

'

..

Thorough review, Avith special reference to words,


and quotations. Accents, 9 (entire, especially

phrases,

9 e); Enclitics,

Exercise 3 (H

).

10; Proclitics, 11.

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

-)

it

I am (ior
you are (thou

()
sumA

Cf.

art),

ka-^iv

()

i<rrL(v) est.

Cf.

Agatha.

(ye) are.

estis.

sunt.

they are.

Xoiiros

born of the same womb,

()

()

sister.

Phila-

Cf.

() physician.

(J))

grief,

'
.

9 a, b, c, e

Herewith Exercise 4
The

()

father,

mater.
pater.

useful, good.'^

Cf. chres-

'.

Enclitics (type II) 10 b, 2


Uses of Avtos self, 106 ; the

Uses of the Cases, 111


Second Declension, 29

/.
8^,

mother,

'

To

Accents,

et cetera.

()

\6.

V/

MeXer?;

remaining.

(.)

tomathy.

Cf. pediatric.

sorrow. Gen.

left,

brother;

delphia.

sumus.

are.

()
good.

hence

we

( you

es.

A-B

is

'^.

).

root of this verb (to be)

..

4-.

Cf. Lat. esse.

All the forms of

which appear in this lesson are enclitic, except that of the sec.
This form never loses its accent. See Exercise 3.
ei.
pers. sing.
2 In early Christian times the word
was often, through
instead
as though from
a misconception, written
At that period these words were identical in pronunciaof
this verb

tion.

-,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

-5

wnegwaZi

other.

? -(^?).

(tVos).

<rov

',

$ ()

from. Lat.

Gen. roO

^lari.

oXos

entire.

times

().

many

if.

former, before.
the halves

().

and.

ts

4$.

lohole,

holocaust.

-o" double.

(( ()

Cf. isother-

greater, larger.

6 f)

(Gen.).

ov

equal.

mal

each

26.

{air\

both and.

you and

Cf.

195.

I.

KOINAI ENNOIAI
Axioms

(Gr.

}. },

Common

a.

iav

y.

lav

iav

^;

Practice

(is)

away),

.
^
.
.

'

added),

-^

'.

"'.

7)

(be

(he taken

.^

.
e

Notions) of Euclid.

the lohole

" Practice makes

(thing),

perfect.''^

The equals of
1

the

same (thing)

Adjectives (at least those of the first-second declension type) nor-

mally have three endings in the nominative, thus

are, etc., 100.

M.

F.

beautiful.

But comi)OMnd

&- .

adjectives usually have only ttvo endings, thus: M.-F.

unequal.

THE FIRST

.
.
.

^ .. . .
.
.

1.

2.

3 'Tyieia

iv

4-

.
.

OF GREEK

Alt

()

Cf. biology.

life.

vovs

- -ov

()

health.

Cf. hygiene.

dull, foolish.

-1'
VI.

Thorough

review of

forms, quotations.

.
Lessons

Exercise 5

One of
student when he

1^.

To

I-V

(97

.
*

).

words, phrases,

the chief difficulties encountered

The Verb.
the

() mind, understanding.

vyitia

184.

for.

by

essays the mastery of ancient Greek

of the verb, for the Greek


more elaborate even than that of
Latin.
The trouble arises in the main from the multithe scheme of the conjugation is
plicity of the forms
simple and clear.
Read carefully 131, 133 (first and last sentences),
113, 162, 171 (first sentence), and 144.
Learn the present indicative, and the optative, imperative, and infinitive of the progressive action-stem of the
is

found

in the

inflection

conjugational system

is

regular verb (active voice), taking as the type the verb

I am
In

the

loosing, unfastening,

79 A.

same way conjugate

(c/.

graphic)

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

-^ '
I am

holding,

have ;

I rejoice

Xoyo^);

am

/ am

-,

/ am

(imper.

reading

(lit.

.');

recognize again (^ava));

urging (^commanding')

hold as customary,

telling, talking Qcf.

regard,

believe

{cf.

custom, law}.

'

Repeat in negative form, as follows

Greek govern the infinitive. The infini(= esse). Hence


means Bich may I believe the wise (to be)\ This quofrom the famous prayer of Socrates with which Plato closes his

Verbs of thinking regularly


tive of the

tation

'

is

verb

iu

to be'' (eiV) is eJvaL

()

Phaedrus.

VII.

To

^.

Learn by heart the passage from Matthew quoted below.


Herewith Exercise 6 (H

---

((

()
dig through

treasure up

().

().
()

%M

through.

ittL

upon (Gen.).
TTjs
upon

(7/.

diameter.

there, in that place.

house.

()

heart.

()

For the

thief.

otrov where(ever)

PI.

()

,).

heaven,

sky.

oi

neither

(both not

treasure-

Cf. cardiac.

Cf. clex3-

not

and

nor

not).

nor

yet.

irXovo-ios rich.

()

loealth.

Cf. plutocrat.

recessive accent in the imperative of the trisyllabic

polysyllabic verbs, see 78.

Cf.

Uranus.

the earth.

treasure,

Cf. thesaurus.

()

Cf. epigram,

(/^)

steal

tomaniac.

and the

,
.
'
,
,
. THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

10

Mr)

7^?>

iv

yap

evayyeKiou

2.

6^

1.

2.

'^^^

tff-Ka' ,

to disappear.

.
..

e^eiv.

/,{'

e/cet

moth and rust (eating) make{s)

will be.

3.

oiSe

.
^
.
^.
$

- -6

'

true.

having

KapTTOs

{)

fruit.

To

''}
The

.
"

TTOvot^

'

e.

'

,<; ev

Instrumental-Oiitive,

113

fero.

Cf. carpology.

VIII.

Adverb,

winged.

bear, bring,

121.

'

'OpeaTij, 694.

The Accusative

as

F^^i? OF

//: Jf/BSr

The Verb

Moods,

GREEK

11

143.

Uses of the Subjunctive (negative always

')

a) Exhortation, 155.

b) Question of Appeal,

156.

c) Conditional Clauses, 167 A.

Uses of the Optative ( 161)

a) Wish, 162.

b) Potential,

163.

Conditional Clauses, 168 A.

c)

Learn the subjunctive (active voice) of the progressive


79 A, and conjugate the verbs in the

action-stem of

following clauses, repeating the full clause each time


a) iav
/3)

iav

el

if

<.
<^

av

(,

()

one,

8($ =

all.

lord, master, despot.

or

no

i/ (Subj.).

T^v)

iav)

()

and

()

if,

message,

i/i'e

Eat

oiJSets.

little,

small.

Cf.

microscope.

even

letter.

Zar<7e (prizes).

() toil,
how?
who?

irovos

if.

epistle.

I.

could, etc.) seize or grasp.

(c5)

(=

etc.

()

ttus evei'y

()

Voc.

letter.

7.

/ might, {would,

-.
=

writing a

should,

if

Herewith Exercise

I be

Cf.

; what? why?

ris;

,.

ns any

^ ^\

less.

pain, labor.

one.

any

thing.

En-

clitic.

Mou. 165.

2.

' )(

,
.
^ .
174.

).

'. . '

6f

(end)),

)(

^.

&(,

things,

property,

possessions,

ive shall have.

wealth.

2. ?|ets

you

pray (imperative).

will have.

lam).

iav Tis V if one be (subjunctive of

3.

ei^t9

???

TL,

ovSev

1.

.
.
,
, ,,
,

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

12

,
"
.
?. ,.'.
'

IX.

!>-

To

Koim
6

Agreement, 100, 101

The Verb
indicative,

Omission of Noun,

review the progressive action-stem

subjunctive,

imperative,

optative,

"

103 d.
present

infinitive,

and participle. 1
Conjugate the following (employing iav (neg. iav
with the subjunctive forms)
stealing these (things),

am

urging

'
^ The
Thus
:

ov

my brother to he writing
/ am not urging him (to

"

participle

ends in

-,

pi.

I enjoy writing,

pi.

-ovres

something,

do)

/ am

)
not

/
ov

this.
loosing,

we

pi.

\%.

enjoy, etc.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

13

personal endings
Verb-roots and verb-stems, 52
formations,
thematic and non-thematic
53, 54.
The Future learn the conjugation of the future active
;

(indicative, optative, infinitive, participle) of

79

a.

Formation of the Future, 61 a, c, f. Master the verbs


Conjugate the following
cited in these sections.

).
(1)

(3)

710 !

NO

(can), etc.

(do),

8.

yes!

shall speak the truth

(io-morroio)

Herewith Exercise

(2)

(do, can, etc.).


/,

by Zeus

certainly

Zeus

no, by

'

by Zetis, not I!

,
^\

(An Ancient Drinking Song)

^\ ^

yrj jLteXatva irivei,


TTLvei

'-

0 oevope

'

-L.

tJXlov aeXyjvrj.
5

()
drink.

()
()

earth.

()

Cf.

Cf.

rhododen-

sun.

()

()

() comrade.

Although

" I shall

\y

speak.''''

often

means

or ipQ

''tell,'''

moon.

the Fut.

mean " I shall

tell.'''

Cf. heliotrope.

sea.

Ace.

Cf. thalassocracy.

dron.
craipos

?
--

()

geography.

tree.

Cf. selenite.

commonly means

'
,
,
.

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

14
1.

2.

vtvet

course

100.

The poet has here employed an

, ,() (
See

the sake of the meter.


her,

2.

it, i.e.

comrades, do you contend


ing ? (with
agree with

with

me myself also

).

;)

s.v.

wishing, etc.

recommended

It is

self,

Why, my

to be drink-

and

wishing,

be learned by heart.

it

ol

^ . '<;,
To

''

First Declension, 28

dear

this

sister,

A
the

78,

;^.
Uses of the Cases,

111.

{cf. coreopsis)).

() woman.
either

Genitive with Comparatives,

9.

Cf. misogynist.
.

or.

^$ . -^

- - many.

()

silence.

()

better.

() jwssession.

etc. 121.

xoisdom.

more

p^'eciotis.

XaXtvos () bridle.

large.

() folly ($).
() mood, temper,

(,

40 A,

117 b.
Dative (Instrum. -dative) of Cause, Means,

Herewith Exercise

^.

(^

(entire),

maiden

First-Second Declension Adjectives,

...

of

for

of Anacreontics, see

ToSe

is

that in spite of the evident inferi-

ority of this Anacreontic

The

rrtvtiv

me when I too wish

These verses are from the collection


Vocabulary,

Ionic form,

12 a.

the earth.

&

4.

yrj the dark earth.


In Attic Greek the plural of

(id est),

yri

()
wrath.

breath, soul.

Cf. Psyche,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


1.

2.

3-

..
^,
.
< ';
,..

.
,
.
^' ' -^

,.
*H Xeye

7-

8.

rt

.
.
,
.
.
,
,

414.

233.

oi/Sev

opyfj

5'

',
he (she,

224.

482.

'4,

264.

442.

.,

12 C.

9.

try (imperative).

Attic Tomb Inscription

^^ (

%^

^r^

ivOaSe

For Lys'ea

552.

it) gives.

An Early

549.

, ..
), .
,..

6.

208.

^eipov

eaTL

6.

15

(her) father

Semon

set

up here

(this)

monument

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

16

).

1.

,
, , !. ,

evayyeKiov

-',

' (VI,

45).

iv

ev

2.

aya^ol', 6

6$

1.

late

love.

wait, remain, abide.

To

<;
The

-, - and

-as,

Herewith Exercise

w)

()

corjier.

Cf.

less,

smaller, shorter.

either

(Ace.
greater.

or.

larger,

416.

28 A, B.
:

'

120

d.

not,

(17)

,
,

on I say

\iy

that.

and

polygon.

...

M.vav8po^,

10.

then, therefore.

angle,

la

feminine and masculine nouns

The Dative with Adjectives

(vy

if.'

the (one) abiding.

First Declension

and

word.

,
'8

XI.

in

',

worthless, bad.

()

2.

iwKXToKrjs

TTJs

nor

side.

()

yet.

Cf. pleurisy.

triangle

under, sub

that.

(,

(/).

19 a).

stretch under, subtend.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

^
"

TOY

-.,

'

<;

.
,

Et

"

/cat

^) .

17

'

ort

.
.
..

.
8e.

ort

-.

^.

^'

of every triangle.

1.

3.

let there

be.

having the angle under


irXevpa
4. Note the order

),
^

6.

6/

(loe

We

say "i?i

every,''''

for

etc.)

ywviav

(having)
say " at
") greater,

etc.

So in

line 9

(/

etc.

yap ,- for

' ? {)

if not.

nor yet.
on the one hand
now, now then, ties the sentence with the preceding sentence, wliile
looks forward to a balancing clause with
( 190), thus
on the other hand, etc. In
now on the one hand
this instance, however,
has been supplanted by the more emphatic
7.

nor yet surely.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

18
7.

So in

Observe the emphatic position of

lines 8, 10,

8.

hv ^v

it

14.

EQUAL is

not, etc.

was shown.
the very (point) which it-was-necessary (Set) to

eSei

Q. E. D.

s/ioio (Set|ai).

( 198)

in 10, 13.

loould he {hvLtis, -not)


it

17.

and

XII.

l^

To

<;

Within
soul of

my
my

8<;

evXaXov

'

''^

\^vj(r]V

\8
/.
'

MeXea7/30i?.

heart the sweetly prattling maid,


soul, hath

Love himself portrayed.


Walter Headlam.

Translation by Dr.

The First Declension (entire), 28 A, B, C, D { }).


The Declension of Adjectives (first-second declension),
40 A,

(entire).

TOY

?
^'^^7'

-^^.

,
)
'

'
he

*? ,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

,,

e^ovTa,

Ti^l'

'

17

.
,

otl

.,
.

.,
.
''
.'

is

',

^,

-^

)
, ^.
'

, .
5 step, base.

Gen.

es,

each

(} each

'rav

(of

'

{cf.

ddda ()

two).

to each.

'E/jws

25

Ivtos imthin

Acc.

Dat.

^^
2

ySao'tl'

()

Svolv

19

(Gen.),
ivrbs

ivrbi

ttjs

a straight

line, side.

iv\a\os -ou sweetly prattling

to prattle).

Eros) fashioned

{cf. plastic).

(,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

20

3.

^|ei the]/ loill

greater, etc.
4.

T7]v

See

equal sides.

129

g.

have also the angle (of the one)


the {angle) inclosed by the

TOY

Zew?

i(TTLV

tol^

,, ^" ,^'

'

8e

vneprepov.

Aios,.

^-\

2,

Of Eni'alon, daughter of

2,

,04\^3

,
ment

70

/;

/[]5,

Spou'dides (the) potter,

(the)

tombstone

retrograde inscription of the seventh century b.c, found on a fragof a

marble tombstone.

XIII.

^.
'

ly

To TpCrov

*H Xeye

rt

'<

Review
The First

Second Declension, 29
Demonstrative Pronouns
The Article
cKctvo, 25 b
24 b, and IkcXvos
Uses of the Article, 103 Position of Article
2-4 a
Declension, 28

A, B, C (o ')

'. .8, .. 208.

Toi in truth.
(/cat

'a

),

and lohatever

is

higher than these.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


and Attributive, 104
Uses of
nouns, 105
;

Herewith Exercise

21

Position of Demonstrative Pro-

106

Uses of Cases,

111.

11.

." .,

'

TOY

At Ty

OTL

eial

avTTj

ecrrt

-/^

->

-^-

/,

yap

et?

. ,,,

ijrei

-6

,-

-^. ,

.
.
'

/cat

evdela

At

5.

7.

12.

ei's

(it

eSet Set^at.
let

there fall

has fallen upon)

interchangeable.

upon
it

15
{intersect) them.

intersects.

^.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

22

XIV.
To

<;,

ovSep

tS'

<; -}.

.8, ". 557.

8,

8
'<;

Et avajKatov

aBiKelv.

J
'

J"

t^

Pronunciation of

Top<yia, 469.

iv

, -, ,

Double Negatives

5 e.

ovScis there is no one, 180 a.

Conjugation (entire) of

-,

am, 91

also of

and
Conditional Clauses, 165, 166 A,
92.
167 A, 168 A.
Herewith Exe rcise 12.

()
do wrong treat unjustly

8to

to be loronged.

I should

-,

F.

(^),

--, .

restrain.

escort.

choose.

Cf.

send;

Cf.

-- ()

conduct,

procession.

pomp.

down

hold

6 f

()

?
--

(the) cause

... than.

(Gen.).

another.
nec-

essary.

(17)

tongue.

more

or than,

Cf.

more,

of

more
(17)

Cf. glossary.

dreadful.

...

either

Cf.
.

or.

beautiful, better.

the

act of learning.

the thing learned.

rather

().

() stepmother
() poverty. Cf. irovos.
() shadow. Cf. sciagraph.

...

prudent, discreet,

Sophronia.

() hymn.
is as, hoio

sober.

COS
THE FIRST YEAP OF GREEK
1.

OvK (*
ecTTLV

2.

,-

-<;

),

423.

,^, .

220.
-wV^^Aci

ovoe ev

ecrrt

ovSev

ZeC,

^^

.
,
.
,.

".

epya

8.

9-

Mop. 408.

.
%, .

^'

6.
7

.
.
,...

MevavSpos,

Et

ovSeu

ovSev

23

810 2.

.
,^^.
,.

ecrrt

436.

127.

e^eiv.

637.

,^

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

24

^.

XV.

'

To

,,

Sec,

'
,

Review the conjugation


Interrogative Sentences
178, II

(ought to^ speak}, 177


os w^o, 24 c

Pronoun:

of

te

Bel e-Trevheiv

MepavBpov^

.
.

744.

91 (entire).

Sentence Questions with

Verbal in -tcov (XeKreov one must


;

Alpha-privative, 99

Relative

Relative Clauses Avith the Indie,

Subj., Opt., 165 B, 166 B, 167 B, 168 B.

Herewith Exercise

()
F.

(-)

iti

13.

injure,

harm

loait,

wait

for,

abide, tarry,

delay.

-8,

{there is need) one ought, one

Governs

should.

an

urge on, press

F.

on, hasten.

infinitive

with accusative as subject.

()

$ - ,
;

178, II.

srirely,

harmful.

185.

Adv. tooYa^os.

tvtoell.
icell

done

perity.
;

nicht

tvy/tgood!

ovSi

cv-irpa-yCa (17)

wahr?

truly, vera,

hut surely.
by no means,

and
;

well-being,

pros-

not, nor, 7ior yet.

not then?

8; ?
ye or

8.
<
is

it

not SO ?

184.

of course.

in fact, in truth.
-ov beneficial.

6 ye

178,11.
ye certainly.

'

optl

184.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

25

Nat.

ayadoyv

ovhev ye

yap

^'
'^

^.

. ,

"^

<

ovS'

.
.
;

15

^/ ,
.

ayauov,

HoXireiqi,

379

In the dialogue from which this brief passage is taken Socrates (see
Vocabulary of Proper Names) is represented as leading the conversation.
The answers are made in this particular instance by Adimantus. Socrates
contends that God is good and therefore (see the second portion of the
extract)

is

not the cause of

usual

GOD

'

popular myths)
4.
7.
9.

11.

A new
14.

6 deos

is

good.

ye.

Partitive genitive, 120.

aya.ewv.

For the neg.


6

evil.

ye ( 185), a frequent order, ye emphasizes as


(as contrasted with the false representations of Him in

ye eeos

1.

TToiel;

(also

does

it

-^,

1.

ye indicates that this

series begins in

1.

().

9) see Exercise 13.

do any evil?

14.

When

is

the last of this series of questions.

tivos genitive of

the verb

is

omitted,

it is

usually

^.

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

26

^.

XVI.

.,,

To

<,

'

ye

(-,

Review the conjugation of


91
'-, 190, 191
184
185.
large number of verbs have
Verbs in -.

92)

progressive action-stem an

7%-).

Attic Greek these verbs regularly contract this

thematic vowel (including

in the

preceding the thematic vowel

I am making (stem:

(54), thus:

etc.,

--

In

with the

-et)

in the pres. and fut.


Learn the conjugation of
with the subj., opt., imper., infin.,
and partic. of the progressive action-stem, 81 A. For

indie, active, together

the future, see also 61 b.


In the same manner conjugate
love,

affectionately,

sogynist)
F.

|
;

F.

kiss;

-, F.

spirit: (a)

Cf. Lat.

()
upon, long for, desire.

Regularly

fol-

( 115 d).

()

sire.

treat

hate {cf. mi-

do wrong (to), treat unjustly

token, since.

()

F.

14.

set one''s heart

lowed by genitive

seem.

Herewith Exercise

'

F.

life,

fumus.

(b) de-

-ov few, scant,

number).
ttokv much.
us as.

little

Cf. oligarchy.
Cf.

polygamy.

(in

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

.
'
) '
,
, ,
. ,

27

'

6 0e6<;,

ecrrt,

Xeyovacv,

ot

'

/.

(4)

yap

'23.

ings (in

life)

()

)(
6

by heart

this passage be learned

,--

, ,

,
..

Tliis is

ills.

{).

,
.,

than the

- .

recommended that

Si

,.

25

the bless-

( 15)

are for us far fewer

similar to the old Greek proverb

It is

379

.. ,

\'

-Ky'.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

28

^.
"

XVII.
To

'Of

,- .
veo^.

Mevavhpov^

425,

Review Lessons XV-XVI.


Infinitive as a

Noun

(^Articular Infinitive), 172, II a.

Exercise 15.
*

TE
()

-)(
)

die.

marry.

Cf.

ding, marriage.

',

<

look, have sight, see.

use

(voOs), think, etc.

()

^,
(),

mind

one's

(before a vowel,

KpviTTOs

-l>v

')

1.

2.

a reply

3.

vio%

hut.

TToiei

,
6

only

Cf.

mono-

-ov

-5.

new, young.

Cf.

neo-

straight.

Cf.

pliyte.

Cf.

-6v upright,

,. ..
orthodoxy.

all), especially.

certainly

*H ,-

- -ov alone,

cryptogram.

As

tone.

hidden, secret.

most (of

use one^s wits


think, have understand-

be prudent; have in mind,

ing,

()
truth.

consider,

(- -).

intend.

dcC always.

()

closely,

F.

iced-

bigamy.

Cf.

examine

Cf. sceptic

etc.

()

Cf. chrouology.

ttoUl.

),
,.

olSev, 6

-<

time.

avTod,

225.

U. 4.2C

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

4.

5-

6.

,..

,'
%, .
^. ^

aei.

e^ei

437.

^.

oe

8.

2.
4.
rrj

839

1195.

9 2S.

Atcr^vXog,

*j.

29

'^.

(?).

oibev he knoivs.

ayawrj.
5.

7.

..

the

man

loho does not marry.

iv

Cf. 6

101, 15.

poetic for

68.

"

-\
XVIII.

^;
^\<.,
6

The Demonstrative Pronoun

et?

ayei.

832

outos, 25

a'^^

?.

Position

Position of Demonand Attributive, 104


Pronouns^ 105 Meanings of Demonstrative
Pronouns, \llO; Prepositions, 123-129: learn the

of Article

strative

prepositions listed in these sections, together with their

fundamental meanings, and

compound each

of

these

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

30

-, -),

prepositions in turn with the verbs

throw {e.g.,

step, go,

observing that the

preposition precedes the verb and that ev and

,-,

before

Herewith Exercise

1.

2.

3-

,
-

"Ayet

5.

eivaL

6.

8.

9-

.
II.

16.

. %, .

Et SeiV

become

( 18).

268 "^.

,.

,
" ,
heuva

.
^.

Bel.

877 ".

, .
.
,,
-...

ovSev

ayei.

592.

Mol.

' .
, ...

11.

/cet

'

aet

avTod,

328

^.

448 W.
391

W.

250.

, ..
,..
,.

268.

12.

75.

.
..
/ .

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


nXovTelv

12.

MevdvSpov,

3
14

31

TreVecr^at

15-

2.

Sdv\

6.

TO

^ijv

12

. 300.
.

MevdvSpov,

ev-TV)(ovaiv,

M.evavhpov,

to suffer.

447.

sympathy.

Cf.

{the) to live.

ye in

11.

. 582.

MevdvSpov,

rj

iSpaaas you did.

C.

120.

BODY.

he {she,

12.

to he

14.

it) is

poor.

113 d.
able.
Cf.

$.

'^

XIX.

ivveaKaCBeKa.

'

^ .
To

The Formation

MV

of

8.

Words,

, 190-191;

99.

187

185; yap,

Tot, 196.1

184;

1 "
that laborious study of words, and syntax, and idiom, which
no serious student of tlie Classics can afford to neglect. We desire to
recreate the world of Plato and Sophocles, to see what they saw, as they
saw it, think what they thought, as they thought it and in the wonderful
language which they spoke, there is no shade of expression, however delicate, no particle, however trivial, in which there may not lurk a subtle
force, to miss which is to fall short of apprehending the full significance
of ancient life and thought."
J. Adam, The Vitality of Platonism, i). 219.
.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

32

The two negatives


pounds

(oi)/c,

( 144) and

,)

some

of

their

com-

', ',
,
'. ^.
-THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

Et

33

,-

et

,
-),

iav

,.

^aipeiv

.'

iav oe

.
-

XX.

^
, .

"

'

Ancient Oracle.^

Primary Personal Endings,


140
Learn the conjugation of the present and future
indicative, and the subjunctive of the progressive actionI release {for mystem, middle-passive, of

The Middle Voice,

54.

()

self^, 79 B,

and

Like

able 80.

I understand (Greek

conjugate

says '''Stand

, -,

upon''''

Like
willing,

I am

of

(eVi)).

conjugate

F.

tvish ;

F.

think;

be born, become.

(/

/ am

F.

xaipeiv

honor).
one must {ought to) dismiss (permit

it

to

say

'^^

Fare-

well ").
3

These verses are an apocryphal version of the famous oracular

response regarding Socrates.

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

34

TE

.-' ' .
..
.
-

()

unroll (a scroll),

turii

light.

the pages.

sucivis

come, go.

through (a book,

irois

he said.

horses.

pleasure

take

with

oneself

in,

(Dat.),

19).

-in

121.

please

and

de-

choose out.

feel

see

/ delight in writing ;
I take delight

go

etc.).

pleasant, sweet,

Cf.

(-

pick out,

Cf. Lat. lego.

()

() man,

vir.

- -ov

opvis

pi.

best.

Ti longer, still,

(, ^) hird.
ornithology.

furthermore,

long ago.

(, -) dog.

(koivos).

Dat.

Cf.

wa-trep just as.

,
5

,"

?,

--

rjoeTaL,

TL

aya^oi',

eav

6.

,-

.
,
, -,

hi-ep^op^ai,

ayadov^

1.

"

- $., ,
^
iv

KOLvfj

2.

Cf.

iciser, loisest.

cynic.

"

Cf.

-8,

-08.

(to) profit, gain.

common

Dat.

palseography.

more.

still

in

Koivfj

Gen.

tl

,.

my friend.

',

{"'.

See below.

(6), 121.
is

6,

i.e.

a figliting-cock.

here employed as an adjective,

ovs

-.

written (them),
6.

we

7.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

ypa^pavres which they left in books, having

iv

i.e.

35

in the

form

ofioriling.

The ancient " book" was a

roll.

see.

Modes of Address

, ,,

was the custom

to addi-ess one's friend either by


employ a complimentary epithet,
good sir ! my friend, etc.
such as
Frequently epithet and name are combined
Forms of address like Sir ! or Mr. were not in use among equals, but
belonged to the language of the slave and hireling. Mister is a corrupmeant
So tlie common address in Modern Greek,
tion of Master.
originally my Lord ! and was employed by slaves and other subordinates
In the New Testament the disciples reguin addressing their superiors.
Compare the refrain common in Greek
larly address their Lord as
Christian hymns
Lord, have mercy I

In ancient Greece

his given

it

name,

or else to

4,

XXI.

'

et?.

To

'<.

eav aWrfkot^

'';.

Review Lesson XX.

The

Participle with the Article

(one) saying

(i.e.

participle

ends

and

is

in

^^;

- --

wishing,

becoming,

understanding.

Herewith Exercise

18.

Note that the

-^evos
declined exactly like

first-second-declension adjective, such as

thus

the

who says) this, 174.

(- -4 -),

middle-passive

'-

40

a
;

thinking,

being

able,

THE FIB ST YEAR OF GREEK

36

( 62)

acoustic.

Cf.

hear (oneself)

ill

()

ivell

to

(spoken of)

will,

and

()

will,

BiKaios

()

"^

1.

2.

3-

4-

purpose

'

aSiKelv

slight,

worthless,

,.

6.

^."
when

-ov

be wealthy.

.
,,.

ov^

&

in

'

.
.
,
, ,' ..
,.

^
(JTt,

yet,

preference.''''

mean.

Cf. thyroid.

5.

6.

,F.

(in poetry also

27.

expresses

more as a feeli7i(j,
more as a rational

and

-ov just, righteous.

lohoever.

interchanged

may

the loish or will

Cf.

plan,

()
door.

wish,

are

and

strict distinction,

be

counsel, senate.
F.

and
synonymous

uearly

often be

F.

be willing,

"^

hear (oneself)

icilling, wish, desire, prefer.

consent, desire, will,

to

(spoken of).

volo,

'

^',

/tear.

asked.

.
tcrao'tt'

because.

.
64.

232.

236.

,
,,
285.

they

what they need.

p-

know

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

37

. '

'- 4<.
XXII.

/cat

To AVTpov

*0

/3<?,

irepl

'

MeXea7/oo9.

On Heliodora''s brow the garland pines,


But she the garland of the garland shines.

Translation by Dr. Walter Headlam.


Review 54, 140.
Learn the conjugation of the
present indicative and the subjunctive, optative, impera-

and participle of -the progressive action-stem,


and of the future indicative, optative, infinitive, and participle of
and of
79
80.
Uses of the Subjunctive
tive, infinitive

-,

Exhortation, 155.
Question, 156. "v.'

a)

b)

Uses of the Optative


a)

'

v'

WisTi, 162.

b) Potential,

163.

Conditional Clauses, 168 A.

c)

Herewith Exercise

19.

()

'

Conditional Glauses, 167 A.

c)

it

is

TE
()
and

be answering, answer.
likely,

likely, as it seems.

as

as

is

lamp.

-\.

shine.

Cf.

die out (of fire), fade,

waste away.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GRERK

38

- -?
()

shameful.

<rTi

tivtp if indeed.

-jrOTepos

194.

\\.. least, by

about the head (poetic).

irepl

more shameful.

is

it

(of

two)

ritrum

very,

-a

;
an

()

whether

land.

or?

as

Polus.

gar-

Cf. Stephen.

187

TO

TO

ooKei

YloTepov

() wreath, crown,

neither.

certainly not

Common

colt.

proper name

more,

which

irOTcpov;

;
,

^
worse.

it is

yi certainly

most.

uter ?

...

no means,

iroTc'po

eivai,

..
, ^

aoLKeiv ]

e/Aotye.

It
5

aoiKeiv

fj

"

enrep

'

ye.

'

Kakof re
SiJTa.

^
Tt

15

etrrt

, %<,

^
;

'

eoLKC,

)(^.

aya^ov,

.
^,
^,

^ '

if

Topylq., 474, 469.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

Uorepov

whether

question

1.

2.

Classical Greek regularly employed irbrepov


ij;
ij
.or? to introduce the two members of a direct alternative
.

is

{utrxim

" Whether

39

an

Herod or

?).

Compare

the

that youngling king.^''

usage in archaic English

Beaumont, Psyche,

161.

, . ,.
'^ ,..
^^, ,

.
,
' -^8 ,..
' ,^."" ^,
-
..
',. <;,

yiyvov

714.

Mei>avSpo^,

ecrrt

479.

elvai 9e\e.

631.

33.

"

iv

,
.
.
,
^ ,,.
.
, ,..
) ,, .
.
,.
,

"

6.

ap^eiv re

215 D.

Meyiarov

346.

avSpl

8.

.
II.

6. Agis,

'

/. -^

164

^.

366.

245.

32,

-.

the son of Archida'mus.

is

studied.

7.

for a man.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

40

,-. '

XXIII.
To

TTOielv,

^.

iroLelv.

^/?,
Contract Verbs in

Learn the conjugation of the

present indicative, and the subjunctive, optative, impera-

and participle of the progressive action-stem


of
I am making for myself 81 B.
Conjugate in the same way
I believe,
tive, infinitive,

()

{^

regard.

A'erbs of thinking (see 179)

hold as customary, regard, deem, suppose.

(first

),

person singular also

F.

think.

F.

believe, hold, suppose.

Conjugate the verbs in the following phrases


1)

think

2)
3)

4)
5)
6)

ovK

<;

(or

elhevai

(X think

to

know^ 1

I know.

elBevai

I think

eihevaL

I do

elvai

I do

not know.

I know.

not think

I think I am

'^

wise.

elvai.

Xeyetv disgraceful

con-

sider the telling of falsehoods.

Herewith Exercise

20.

The second person singular, present

indicative of

/xot is otei,

not

oCtj.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

,
.,-.

TE
()

ooaL

F.
do, fare (wpay^ pragmatic, practical).

deliberate,

make

pl^n^

-,,

F.

point out.

care

for, take care of (Gen.).


olSa, infin.

elScvai

to

,
-, -

115.

know

41

secretly

(fe'S-

signs

Cf.

to,

indicate,

semaphore.
suspect,

think

manner,

way.

().

foi5- fiS-).

()
everywhere (oD where).
T

KaC both

and.

()

rpoiros

way

.,

in which.

OIMAI

",, ," ,
^
"

Kat

elSevai

eiSevat,

elSevau,

.
Et

"

113

e.

-,
ol

oe

re

',

-eivai

crlyfj

turn,

in which way, in the

Sv

195.

Aevopos

',

'

,
,
,
) . , ^.

-\. .

do not even be suspected, do not even permit yourself

be suspected.

115.

having learned,
try
you will reap the fruit

{6$.

).

to

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

42

(another says another {thing)) one says one thing,

"

another another, alius aliud

1.

5-

6.

7-

MevavSpo^,

aStKeiv

2.

3-

.
,..

dicit.

one has at one time, another at another.

'.
.^
irepi

yap

)
,

^
ett'at

,^,

,'

aya^ct.

8.

"^

)()

136.

.
.

.
,

^.

560

..

114.

.
.
.
,
,
).
.

310.

^,
- ^ .^.
',,

,
.

^
?
THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

II

^^rA

43

CDP4 ^ lkV>^ A ^
i<fei<t,^^orA|

Al ^l

,
7.
8.

Z^Or TOY TO
LAXO^
rA

^' .
atet,

\
(6 =

-.

too much.

10.

ck

it

without (Gen.).

is possible.

Avev

{) without living wisely,

for any one.


11. A metrical tomb inscription found in Attica, and written in the
old. Attic alphabet (date c. 600 e.g.).
alel (del)

()

I shall always
this

be called a maiden,

name.

.,

'

XXIV.
To

," ,

xf)v)(r)v

My

cr^erXt',

Love, to burn so oft


She too hath wings, thou wretch

, 0,

Translation by Dr.

79

80

of
;

Kairj^,

beware.

will fly aloft.

Review the forms already learned

..

soul that swims in fire forbear,

Or she

having received

,-

Walter Headlam.

,, .

81

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

44

Master

Formation of the Future 61, 62 (entire).


the verbs cited in these sections.
:

Herewith Exercise

21.

TE

()
F.

burn,

'
to,

toil,

poor.

Cf.

and
encaustic
work (cf.

,
^

set fire

(-

(--).
ttovos),

$, ,

be

penury.

(0)

Love.

'

Cf.

fugio.

(in poetry also

()

.
, ,^ ,
('?

Eros.

Tot

Cf.

many times.
() imng. Ace.

excellence, virtue.

yireSov firm, lasting.

"Epws

?
'
^

aet.

()

flee,

--.

flight.)

()
aUi

F.

pi.

vT^pvyas.

unflinching, cruel.

possessions.

-////^

'^

'

e^et.

315-318.

the soul sioimming in fire.


rrjs

apeTrjs

rbv

loe loill

their wealth for our respectability (Gen. of

are the vulgar

In this quotation the

and breeding.

not take-in-exchange

Value or Exchange, 116 e).


the ayaOoi those of good birth

,
'
<^. .
|

XXV.
To

The Third Declension


learn the declensions of

Read carefully
goad,

30 A, and

vv| night,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


lion, 6 irats child, boy,

Greek, 33

31

father,

34.

divinity,

()
( 61 d) separate, distinguish, judge.

F.

^.

anchor.
experience

ivithout

?
-

(Gen.).

*<

()

()

dirk, large knife.

on the

-6v

-oi/

highest {of all).

voice.

Cf.

Tt

'

509

ajKvpai

'^

623

^^^
<.

yap iare

,
^
..
< -.
), .
/c

eariv.

veot

ovic

6.

W.

269

cr/cta

megaphone.

0eov.

Tod

4-

left-

, deov

oiSe

left side,

4,
<; .

) ,..
' %/.. \
^, ^\,
,
'

2.

handed, awkward, loutish.

() -ovTos old man.


() -wTos love. Cf. Eros.

1.

Ace.

Cf. critic.

bo-ns whoever.

of

7^p(ov

man^

mother,

()
()

"
45

22

;)(

52.

27.

,.

THE FIRST YEAB OF GREEK

46
"

7.

8.

' ^,..

avSpl

yvvrj.

164

.
,
-,

)
^,

W.

634,

. 121.

ttJ 5

.
.

4. Plato tells us that these words were said to have been spoken by an
Egyptian priest in the course of a conversation with the Athenian statesman Solon. They serve to remind us of "the eternal boyhood of the
Greeks "
6.

9.
10.

to

-- it

bis

perfume

perishes.

tioice to

perfume

().

XXVI.

To

"

.
nrepl

same

error.

giving grace,

'

^.
lesson,

(?),

numerals is
Herewith Exercise 22.
:

the

e^.

Review the preceding


of the

make

sweet.

and add the declensions

Tpcis, TtTxapes, 51.

FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

TE

,.

- make known

F.

()
;

usu-

ally in this sense as a passive

,
,

F.

-i(j

fraud

(?

()
()

cunning),

-at -a

-? -bv

Xeaiva
opKos

1.

2.

()

()

both.

lioness.

oath.

(?))

{-).

^,
*^^/

5-

" ^/^',

Ov/c

vale!

water.

39.

growth, stature
-ijpos

Cf.

hy-

{).
mark

en-

mark, character.

^. .

^," ^,

"

168.

^."

.
^.
^

1/

26.

25.

Ne/u,.

1,

1.

Con-

banquet-song.

MevavSpov,

^^

good

in

^
.
- ,
.
,.
--,.
/,^ .

4-

6.

he

graved or impressed, distinctive

^,

TLKTeLv, "

()

()

Cf. Orcus.

Et? ecrrt

bear

to,

drant, hydrophobia.

fox.

mortal

F.

()

immortal.

-e/cos

give birth

-).

6\.

trast

-ov

()

,
-

F.

health (vyieia).

bloio, breathe.

loithovt

(rsK-,

reproach, upbraid.

F.

9
-5

47

..

408.

ot

,
,
,.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

48

avhpl

'TytaCveLV

8.

Sevrepov 8e

"

TO

'.

one (only).
5.

by

2.

to

^^
\j*

129 g.

Gods and men

7^vos (to) race.

'

iwi

are of the

for giving birth

same

race.

The mother

of both is the Earth.


8.

ance),

to

become beautiful in growth (stature, appearto be

young with one's friends.

*
XXVII.

-,..

To

yap

Review Lesson

The

<

XXI

Participle.

rjherat

and Exercise

The

99

2.

18.

active participle of the progres-

and is declined accordand third declensions the masculine and

first

aet,

sive action-stem has the suffix

ing to the

\6<^

neuter being of the third declension, the feminine being


declined like

28.

Learn the declension of


A, and
\iyov felling,
doing, 50

being.,

, , '-$,
Decline

,
Uses

of

the

ol8a,

being present,

Participle

^.

Herewith Exercise

23.

making,
being with,

being loved.

173-176

(especially with

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

49

TE

-/
-,-
^, Cf.

()

( -yvo-.

he ignorant

iyvoia,

know).

muddle.

oihiv

bear apart,

differ.

makes no

differ-

eiJwopoi,

pros-

it

-, (

remember !
trust,

be

it

all

in a

(Imperative).

have faith (in),

believe (in) (Dat.

ence.

am

).

appears (so).

per, thrive, find a tvay (iropos).

()
-6v

av

'

Papvs heavy.

T^

1.

2.

3-

4-

5-

6.

nei-

.
.
^
ther.

another.

Cf.

(71

(of two),

Cf heterodoxy.
cv

the right

barometer.

Tpov

other.

the

Cf.

() due measure,

puint of lime, opportunity.


ovScrcpos
ovScVcpov

turn again.

in,

25

Kaipos

endurable.

later.

Cf.

hysteronprote-

roii.

such (a case).

JliaTeveLv Set

as, hoio ! that

<

(= ').

^^.
.

eariv

.
^ .
.
Mevav'^pov,

), .
), .

, ,,..

^^

405.

TTotet

197.

,...

446.

558.

627.

ear)

Kat

. 354.
532.

.
.
^.
,.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

50
8.

/,
^^';

'

ianv

yap

ev

398

,^ ^^ ,
?

^. ,
;

"E/xot-ye

Tt

ovhkv

^-.

TLva i^rj,

'

8, .

.
, ',
Tt

'

,
,
,
^
,
;

^Eo'Ttl'.

Nat.
6

,
, ,
.
;'

15

escapes his
10, 1.
lohich, etc.
7.

who

own

.
,
-, .

ovSpov

he fails to observe that he

%-

(.
is

a bore (he

notice being heavy)


rls

^,

loves not to be loved in return

whenever one'loves another

{)

is it

by this one

not possible for one

whom

he loves?

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

(
?

XXVIII.
To
Tliareoetv Bel

Copy

701

^
,
- . ^

,,, ,'/^
*Avrjp

?
-

'

''

^
.^
?.
^

he got, he had.

is

.
^

, ., ,

,^
^

410.

evTv\eiv.

'

m
.
^,
,,^, ^ -

\<
^..

MeVaz/8/309,

"8

XXVII).

2.

eluoai.

several times the selection

(Lesson

1.

/cat

51

ypaOs (Ace. ypaOv)

an old wovian.

pulled out the hairs.

they made.

full of evils {faults).

from

they do not see.

they observe very accurately.

themselves.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

52

Before proceeding to the following lessons the pupil

$,5,

should have a thorough mastery of the pronouns


-,
os
, avTos

Kivos
-, 21-25; of the first and second
declensions of nouns and adjectives, 28, 29, 40; of the
third declension, as presented in Lessons XXV-XXVIII

and of the forms of the verb indicated in Lesson XXIV.


Moreover, he should make himself master of the vocabulary, both words and phrases, employed in Lessons IXXVIII and in Exercises 1-23.

XXIX.
To
'Aei

"\

Seovre^

:09

..
'

,
'}';

., 641.

Review Lesson XV and Exercise 13.


The Infinitive Avith Verbs of Preventing, 172, II b (7).
Indefinite Relative and Temporal Clauses, 166 B,
167 B, 168 B, 170.
Herewith Exercise 24.

TE

, -

()
he a slave

strike

at,

().

()
manifest,
clearly.

it

(and he
and

'

said).

-6

prevent, forbid (Infin.).

they permit, allow.

dear,

I said),

, - -,
os said he

braid.

()

said I (mid

pu7ush, up-

visible,
is clear,

with
happy.

Ace.

good genius

blessed

(),

3*

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

$
=

-is

5
?

()

Tpoiros(o).

. -

Voc.

(i/iai) (ttiSs

() voyage

with

,).

MEN

'

iyco,
;

yap

^^
sible,

-,

quam

beatissimns.

AE

ye,

eoye,

ei

ae

ere

SrjXov

yap

. ;,
^-

Nat

ovSev eVt-

ye,

' ey.

ye

eVt-

ere

1.

]^

"

yeveadai,

ere

'

- -^^,

A'l

OY.

eivai

qiiam.

as happy as pos-

elvai

of 65e.

very much.

superlative

sail).

(end.) I suppose, methinks.

-8

Adv.

thus, as follows.

Cf. ourws (oSros).

happy, blessed.

-lov

in every

way, altogether.

spirit, soul, desire.

(0) Lysis.

53

eivai

ere

'

suppose

Xeye.

Tiiese particles suggest a certain

hesitation in putting the ciuestion.


1 This selection from the Lysis (pron. IVsis) of Plato extends through
Lesson XXXIII, and is later repeated and expanded. Socrates is seated
with the lad Lysis upon a bench in a gymnasium at Atliens.

SWvdx^viXi^ %\

TiO^

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

54
8.
9.

sider

how you might


Trot

^
?

become.

to

oVoi.

is

the indirect form of ttws;

XXX.

To

(they are eager) they eagerly con-

,
-

be happy,

cf.

"

.
'^.

^'

etc., 116 e; with Verbs of


115 g.
The Third Declension Learn the declension of ris
who? what? and tis tl some one, any one, etc., 27; also
of TO
chariot, 32,
^evos race, etc., and

Genitive of Price, Value,

Ruling,

35.

Herewith Exercise

25.

TE
()
rule.

turn (over)

to

,,

19

for

pay.

--

offer

()

()

q^tid vero 9

coined silver,

()

().

MEN
Xeyet?
elvaL

pay (a debt),

.
?

() hire, tcages.
() hired servant.

PI. reins.

driver

(),

vero.

-ov free.

bridle.

()

(for

surely, in truth, verily, Lat.

money

{Apyvpos (0) silver).

F.

b) bring to an end

complete, execute,

F.

sale, sell.

() ,

one, en-

trust to, permit.

(')

'

from (Gen.).

---

furthermore.

^'

ae
6

.
Se'

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

-) < ,
^,,.

r^

'

Ecrrt Tt9

19.

25

whom

).

&v they would permit (cf.


is an intensive particle, and

(-

when he

takinrj).

contending (in a race).


22.

if you-cnnceive-a-desire to ride

upon {some) one, etc.


20.
and to take (strictly

but

rj

fjv

'

55

then 9 etc.

(&
is

is

ifev);

employed with

great frequency after interrogatives, 192,


26.

106, 116

MEN

^,.

,, .

^
.
,
^

,
,

e.

- ,
,

,
;

^,

^17

,
;

ecocrt

35

TEE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

56

28.

29.

TOUT eVrt,

the
6.v.

mule team.
The 6.v is repeated

later

&v.

strike.

6;

30.
31.

whence 9 wherefore
no one.

? hoio f (the tone is scornful).

(to)

()

32.

irXeiovos they

Tjyodvrai

33.

muleteer.

hold in higher esteem, think more

of.

their affairs.

34.

. '.
.

XXXI.
To

An

owl

to

Athens.

Cf.

" Coals

to Newcastle.''^

, , ,

The Genitive with Verbs of Touching,


The Third Declension 30-35.
The Reflexive Pronouns
:

23.

Herewith Exercise

()
lead.

Cf. iraid-aywyas.

()

().

-OVTOS ruler

of course, doubtless.

loillingly, intentionally.

still,

-ov

our

surely not

()

tended a hoy.

in turn, again.

{%).
.

furthermore.

c.

.? ^ 178, II.

--

.
slave

very

altogether,

means,

handle

touch,

(Gen.).

()

115

26.

TE

,&

etc.,

who

many

wholly,

yes.

-ov

your {i^eh).

at-

().
by all

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

, .
,
;

yap,

",

^,

MEN

- ^ ^
eVt

, .

A'

ap^etv
,

''

].

^'

57

'

'
/
/
<
-.
;

^
), /.

SovXov

,^

^l

oe

"

8.

,
45

39.

/ipxei

Ti's

This

is

the interrogative ris

-).

The slave who conducted the


Athenian lad to school, carried his writing-tablet, musical instruments,
etc., is a familiar figure on Athenian vases.
40.

7rat3a7w70s

41.

,
-

ia-Ti)

after deivov
44.
47.

ei's

,.

is free, etc.

114.

he sets over

'
,
;

^.

for one who

surely it-is-a-dreadful-thing

upon).

' ), ,,- MEN

(5et-

Accusative and infinitive construction

'

^,
,
,
,
-, .
yoip

50

58

.
^
,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


'H/act^cXet?

el

55

'

"-

,-

iyco,

<C,
-

\J-^

'

-'

,'

48.

iireiSav

49.

fKeiv-q

you may

^r

when{ever) you return home.

eXerjs
.

eg.

SHE permits.

(^ for

happy hoy
in any respect., at

be her

51.

Tt

52.

.1

OS

75,

54.

her.,

all.

To Aevrepov

^/

Uses

of

^9.

the

(b) Question,

Subjunctive:

156

.f

.8, ,. 62.

(a)

Exhortation,

(c) Modest Assertion, 158

ditional Clauses, 165, 167

Make an

ys that

120 a),

and he said with a laugh.


siirely you havenH wronged

XXXII.

BaSi^e

aury

110.

155;

(d) Con-

(e) Final Clauses, 160.

intensive study of the passage contained in

the preceding

11.

48-56.

TE

-
,

()
wait for, await

().

arrange, put in or-

der, post, station, assign

, -^

rear, nourish

Contrast

turn.

(-).

a task

to (one).

Tivos

()
on what account,

why?

'pray?
jitst

ieivos

now, a minute ago.


Adv.
dreadful.

--

?.

throughout the enin a icord.

{') time of

{it

121.

life,

age.

he of age.

lacks

little,

116 b),

almost.
yet.

7,

tire day.
vi

not yet

what, pray? what in the

world? why?

here, in this case.

Tc

hvcuA nr^
-TAn^i^pAjflLW OuC^Aw'^^^
4-P ^^AinwvjCUU)

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

59

, -,'
,
,
, ,
, ; ^
,
,

V;

MEN

'

TLVo'i

AE

^? -\6-

^^

),

eivai

,'

ere

ivl

"'

OY.

SovXevopTa

aet

ovhev

, ^,

%. )
-

.,

ye

iwei

ere,

^7^
^^7^

'

/,,

ere,

65

iv

,.

e^eerrt erot

,
,
,
4

60.

()

61.

yap

- ^-^ .

iwei

'
J^

"

158.^^^-.

'^

ye roaovde since such a matter as

\.

6.3.

iya,

65.

fj

^, $

vayvrjva

ij

/\.

doing almost none of the things

modifies

desire,

\,

62.

iv

6\iyov

you

70

,
.

Avert,

/Vvfi/'^

(\

THIS,

referring to

ypa.r|va^ something either to be read or to he

written.
66.

ak

72.

iv ots 5e

&

iv ttj

you first of those,

e\yoev whereas

just speaking (iv toutols

etc.

in those matters of

iiyoev,

102).

which we were

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

60

XXXIII.
To

/7/[)

}?

TOi

a7reipia<i

'

Mevav8po<;,

169.

The Formation of the


Reflexive Pronouns, 23.
of
Declension
Future, 61.
tis, 27.
Review Exercises 21, 25, 26. Dictation exercise based

The

on

48-56.

11.

, ^see,

director),

()
master

perceive,

have

?iotise-steward,

of

{-).

()

agement,

trial,

()

inexperience (-,

experiment)

-ojOs

very well

opos

()

manage
manage,

as

direct.

household manadministration.

sufficient.

limit,

boundary, standard.

Cf. horizon.

neighbor.
well then!

bo-irp

which very {one),

experience {iv).

- , ,-.,,,
.

MEN

Ele v,
crov

thrift,

(Gen.,

() might).

economy.

()
()

()

75

()

Cf.

hold sway {over), be

Cf.

rule, prevail

{-)

stand over

charge

of,

115 g)

Cf. aesthetic.

hear, etc.

--',
(as

TE

'

-\\)

. ,

'

'

'\

,,
,
-^
.,
THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK
;

uLcM

irorepov otet

t7)v

cre

Tt8e,

otet

'E/xot

aot

".

85

75.

to-believe

on

on the very day on which he-comes-

this day.

MEN

,"
-,
,

'

^,

V'

'

, - ,^, '---

Tpei//et

'^ ^

^^(,'. ^^
86.

'^

'"'

to be

,^.

so.

in these {matters)

sagacious)

Cf.

in

'
,
^,. -

\$ ^.

go

95

w\

et$

which we become expert

(6$

wise,

90.
(^iv

92.
.

, ,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

62

Stand in one's way, hinder, impede, impedio

F.

TToOs

eis

(-)).

&

,,

eh

(come-to-possess).

93.
94.

95.

that ichich seems best.

()

^, -

so fa) as.

agree with

{').

XXXIV.

'

. ^.

Te'rapTOv

-^ '^ ^;
row

The Verb. Verb-roots, etc., 52 Personal-endings


Aug(thematic and non-thematic formations), 53-56
ment, 57 Meanings of the Imperfect, 135.
;

The Progressive Action-stem.


son VI), the

first

As we have

of the action-stems,

seen (Les-

upon which the

Greek verb is built, is the


progressive action-stem, and upon this stem are formed a
subjunctive, optative, imperative, infinitive, and particiconjugational system of

ple.

In the indicative

two tenses:

tiie

mood

this stem,

(a) the present tense^ and

fect tense ; or () the present indicative,

See 133.
The pupil should now master

moreover, forms

()

the past imper-

and

()

the past

imperfect indicative.^

all of

the forms built

upon the progressive action-stem, both active and middle,


using
as the type-verb, 79, A, B.
Conjugate in the same way
manding,

/
1

I am

a7n eating

I am am

(Past-Impf,

urging^ com-

), -/)

preventing^

writing^

I am

Usually called for the sake of brevity simply imperfect tease or

imperfect indicative.

),
|

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


di/ing (Past-Impf.

(Past-Irapf. et%oy),

I am

lam

-^,

I am

holding,

have

/m's/t, amivilling,

taking counsel,

Impf.

lam

63

becoming,

prevented, yiyvo-

heiyig

I am

answering (Past-

^).

(Past-Impf.

Herewith Exercise

27.

TE

,
,

-,

Past-Impf.

(-

truly

()

turn (over)

i-ir-^rpeirov

intrust to, permit,

rub.

Past-Impf.

Cf. diatribe.

()

().
Cf.

to,

allow (Dat.).

-). ---,

day.

Past-Impf.

,,

comb).
Past-Impf. erpenov

(o),

\/,

-,

()
eat.

comb,

Past-Impf.

curry {ktcLs
turn

^^

() barley. Usually
() manger.

ephemeral.

plural.

() a groom.

) -.
EN

ovre

if

'

"

eivaL,

iw-erpenev-

"^-^, 228 .

''^
,"
,
."

lying.

the days. Ace. of

Extent of time,

to eat.

113

f.

.
TTjs avTTJs.

every day (all

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

64

/,
^

\iyeiv
ok

'^^

aoeiv,

>}.

,
,

'.\\)<

vevpa

TYjv

rjoov

-^&}

'

\oirrov

T7}S

4.

XXXV.

Review Lesson
nouns to
:

35.
Like TO
l^cvYos yoke

"Ytvos

'.

'.

XXVI, and

;'77^5.

29

decline

the three types of neuter

word

32

{cf.

",

epic)

tvall (of a city).

-,

vevpa

I changed

past imperfect of

176.

-.

the strings (veOpa) yesterday.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

-,

TE
rub

()

()

boat)

through, rub away, spend (time),

waste (time).

-,
o|ios

-.

-lov

worth

lohile,

'

()

(-

straight toward, to (Gen.).

without (Gen.).
opposite

against (Gen.)

(to),

(, ).

- -)).

()

tern

over

youth.

an enclosure

(-

noQtv; lohence?
trvXLs

\ in which place, lohere.

Lyceum.

() young man,
(rj)

07it?ide,

the

surely, truly, however.

Scvpo hither.

spring, fountain.

(6)

veavio-Kos

here, in this place.

proceed, go,

be on one''s loay.

()

worthy.

(a

come alongside, come

in.

throw

Academy.

the

heave

alongside,

to,

-,

()

Cf.

pastime.

()

65

-$

a small gate, pos-

()

gate).

Cf.

Thermopylae,
near the postern.

.
,
^)
('

in the place oppo-

Iv
site, opposite.

^
-

, ?, -,

A'

Meve^ivos,

^ev

ret^o?

-,
.<;,
'., ,
re

;^

^, ^1

'

-?

ineLOrj

- . ^-.
.
.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

66

evOv

Aevpo

Xeyet?,

/cat

,.

' ?,

Sij,

'

tjv

Aevpo,

eyw,

'

15

1.

oe,

6,

former

of Athens, the

These were gymnasia in the suburbs

north of the city, the latter to the east.

to the

Plato established his school in the Academy, Aristotle his in the Lyceum.

-^
2.

3.
is

;? (-)

--,
when I arrived

the spring of

nacoTTos

not known.
4.

along the road OUtside,

became).

(lit.,

Panops

{).

I came upon

Its

etc.

exact location

both Hippo' thales, the son

Note the

of Hiero'nymus, and Ctesippus of the deme of Paea'nia.


position of re
6.

10.
eiOii

12.

().

"

(9).
deltas

13.

'

so in line 13.

Whom

--

seeing (as he saw)

do you

tovs

mean

To

'

approaching.
i//xas

represents

us 'F"

,
";- .
a door Standing open.

/cat

^,

fJOL

re

92),

']
',

93.

Herewith Exercise

28.

epyco

'

07^9, 979-980.

I
.'-,

of
91 (and
and learn the conjugation of

Review the conjugation

by

me

/xas;

pointing out, with a gesture toward.

XXXVI.

195.

am going,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

67

TE
()
am

I
oi

&

going ; used as a future

(.

(-.

follow (Dat.)

Cf. sequor).

( -(
()

at the

same time, together


() admirer

praise).

with.

()

palaestra, wrefitling-

school

wrestle).

must part.
() a master (of one's

for the

gladly

{s).

--

- - sufficient, able, worthy.

craft), professor, sophist.

,, . /, , ^].4
^
-^. , ^;
recently {vios).

recently built.

later than

-ov

(Gen.),

after.

'

oe

uicrrt

OTj

tl

;
/.
.
, ' ^.
,
.
oe

ev

'

So?

oe

.<,

',

ye

^^?

eVecr^at,

iVa

/cat

4,

noielv.

e-ov e

16.

^.

18.

Emphatic, lohat
.

19.

/caXcDs

20.

(TO J

23.
24.

&

IS?

-'

'

ye,

,
eyoj,

' 6, 2

'

25

198.

which we would share loith you ( 115 a).


{acting beautifully) you are very kind.
ye a comrade of YOURS.
iCdrjs in order that you may SEE.
emphasizes i'Stjj. 189.
K.
taking C. I went in.

-\>

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

68

,,

,
.
-^^

'
re

)()^

,
, )-^
)

35

Si

27.

--

Oil entering we found.


Observe the free use of the participial construction

,$

iraWas

iepe7a

(Perf. Part., having sacrificed)

xvith the offerings scarcely


.

- -

We found

the boys, the sacrifices finished

5).
-)%

--

^\$

(Perf. Pass. Part.) the {duties) connected

completed {having been done)

{having been adorned) dressed in festal

late

-.(

(-\

27-29.

and

attire.

Trans-

the duties at the altar

scarcely yet completed, playing, etc.

31.

33.
36.

Note the position.

play at

"Put

'

odd and

Cf.

ev

avXrj.

{-

even'').

selecting,

{they) Stood around.

loilhdrawing.

charm side by side with


you look at his canvas on the
laugh and speak and munch

alongside of that, and for life-like

Murillo's Beggar-boys (you catch them,

if

sudden, actually moving their mouths to

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


their crusts,

69
There

at once) the scene in the Lysis of the dice-players.

all

the boys are in full dress to take part in a religious ceremony.

It

scarcely over; but they are already busy with the knuckle-bones,

some

just outside the door, others in a corner."


p. 114.

XXXVII.

is

Pater, Plato and Platonism,

\^

To

Interrogative Sentences (Direct and Indirect), 178.


The Verb Learn the conjugation of the past-imperfect

, , , , , ,,
),
:

and middle-passive) of the contract verbs in -,


81 A-B, and conjugate in like manner

(active

the past-imperfect of

he at a loss, hesitate (past-impf.

shrink (from doing) (past-impf.


Herewith Exercise 29.

hesitate,

).

TE

( -, -^))

()
(^Stand apart

{-

( 61 (end)).

look

().

gard

at,

8 )

well-born,
.

he was clearly.

then, thereupon.

6. frequently, repeatedly.
.

19 b).

-- )

with

{epis

()

-tSos

strife).

turn (twist) about.


Mid. turn oneself around.

-ov

{yev-,

(Past-Impf.

strive, vie

observe, re-

()

7vvatos

'
,
,

,,
for

dispute.

Intensive.

noble

between, in the midst,

in the midst of play.

meanwhile, for a time.


in the same way.
so as to, so that.

^
,
--.
THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

70

, .

'

--.

^/>

ovu 6

,,

rjnopei re

fxeu

-4

coKveL

-.
-\,
,
,
,. . .. .,,
,
eireira 6

etcr-

ep^erai,

)
45

eihev

e/xe re

/cat

emero

Meve^evov

'

'

eyeXacral'

.
, ),^-.
'

55

43.

ws

44.

jei

46.
50.

52.

53.
54.

--'-

-,

40-41.

to

come toward,

to

approach.

lohen he saw.

-$

ticiple of

^-,

Purpose,

he

came

to sit (loion beside.

175.

looking

at, ivith

more beautiful.
I shall not

they said.

in this respect.

a glance toward.

iyaXaffav they laughed.


ask.

Future Par-

.
< "^,.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


XXXVIII.
To

<{

71

OKTO)

tl

72

ev

The Participle with the Verb


The Four Uses of the Optative

176

c.

a) Wish, 162.

b) Potential

163.

Conditional Clauses, 168.


d) Indirect Discourse, etc., 179,
c)

^?,

Intensive Study of

11.

TE

-,

()

--

put one\s hand


(xeip) to (a work), attempt.
/ asked.
to ask.
(Past-Impf.
I have

II,

46-55 (Lesson

am

gone; a sort

of

(Gen.), hit

upon, chance upon, obtain, gain;


chance, happen (constantly used

with part.)

Perf.

saying; participle to

(and Plupf.) to

I have come,

XXXVIl).

hit

)
. /. -5
88
- , .
'--^
gonr,

B.

declare, say (Acc.-Infin.).

am

come.

()

()

ing hack

()

recollection,

()

to

call-

memory.

tling,

() a

etc.,

().

the act of learning.

,- -

'

<

teacher of wres-

gymnasium-master

8l-

-.
Meve^evov,

eSo/cet

Tvy^aveLv.

~6

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

72

u' ^,
,

Yjv

(The continuation

XXIX-XXX
56.

58.

stand),

it

ye,

of this passage is

- --

I teas on

eSo/cet

\
.
.

found in Lessons

the point of asking

dirorepos

approaching he summoned (lit., caused to


saying that the gymnasium-master

he appeared to he officiating at the

" -

he was (as
charge of the sacrifice),
chanced) acting as iepoiroios (a magistrate v:ho officiated at sacrifices).

sacrifice {to be in
it

'

vms calling (him).


59.

'

be read carefully in review.)

should

iir-exeipovv

179, II

Avcnv

ovv

XXXIX.
To

SeovTes

'

Comparison of Adjectives: (a) Regular; (b) Irregular


46-48.

Read

carefully,

tions of the

XXXII,

inclusive.

Herewith Exercise

XL.
To

.
-

().

Intensive Study of

Review Lesson

XXX

porto

30.

The Third Declension

A-B

()

as in the preceding lesson, the

found in Lessons

*?,

'

review 27, 30-35, 48, 50


11.

XXXIII and

89-45, 56-68.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

73

XLI.
To

MoVo9

',8.

ipa.

^.

161,

The Verb Contract verbs in - constitute a very large


and important class. Similar to these are contract verbs in
-, which however are far less numerous than those in -.
(active
Learn the conjugation of the verbs in
:

voice)

()

Conjugate

)' ()()

ask (a question^, 82 A.

same way

in the

for, love passionately {rf.

(}

honor

worth, value, honor}

yearn

(e/aa) desire,

{cf.

laugh;

((5/)) see.

Genitive with Verbs of


Herewith Exercise 31.

and

ask

{a question).

,
I

g^o,

19 b).

am paying

(for eVe-

tlvi say

kriow well!

ev

Cf.

moment

() =

'^

()

I declare, say,
I shall say, tell.

ws

to

the

best of one^s ability.

airep the very things which.

{-,

-).

() death
secretly,

cf.

194.

thana-

unnoticed by (Gen.).

TAtvt^ivov without the notice

have gone.

know!

\/.

thereupon, at this

topsis.

have come.

whisper.

attention.

().

\9

,
Cf.

Past-Impf.

(Wov Isaid.

iv

d.

TE

,
,

115

Desiring, etc.,

of Menexenus,

boyishly, j)layfully.

again, back again.


clearly.

Cf.

5.

then, therefore.

()

season, time, hour,

going away,

it

is

time to be
air-ievai.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

74

, ., --).
. , ,
'

iv

Meve^evo^

.
,
- .^
6

65

Meve^evov,

fxe

9,

ipei^,

Avert

,
,
,
).
,
%,
,
,, . -^., \

70

'

).

],

75

65.

^---

from

(in the place)

X^ets,

dvep
71.
72.

'

eiVijs

to recall.

Cf.

had arisen

lohich he

The
(68) ''also to me
mnemonic

go) out (whence also he stood up (to go) out).

is
.

().

in order that you

may

idiomatic

{to
;

cf.

also to Men.''^

tell, etc.

, , .,
,
'

'

-^.
^/,

'\,

, ,, '
'

,,

,
,
.
;
, , , ' ^TEE FIRST YEAH OF GREEK
;

TOL

77.

Kara-y^XaffTos

81.

stock?
83.
84.
85.

or|s you

may

reprove

see

85

'

wi-Kovp^aeis

shall, etc.).

paSiov

. -,

croL,

'

\)<;.

75

that

you aid me

in order that I

{see

how you

may become a

laughing-

(').

the fellow, the chap.

doiiH you

any one).

XLII.
To AevTcpov

mind any one (have no care for

' 9 ? 78,
8 .^
ovhev rjhlov

ipdre

7]^ ?, )?

ear

ipdv.

The Grenitive Absolute, 175 g.


The Verb Learn the conjugation
in

Like
82 B.
being asked (a question)

getting possession

2.

of the contract verbs

(middle voice),

/ am

358,

conjugate

I am

acquiring.

of,

Intensive Study of

^?,

11.

64-75 (Lesson XLI).

TE

,
fjf.

()
he feasting, banqueting.

()

hearth.

Cf. Vesta.

2^ossess.

()

possession.

Cf.
KTfjo-iS

--.
()

the (act of) possessing, pos-

session.

you share, give a share

of.

Cf.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

76

()
()

% ',

()

-ovos cock.

()

(such) as, tohat

()

-v7os quail.

Cf.

mildly.

gently,

-(?

toioOtos

. .

(rd)

olos.

coined gold, money

,,
,
,,
, ,
.
, .
toward

these.

,
)
- ^'

'

95

().

such (as)

toiovtos

calmly,

()

gold).

Cf.

'

go

).

honor

Cf. timocracy.

ortyx,

ortygan.

irpos

(-,

child
value,

, -^.

'
,
' ,
,

,, -, .
,
,
,

,,

6,

-/^,

,-

^.
90.
92.

\6yv you

share your conversation.


but he says he thinks

. knows.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


95.

whatever I ask you.

6 S.V

The Athenians were fond

102.

vi]

rbv

A favorite oath

to get

104.

possession

To

,,

olos

175 e

172, II, c

was an

fighting-cock

espe-

of Socrates.

of.

are

'

() with the

Participle,

195.

Intensive Study of

<,

Herewith Exercise

32.

XLIII.

of pets,

Quails also were domesticated and used in various sports.

cial favorite.

103.

11

11.

93-106 (Lesson XLIl).

TE

8(
$ -

()
consider (one) fortunate

experienced in (Gen.)

(a) far from {G&n.)


Tiixovs.
:

night.

easily

Cf. empiric.

(if, ireipa).

(Gen.)

(-).

()
quickly

($).
(
/s).

Cf. tachyg-

raphy.

(b) far along in

so

as

so that

to,

(Infin. or

,
.
, , ^,,^
la.te

at

Indie).

'

.<

,8,,
re

veoi

'

'.

.
,

no

THE FIBST YEAR OF GREEK

78

'

you acquired.

110.
111.

113.

in lohat

way

().

^.
(

XLIV.

,
5, , ^,

(;

To

Declension of the Active Participles


50

of the

115

^,
'

33,

I'

Sia

-.
;

,
;

'

) .

Tt

^,

'

iav

20

?.

107-113 (Lesson XLIII).

11.

,
,
fJLOL

ju,8'

, ,

, ^.

Herewith Exercise

113 e).

Middle (Passive) Participles

iroiovp-evos,

Intensive Study of

-,

SoKOV(Ti

yap

125

^'/<

,
,
. ,
;

(JvKovv

.
,

%^ , ,

,,
,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

lav re

/cat

79
130

ev

, -,
. , ..
, , %,
,.
-

"EotKei^.

eSo^ev.

oe,

'

120.

sometimes I suppose

133.
134.
137.

.)

the very {experience)

),

an

re

()

which lovers

Cf. deliciae.

s
(?).

intensified

otherioise, differently

(it)

seemed.

I am

do),

lam

well

off,

have a way

totally at a loss,

am

(to do),

all in

am

able (to

a muddle.

(Cf.

'
,

XLV.
To

in

etc.

their darlinys, favorites.

123.

124.

...

(eviore

135

possible for one-whn-loves, etc.

is it

ivLore

122.

rj

^^

y^P?

eivai

Sokcl

Review the past-imperfect (active and middle) of verbs


-, -, and
Uses of the past-imperfect, 135.
11. 127-137 (Lesson XLIV).
Intensive Study of

-.

'
- ---

?,

TE
()

feel irritation, be

vexed, annoyed.

-((,

drive away.

-
accent,

find out, dis-

up.

set in

motion, move,

Cf. kinetic.

stir

summon.

speak with a foreign

speak

somewhat

()

brokenly.

cover.

--

call to (one),

pay heed

115 h) regard

(Gen.

(. $).
to

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

80

()
iripi-t^rr&Tts the bystanders,

then.

iv

-- ()

, ^. '
,
, .
^,
,
^
-.
^ ^ \ , ' -,
-.
8>
,
^
,, ,
,
have in mind, intend.

,
'

140

6i/>e

"

{-).

-^

iv

145

a being together, in-

tercourse, conversation

late in the day, late.

"

'

'

150

138.

139.

145.
147.

150.

&-

like {evil) spirits.

ice dissolved,

yeybva^ev

'

Slaves were usually foreign-born.


yielding to them {becoming less than they).

brought

to

an end.

as they tcere going away.


ice

I set,

152.
153.

-.

after saying these things.

-\
148.

have become.

place, count.

i^-evpdv ice were able to discover.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


The Lysis

81

one of the dialogues of Plato in which no definite concluBetween the selection in Lesson XLIV and the closing
paragraphs above about ten pages of the dialogue have been omitted. As
sion

is

is

reached.

question succeeds question and dilemma, dilemma, the unfortunate lad


becomes more and more confused, until at length he exclaims in despair

\iyw.

XLVI.

e^

To

}.

ev

Review the

'
irepavai}

@,

ev

last four lessons,

Intensive Study of

rA

^/^

"BOLO

^.

.
1

11.

^ A

having

138-147 (Lesson

XLV).

34,

A T-^

J^O X$
/^

/
/

Herewith Exercise

and the third declension

(including 48, 50 A, B), adding 36-37:

\').

187

K.

l>

I.

/^

foi

/'.

0$ ;^^

OCD

39

; -^

he erected,

died,

vepavai to bring to

an

end., to

-.

accomplish (irepalvw)

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

82

"

XLVII.
To

V-Z

The Verb: Action-stems, etc., 131-133.


Verbs form their aorist action-stem in one of several
ways, the most common formation consisting in the verbaorist-stem
stem plus the suffix
( 64), thus
aorist indicative
/ loosed. Other examples

-,

are:

.
.
.
.
.

Aor.

St.

+ --

St.

+ --

St.

St.

St.
St.

+
+

+<ra-

.
.

Indie.

Indie.

Aor. Indie.
Aor. Indie.
Aor. Indie.

Aor. Indie.

'

I ''.
I did.
I made.
/ asked.
I called.
I langhed,

<
'

b2trst into

Learn the conjugation of the


79 A, and decline in the same
given above.

Uses of the Subjuncti'e

laughter.

aorist active of

way each

of the verbs

a) Exhortation.

b) Question.
c) Aoristic Prohibition, 157.
d) Modest Assertion.

e)

Conditional Clauses,

i)

Final Clauses.
and

aorist suffix.

7 do

not lengthen the

final e or

to

57

before the

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

,,.

,
-

-,

TE
()

, ,.

fail of hitting, miss,

, -, (-)
, -,

-,
().

-,

,,
(65

be

hear

false witness.

fail.

herit.

-.,

-, --

Cf. acolyte.

(Dat.).

.
-,
,
, .
,
, -,.
Troie'o),

follow.

83

in-

murder

() murder).

guard

(-).

an

adidterer

lasting for

an age

(. ^^\:

-?

,,

()

life.

much

ooros -) -ov as

Cf. aeon).

'09

Cf. zoology.

() command.
() -ttjtos youth.

as,

very sad

-ov

().

() beggar.
- -6 difficult,

-^
'^ .

it is difficult.

TO

-'^

TTJs

.^

''^.

,
)
,
,
,
'
?
';,
)
&, ^, .
.
;

cLyadov

einev

'

^.

eiTTev,

^,

^),

17

'

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

84

, "- -

,
-,
iv

eiirev

XeiVet

e^et?

^9

hevpo
6

oiSas

S.V.

having heard.

9.

10.

remains,

-$

18.

-/

On

the style and language of the

he became

',

/'-'.

lacking.

is

evayyeXiov

by doing what

2.
5.

iv

distribute.

iyevero.

New

Testament, see A'Ocabulary,

Outline the conjugation of ten or a dozen verbs, includ-

,^

^
^
^

"ing contract verbs in


ing scheme ( 79
I

'

Progr. Action-stem

Future stem
Aorist Action-stem

XL VIII.

A)

and

-, according to the
Opt.

Imper.

This

is

"""

^^o'i^'

--

---

-< -- -?

--

---

Infin.
Xi-ttv

,
-.^

--

^
"8

-<

Thermopylae
loe lie

stranger.

--

rrjSe

^<}.

the famous epitaph written in honor of the Spartans

monians that here (TySe)


<S

Part.

Subj.

^-<

';
in tlie battle of

Indic.

\ ayyeiXov
1

follow-

who

fell

( ).

passer-by, announce to the Lacedae-

obedient to their

commands

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

85

The First Aorist, 64 (a); Aorists in -a, 64 b, 85 A.


Learn the declension of the aorist active participle in -aas,
50 C, and decline in the same
and without the
way
:

,,, ,
|9,

( 64 b)

ayyiiXas.

The Meanings

136 (especially the

the Aorist,

of

inceptive aorist).

Herewith Exercise

, ^,
(77-,

,
,,
, -,

bite

35.

TE

,,
, ,
(
-, ,

()
ijyyeiXa

announce

ayyeXoi messenger).

cf.

(-).
aud

pursue.

make

remain, wait for.


fawn upon.

wag

the tail,

,,

out, indicate

to lean,

slant, incline, decline.

(/)$)

separate, dis-

tingnish, judge.

have potcer

point

().
show.

over, conquer.

()

-6

hateful, hated, hos-

trori

tile.

(), Ace.

()

hare.

irori St at

one time

at another time,
tail.

,, ^^.4', \ayot)v

" Et

ei,

eTirev

ei

"

vei<s

2.
lick.

(
135.

he was biting, he xoould

vayys,

bite,

229

he loould caress,

kiss,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

86

"Opvlv avrjp

^ , -?.

el^j^el

-\,? .evSov

vds evpov

ok

evprjaeiv

eKeivov.

1.

3.

Ace. of

avTTJs,

343

.
he found

elpov

it

similar

(lit.,

being like).

, -.
,, -,..
.
expecting

4.

he

5.

(4\).

\
^
,
, - \^ -

is

eXeye- "

deprived.

ok

he

^^.

"

'

,"

7,

hi

,
^,
6

TTJs

$,

353

,
- ".

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


XLIX.
To

,'

Sebi^re?

'

87

,.
avev

2.

365

Review Lessons XLVII-XLVIII.

The Uses

yap,

1.

2.

.,
.,- .
.
.
,
- ,.^^.
' ,
..
,,
.
^. %,
of the Genitive Case, 111, 114-119.

AXTjOeia

Xeyovauv,

474 W.
T^yetrat,

Syj

5-

6.

/09,

7-

176

362, 23

^.

. 121.

-^.

)(.

52

a,

C.

485 D.

8.

730

195

^.
8.

-.
,,
\, '

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

88
10.

,
,
,
.^ ,

'E/c

11.

Ot

12.

79

OVTL

.
,
-

-]

-,

.
,.
()

1.

3.
6.

11.

, '' ,
e{jK\eia

(),
.

ei;,

',

come

the heights.

KaXeiv.

to,

521

^. 30.

attain

to.

Cf. acro-polis.

Cf.

\byoi.
6

The sentence

is

,
-

incomplete

those loho are truly rich, (who are)


has the construction of

rich not in gold., etc.

L.

To
M7;8et?

' -.
,

4, 12.
:

Genitive of Time,

119

Genitive after

in

Com-

position, 116 h.

The Verb

the Perfect Active

Learn the perfect active


Herewith Exercise 36.

of

(first,

second), 65.

79 A, and see 137.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

89

TE

^, ^, -, --.
-,

()

ijyyeiXa,

-((>,

ac-ot'fw,

-,

open {02)en up).

rive at.

Pf

ar-

arrive,

Sec.

to

(^!

town

walking stick,
(to) little walking stick.

ivtKo.

into,

on account

(Gen.),

-6

-,

down upon

(Gen.).

strike,

Tas

at the door.

2<rirpo (17)

evening.

Cf.

Vesper.

tiBis straightway, straight.

day before yesterday.

Cf. bacteria.

knock

()

down

Kpoveiv to clap the hands.

dis-

- ()

()

despise, look

I am awake.

be in

democracy).

to sleep.

,-, -, -

-8,

Cf.

Cf. epidemic.

be asleep, lie

57.

iyepQ, ijyeipa awaken.

iyp-fjyopa

-,

deme.

trict,

within
of,

(et's)

for the sake of

ivcKa;

on what

ac-

count f

at this time, so early,

why have

you come so early


wios (0) son.

The following

selection, llpuTay6pa%

Protagoras

is

in

taken from the Protagoras of Plato, and extends through Lesson


LXVII. Socrates relates to a friend how Hippoc'rates, the son of
Apollodo'rus, came to see him "last night," or rather "early this morn-

Town,

is

.
, ,

ing," seeking an introduction to the famous sophist Protagoras.


is written in Plato's noblest style, and is of its kind one
most beautiful passages in Greek literature. It is therefore recommended that the class each day memorize so far as possible the portion
contained in the lesson of the day before. The rate of progress may
thereby be somewhat retarded, but the gain in power will more than
compensate for any loss of time.

This passage

of the

' 8'
,
< ,
),
A'

en

,
,
,
, ,,,
)

09,

-^,

,-

'^.?

,,

4.

'

'

aya^ct ye.

1.

,
,
,
;

y',

crow, dawn.

eKpove,

-44 ,

ineihrj

OF GREEK

THE FIRST TEA

90

(tohile

()

it

?,

icas) still very early.

Opdpot

he

eireifo^evos

Came

Straight

in with

recognizing.

7.

7iOi;s

veurepov

9.
11.
12.

anything startling.

& X^yois that were well

$
eC

Cf.

Cf.
el

news.
Xiyeis.

163.

taking his stand.


;

()

cock-

early daton, before daybreak.

(^rushing).

8.

et

'

..
.
.
...
..

have you just heard f

\\

a rush

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

LI.

The Verb

va

etg.

To

Review the active forms

91

of

and learn

the middle aorist and perfect, 79 B, and 67, 137.

-- TE

(a)

-(,-8
,

desist,

'V^

go

to rest, sleep.

--.
away.

run

,,,

SciTTVCO)

feel for,

to,

intend

(Infin.).

recognize.

- - - (^

point out

read.

iJ

he ran away, es-

caped.

--

grope for (Gen.).


be about

to, tell, relate

{-)

dine

dimmer, supper).

.
,
-()

().

() manliness
a strengthened -.

avSpcCa

as soon as.

KOTTOs (0) loeariness

^y

-?
-?

().

()

excitement.

-iroSos

a pallet, bed.

at that time, then.

iirvos

, -\\''<
', -^
, ^

Koi

()

()

sleep.

Cf. hypnotic.

^,

eXnev,

oxjje

yap

rot

-.
-

-, ^-^,

,
6

crot

'

^2

92

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

.
^
,
^,
, ,,
,
, , .

, ^-, \ ^

ere levai.

Sedpo

yJKevy

25

Tt

'

17

ye

15.

-6

Oivbris

having arrived from Oe'noe, a village and


the border of Attica.

deme northwest from Athens near

my

16.

though intending

slave (boy) Satyrus.

to tell

\\

you that I loas going

to

pursue,

I
a future optative representing after the past tense
This is the only use of the future
forgot the future indicative
is

optative.
17.

179, II B.

-\6

Tivos

7\ I came,
we were having
6$,
18.

i.e.

returned.

\ '.
-dined).

19.

21.

because of something else I forgot


we had dined

(^.

too late

(i.e.

^^

too far along

()

23.

it

released.

98.

ava-ffTas arising (standing up).

LII.

To

/cat

. ^

The Verb Review the middle forms of


declare, say,
and learn the conjugation of
:

Indirect Discourse, 179.


Herewith Exercise 37.

94.

(i.e.

in the

night (hours)).
22.

(it).

79

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

,
.
-,
-, , ,
-,
,,
,

93

TE

()

),

he of

iJKOVffa,

-,

veKa praise.

Aor.

see.

over-

---

yoke,

lodge

(at

unfasten, un-

one's

-.

irap'

he

is

(,

F.

house).

Pf.

per-

(-).

suade

take, find.

, ().

good cheer!

Pf.

(^),

Aor.

elwou,

say, declare.

my

guest.

()

but indeed, really.


.

()

would that

then.

vaL

Et ydp,

rj

coined silver, money.

here, there.
ti

partly, etc.

' 6,

-^- .

not yet.
now, nunc.

.
, .

partly

oil

jiever.

TO irpOTepov formerly.

'

(too) early.

above, on behalf of (Gen.).


19 a.

super.

'

,
-\ ^,
Zev

/cat

ere

'

.-8,' ,%, ^.,

'

ert

- ,
',

'
--

35

*
.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

94
40

"^

' ..
-,
,
^,-, ,.
'

'

oevpo

avkrjv,

"^

,-

Lwaev.

yap

',

-J

'

evSov

45

28.

30.

30

ei

if

yap
ws OUT

f.

31.
32.

you may
35.

37.

39.

Z^ ^

irapa

44.

45.

-\^3

'

in order that

converse).

(?ioi) at all.

(we

172, II c.

may find)
at the house of Callias, the son of Hip-

was a wealthy Athenian, who devoted


and spent his money lavishly in the entertain-

Callias, of noble family,


life

of pleasure

-^ = ^.

,$ ()

and go out

43.

might depend upon this I


as would leave untouched

skilled in speaking.

of sophists.

41.

V, J ^

himself to a

arise

it

this very purpose.

adverbial

poni'cus.

ment

TavTafor
speak

o^s

38.

r\^

my own.

. (-\
,

'

-.

yau offer.
would that

e'i-q

neither amjthing of

^;^

-N

iws hv

LIII.

To

/36/

<;

let

for the most part.

is likely.

.,

US Stand up .forth

,
(
as

eZicos

let

(become).

adverbial

TO

--

^,

Sore.

evwyyeXiov
6

vy

-';. 0709 ^;.

\<;,

', '.

etSe?,

US

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK


Uses of the Aorist
,'

The Second Aorist

95

Grnomio Aorist, 136.


The vast majority of verbs in

Greek form the aorist stem by adding the


and this formation is accordingly known

suffix

or -a,

as the First or

Sigmatic Aorist.

Another group

of verbs, fewer in

number, but of great

frequency, do not add a suffix to form the aorist, but em-

ploy the verb-root (regularly in


these

known

verbs accordingly are

They

Aorists.

its shortest

form,

The

more than one form).

root appear in

if

the

aorists of

Second or Root

as

are either (a) thematic or (b) non-thematic

in formation ( 53).

In this lesson
See

aorists.
iN^

we

shall consider only the thematic second

63 and for the conjugation,

84.

Herewith Exercise 38.


Master the following verbs and forms

-, -,
F.

-A.

air-cGavov, Pf.

- -.
,\- , . ,
.

^ ,)^(-.

die

A.

(-^.

cLTT-iQavov

F.

throw, pelt (/3e\-

Pf.

-').

said (serves as an aorist to


(for e-peirov)

(/-).

or

cIttciv

, , .
()

.
,

came, went (serves as aorist to

or

irregularly retained throughout the moods.

57.

F.

find.

^ efTTw.

or

Of. eureka.

The augment is

-').

Pf.

\( cvpeiv

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

96

saw (serves as aorist to

, , ^ .^.
, ,
.
, , ,
-, -, ,
^
oiSa (^I have seen)

qf.

. ^,

F,

(- \-).

F.

-)

knoiv^.

and

lSov

',

(fetS- poiZ- fiB-

Pf.

Pf.

take, receive

leave (Xeirr-

F.

learn

Pf.

(-).

F.

Pf.

"-

become

-,
-, - (yev- <yov- yv-).

*')
?.
- -,
(for

or

F.

forget

Pf.

--

(\- -).
ciri

'-5

LIV.

-.

Review Lesson LIII,


82, and the first

-,

middle forms

Conditional Clauses

Herewith Exercise

yivi-

vB'

also the conjugation of verbs in


aorists in -a, 85, especially the

See

Contrary

to

64.

Fact Conditions,

152.

39.

" Observe that the last five verbs accent the aorist imperative
(second
means behold! But in comperson singular) on the last syllable,

'

pounds the accent

is

regular

iir-eXde

go away

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

97

TE

,
.
-.

, ,--

()

,,
.,-,,--,
-

,
tiri

and

ask

(,
irepi

-,

think on, have in mind,

go around

examine

4--, -, ,
, ,(-,
(8

-\>,

-,

-Kptvo-

answer,

(-

intrnd.

select,

-).

judge

Pf.

question).

,(-,

--,
,,-

and

F.

(/,

-, .

(),

F.

to

re-

bring to an end (t^Xos),

(a thing), attempt.

consummate, pay,

incline,

consider

critically,

-).

examine thoroughly.

put one's hand

93).

etc.

-).

.
-, ,

decline

()

(),

(),

sculptor

()

clearly.

()

()

statue).

physician.

cio-irep

hire,

wages, fee.

of like name, namesake.

strength.

just as

if.
I

"^

A'

-).
pat

,-

,, ,
^,
,

'^ ,

^
hr^
)>

apyvpiov

,
'], ,
*

apyvpiov

,
;

55

'
,

TH^^J'IRST YEAR OF

av

Wlwop av,

otl

^"^

Et

re

65

50.

<

el

"

future participle expressing

pay.

rjpeTO,

iv

otl

[7.

in-evoets

TeKelv

to

GREEK

-;
^^
,, ^.

98

-,

|)?ii7:ose ;

translate: intending

rt's
(as about to Come tO
become what), translate To one of lohat profession do you
think that you are going and what do you expect to become yourself that
you are now seeking to go to Protagoras, etc. ?

ws

51.

whom, and

52

hv

ff.

just as if

you

to

e7r-evoeis

et

et

...

ris at

you were intending (had in mind)


v:hat would you have replied ? 152.
.

5,

if

&v

some one had asked

6
Hippoc' rates of Cos, of the
family of the Asclepi'adae. Hippocrates of Cos was a famous physician
and founder of the science of medicine. The family of the Asclepiadae

53.

'

(descendants of Ascle'piu.s) formed a sort of guild of physicians.


ws

56.

what profession
59.

To Hippocrates as a representative of

Polycli'tus, of Argos,

famous sculptors during the

and

LV.
To

Herewith Exercise

Phid'ias, of Athens,

latter half of the fifth century.

40.

,'

were the most

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


TE
()
it

is

like,

it

seems

likely (a

second perfect).

().

(
>

name,

eyvpoo-Ocv former.
-7)

-ov ready.

(by

name)

(to)

name, word, noun.

around,

"

etc.

(be

zealous,

be

earnest,

zeal).

m --?

.
craft,

() a master of one''s
a wise man, a sophist.
such

Sunrep just as.

'

'

^,

-.
%
,
,
,
.
,.

re

apyvpiov

Tekelv virep

epoiTO,

'

Tekeiv

ask

concerning

about,

(Gen. or Ace).

Eiev,

-6

{an one).

already.

mpL

A.

in addition, ask further.

call

well then

tltv

--(,

99

iv

75

>

'^,

avSpa,

^
;

.
- 4
--4

/
\

-,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

100

Et

/^

c.

%'

SrjXop

oTL

85

66.

The name

1'/6.

The

particle

of Protagoras clo.ses the series,

and

is

is

added

for emphasis.

that to which Socrates

has been leading.

if OUr mnney he
spending besides {in addition).

av

68.
70.

with a bhish

82.

(^

shoto (or appear) just a


83.

glimmer of daylight,

(or gradually).

little

yeviadai SO that he became visible.

LVL
To

Learn the conjugation

The

of

<*/',

9.

^/

Discourse,

Infinitive in Indirect

Verbs
Herewith Exercise 41.

Infinitive with

of Thinking, 179, I

,
,,
(). -,
, ,

TE
(-

priv-

mar, disMid.

figure, dishonor, disgrace.


be

ashamed

got

(-

hold, have.

-).

furnish,

supply, provide.

the

wonder, marvel
thaumaturgy).

9^<, -,

\,

(^pe

- ', -, -,
F.

,,,
,
care for, heal.

have in mind,

inlend.

179,

be surprised, toonder

ative, yvo-).

disgrace,

a.

()

be ignorant

feel

blush).

red,

there toas a

83.

Sufficient.

(
Cf.

serve, attend to,

Cf

therapeutic.

eXadov,

one's notice,

\\

elude

-).
{\ one ought (&.) =

Set.

es-

(\-

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

-?
()

()
image, portrait.

and

Cf.

() a master

in the world.

then, therefore.

.
, /-,
I suppose

mnsier o/.
work, business, a work-

-oiOS

making.

ing,

(of one's

ttov

profession).

(17)

yet.

what

icon.

cp^ao-ia

101

(),

penter.

animal).

irepi;

of what sort?

by the gods

irpos

() a painter of pictures

(enclitic).

iroiov;

iroios; iroa;

-ovos

builder, car-

Cf. architect.

= iripl

what about?

tCvos;

"

%v

,'7/9
\iyeiv.

^^

,
,

ye

'

^,

avSpi,

, )( )

8ta-voov)u,at,

"
-\

-.. ,,

;,

'

95

'

'

ot

ay-

.
,
,- ,
. - ;,
Otju,at

'Eyoj

go

xjjv'xrjv

105

102

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

av

eivaL,

not even to

,.
thing

95.

101.

whom you

are handing

with mocking humor.


is

103.

pertains

here accusative of Specification, 113 d.

of the knowledge which

air-epyaaiB.v

Trpoj

,.

to the execiition (i.e. the

painting)

this {that folloios).

104.
ij

of the (art) of making,

etc.

,,
To

/cat

Review the declension

of

spend, squan-

der.

,was

necessary,

,
^
,

need, lack,

that he is) master

36.

Decline

-,

run a

-.

--

face peril

risk,

emphasizes.

call to one's side.

Cf.

Paraclete.

be in

(del).

answer.
clever

speaking,

at

'

able to speak.

of course.
-is (17) question(ing).

5 perhaps.

<

'iSti

()

()

We say

(5),

were necessary.

need of (Gen.)

etc.

or (loould

()

-(>,

'
< ,
.

LVII.

if it

97.

fSti it

heivov keyeiv

-;

94,

over your soul.

107.

etnoL^eu

Adverb

of

$.

?
(

() lyre, cithara.
() lyre-playing.

-is

()

()

teacher of the lyre.


danger, peril, risk.

indirect

()

form

counsel.

of

/^>

.
^

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

20
", ,
,

'

103

'

XeyoLfxev,

4,

,
&; , .
' ^,
.,
,
,
^
-, , ye.

Seivov

;.

heivov

Xeyeiv

SrjXov

no

SrJTTov

hrj

ctl

115

,,

^
8,
;

xjjd)(yjv

)(

Sia-KivSd-

yevecr^at

^,

125

xf)d)(7Jv,

^. ' ,

Joaj

130

35

'^'^^^

104

,
,
,
,- .

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

,^

"^817

^^''^"^^eiXe^at

140

",,
eh

into lohat sort of

rtva

125.
125.

irepl

you estimate
126.

129.

place under.

113

f.

you consider of greater value (that which

at a higher value).
.

upon which depends your

one ought

--

to associate with,

Perfect of

137.

$.

i.e.

recognize thoroughly).

become the pupil

LVIII.
To

(5t-

Verbal of

of.

a-Joa.

ayvoQv you are clearly ignorant.

139.

for weal

(-).

perfect participle of

-. -\.

all

you took counsel loith


coming at daybreak. Cf.
as though you had already fully decided

-?

132.
136.

Accusative of Extent of Time,

vXeiovos ^yei lohat

if

or woe.

a danger.

Fu.tu.Te ^laTtici^le oi

to expose.

120.

''5, ovre

3.

119.

-
-,

,,
, ,, ,

176

.
" - "
Svolv SeovTe?

g.

with Participle, 176 c


Herewith Exercise 42.
;

vr\

with Future

Indicative, 148.

TE

,,

()

,(-,-

,
,
.
,- . , -,
,
77<"')

-,

^) VX^v

().
--, -

lead,

carry, convey

-.

sell.

16.

deceive,

tain (Gen.)

cheat.

rear, nourish

-).

Cf.

buy.

hit,

chance, happen.

Aor.

ob-

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

.
()

ad

always.

()

()

().

'
< 9
,

retail dealer, huckster.

()

wholesale

nourishment

OVP,

()

perhaps.

importer,

merchant.

.
,
,
<
,

wares

105

(),

'

' '7
. -

,
., - ^,-

rjv

rj

'

,,

Ma^r^'/aacrt

145

-, -,,,^-,
". ,

150

55

'

,.

xjjd)(yjv.

\))()

yap,

144.

retains

its

surely

6
it

original sense of surely.

appears, etc.
Cf. ^

yap

In such a context yap

184.

146.
us.

-^ /

TEE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

106
oirws ye

148.

149.

&v

15-5.

del

&=
here

157.

'

158.

LIX.
To

The Uses

(see to it) that he do not deceive

$.
'
^.
"
=

ayovffiv.

102.

for the time being.

=
=

&

102.

in the

same way.

Beovreq

of the Infinitive, 172, especially the Infini-

tive Avith irpiv

and

Verbals, 177.

TE

,
,- , (()

-,

receive

xinder stand, have

perceive,

cir

-,

(- -).

the one icho knows.

(),

con-

advice,

suit loith.

expert knowledge (of a subject).

play at dice

start, hasten.

seek

be of benefit

help,

to,

advantage).

aid (rb

take

risks.

()

()

receptacle,

vessel,

necessity.

safe, secure.

--i's

42.

blessed, happy.

Gen. of

whosoever.

-v

-ov

that which

be

anyone,

27 b.

().

before (Infin.).

()

food (bread,

etc.).

()

price, value, honor.

(17)

buying, purchase

).

'

Et

may

.
,
,
,

, ,
()

ttotos

drunk

urn, sack, etc.

^;
)(

(-

*
6<;

/cat

re

/cat

.
,
168.

,
-,
-

171.
172.
17.3.

176.

/cat

-teVat

/cat

\\\ \

see to

jLtera

-.

/cat

/cat

185

with Subj.

it lest,

YipohiKov

160

'^ for one who has purchased


putting down.
().
.

,-().

170

75

/cat

iu

ayyetot?

ot/caSe

164.

165

/cat

-,
, , \,
',
-,
,
. -\. , 8
,
,

ot

8ea<j^at

107

,,

el

/cat

Srj

,
^> ^.

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

having piit down

with

ttjc

^/

c.
it is

possible.

having paid.

.
^
-

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

108
177.

and

Perfect passive participles of

rj

respectively.

179.

decide

veoi

{-<) so xoeighty a matter.

182.

let

us consult

LX.

we are

(too)

young

to

tvith (koivos).

'

To

The Verb Review the perfect active, 65, 66 the


perfect middle (passive), 67; and learn the aorist- pas;

sive,

69 and 79 C.

The Meanings

of the Perfect,

137

Passive Depo-

nents, 141.

Herewith Exercise

43.

- ..
--.

-.
"
.^'
|
|
. ()-

Review and master the following verbs


1.

2.
3-

4.

- ,|

J" J"'

'^^

hr

(/3eX-

\y

\-

-).

5.

and

-).

6.
7-

8.

9-

.
II.

''"

and

and

and

Qqvpov)

(/-).

{)

cvpc-

^
^^y>

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


12.

' .

3
4

-).

15-

6.

-).

8.
19

20.
21.

kKtkiv-

(\-

.
'
6
| .
^

(7-

(Xenr-

j:^^*-"^

-)

17.

109

t^ .*4--

w^"*''^

ireirauKa

'

'.

o-t-*^i>

^5>_>-<----^^-^

and

(7/37-)

22.

\|/

(^7-

23

'

Orpeir-

24

-^.
|/
-).

- -}.

26.
27

28.

29

30.

and

32.
33

34

(-}.

(e'/aew) eiTTOv.

" - ".
"
-^-- .-.
yov- yet-).

31.

(..

|
.-| - -
and

25

(/).

(i/c-).

(-

.
|(
-
, ,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

110

LXI.

ef?

To

Verbs

of Coming, Going

See Lesson

arrive.

LX.

walk, go, come.

siep,

walk, go, come

Used

be going.

cf.

61

e.

').

as the future of

or (more

F.

,
^-

(^-,

commonly)

,,

come, go.

Pf.

/ am

coxiie,

have come.

With

the

force

of a

perfect.

With

gone.

/ am

Past Impf.

gone, have

the force of a perfect.


proceed, go, march

way),

come {go) frequently, go

to

and

fro, go

to

school, etc.

TE
()
burdened, vexed,

he

noyed

(&3 ()

den).

F.

fall

ha

A.

A.

iv-iiretrov fall in, fall


to.

-,

agree with (Dat.), agree

tireaov, Pf.

TecreTv

,
-

-,

upon, fall in with, occur

bur-

(o/xos).

agree with.

()
-is

incomplete (tAos).

yovv at any rate {ye


'ia.

(-).

iriae

weight,

an-

vah I
() eunuch.

bah

() doorkeeper.

with a struggle, hardly, reluctantly

(-

toil),

() throng, crowd.
() vestibule.

.
, --) -(
THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

,. ^

-,

-,

8
.

I'

iv

oSop iv-enecrev.

,-,-

yevoLTO,

\..

.
^
,
.,
,/ ,
-. , , ,,, ,
.^,. - ..

'

A\K

yap

193.

tol

having finished

by an

(^

infinitive.

loith

as vigorously as he could he

is

199.

y-\r]vos

204.

/i07is

constantly employed

In this idiom the idea of danger

-) 6$, .

both hands (Dual Dat.).

slammed

-ov closed

the

205

complete).

probable,

has wholly faded out.


197.

it is likely,

in this sense, followed

195

i^-ayyLov

189.

igo

a^^ecr^at

111

door

().

at last with reluctance.

{kir

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

112

LXII.

Herewith Exercise 44.

-$,

-().

,---,
be

famous

()

be of good repute,

-, -,

t|fjs

()
on the one

-8

epichoric

native,

local.

().

Cf.

McvSaios o/J/e>ifZe (in Thrace).

'?

()

foreigner,

stranger,

half-brother.

behind (Gen.).

'

()

(?)

technical,

Cf.

profession.

irl

--

,
,
,
,
^, ,

e^yj'i

/xev

,
^.
^
,
,
?,

^?

220

Cf.

for a pro-

'

-,
/^

215

irpb-

portico, colonnade.

art,

-'',

iv

.
--

i.e.

fession.

friend., guest-friend.

7>)

irepi-

horn of the same

-ov

.
^
? ,

of) a locality

-ov in (or

or country,

-5
^

side.

mother,

in a row.

loalk, tread on.

Cf. peripatetic.

charm, bewitch.

,.-

,
.

'
ot

hi

--,

tyj

-.
6

--,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

LXIII.

'

/cat

Learn the conjugation

of

sit

113

down,

sit,

96.

Conditional Clauses, Indefinite Relative and Temporal


Clauses,

Temporal Clauses, 165-170,

Verbs of

Sitting

{-}.

sit

Poetic; Attic prose uses the compound:


sit

96.

, and

F.

Impf

(-,

sit

Impf.

cf.

down,

No

sit.

future or aorist.

^-

and
compounds

-^

especially 169 b.

Poetic

A.

Attic prose uses the

seat

(-,

ef.

F.

Lat.

sido').

down,

sit

sit.

sit

down,

pleasure

(^)

F.

Lat. sedeo^.

TE

-,
(!).
, -, .
be

cv

8-^-

expound,

()
cautious

{-,

explain

(go

through).

be

'
Cf.

way

(of one's feet).

()

and on

that.

).

-cf.

order, ornament, uni-

Cf. cosmos.

verse.

-ov

this side

{-,

split

schism),

divide (and pass) around.

impede.

on

Lat. suavis).

fo/xat

()
bench.

in the

cf.

Lat. scindo,

F.

()

take

pleased,

ground;

raised

from

heavenly

off

body.

the
Cf.

meteor.

-ov

listening

to

Opovos (0) high-backed chair.


throne.

(Cf.

?
(9

somehow.

()

Cf. ttws

nature

groio).

Cf.

physics.

()

baiid,

company, chorus.

.
,
,
-,^,
TRE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

114

IB'

TOVTOV

Toz^ ')(opov

')

"

230

-,"
'

^/^

.
.

--^-^
-

'

Si

226.
228.

''

iu

235

iv

,
,
. *
'

-^
.elvaL

225

<

they took (their) positions.

After this one I perceived.''''

Plato

is

playfully quoting

Homer,

from the passage (Odyssey XI, 601) which describes Odysseus' visit to
the underworld. Odysseus sees Sisyphus, Tantalus, Heracles, etc.
228. Hippias of Elis was one of the more prominent of the sophists.
231.
of the deme of Mvppivovs.

/)55

LXIV.

., ,

The Third Declension Adjectives


The Verb
97.

42.

^S'

serve oneself with,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


use,

with the Dative,

The Dative

121.

115

Case, 111,

120-122.

, ,- ,
TE

Ca)

-^,

-,

cover

(-)

rare

serve

with, use (Dat.).

in

Cf.

oneself

-.

prose except in compounds, as

--$ -h

not clear

()

6$ ()

-8
()

-5

()

Cf. idea.

jieece (used as

near.

.- ^

dissolving; lodging.

ding).

() lad.
() room, chamber.

humming.

couch, bed.

()

()

(^.

().

loithout

appearance.

()

(ev).

heaviness.

ringing,

from

ISi'a

wrap up in

() mattress, bed-spread.
() store-room.

bed-

IF

.
,
-,
-,
\.
, ..Sr)

"

etcr-etS

,^ ,

."

iv
6 240

ert

^/,

'

^ ^^.

245

116

,-

Si-eXeyovTo

Trepl he

250

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

Kainep

239.

242.

eipai

<;

iv

Prodicus of Ceos was another of the more famous sophists.

4-$ having emptied ().


=

247.

$ e7<^

?^

249.

'
= 700'
Agathon was

251.

Kaiirep

248.

yap

'

at any rate,

thought

although eager.

LXV.

/cat

Verbs of Seeing:

have

the eyelids^.

-,
look

sight.,

Cf.

tvatch, view.

theatre,
see (^opa-

(ij)

- -).

examine

heard.

a tragic poet.

(/3-

cf.

p. 70.

(^

Cf.

a viewing^ theory.

See Lesson LX.

(^- -^.

See

Lesson LX.

Cf.

thoughtful, sceptic.

TE

8-, -, - >()

aicay, spend time, delay.

-\>/\.

-8
contest

-ov

().
vKa

famous

(iv,

\6yoi).

engaged in equal
with,
a match for

-ov

on account of (Gen.),

VKa on v:hat account.

(),

-,

ov

113

()

an

equal

little,
e.

in

age

comrade.
a short time.

.
^, ,
:

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

-,',

'H/ACt? ovv

/3'//^9

255

Trpoa-rj^ep

. ,
TOP

'

Tl

'

117

.
^-^
^,
', , 8 ,,
,
,
,
'

TOL

^. -

'

ovSev

260

'

--

Tt ovv

'

,
,
^
'

267.
270.

.
\ -.

to him(self).
TTpbs

i.e.

21 b.

privately.

clv

270

179, I b.

The Second Aorist

a) Thematic second aorists

review Lesson LIII.


learn the conjuga-

, -, , ,
:

b) Non-thematic second aorists


tion of

see 55, 63.

The Aorist

8^ -

. '

LXVI.
The Verb

265

in

Eager Questions,

136.

86,

and

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

118

TE

(,, ,

make ready

(food, etc.), dress,

etc.

(to)

-, -, -

prepare,

make ready (what one

glad{ly).

in the presence of (Gen.).

8 88

admirer

lover,

{,-, 19

a sitting together in

council, council

{).

pleasant.

a).

Cf.

'

,.-,,

el

- , ,
\4
,
evoov

irepX

\oyov

re

XecrOaL

yap

-,
\
,
,
,

TlpoSiKov

iv-

(Tvv-ehpLOV

-^.

-\ ,
;

285

()

sus-

sudvis.

28

-,

-).

.
, ^,
.
^
^,
.-"
- -ov

^/ {-),

275

under,

pect

()

<8 ()

89

vessel,

--,

has).

procure and prepare, prepare.

imple-

ment).

(ff/ceOos

-,( -,

()
p)-epare,

^,

-^ ,
THE FIRST YEA

re

OF GEEEK

UpoSiKOf,

rJKOv

e/c

TlpoSiKov.

271.

282.

the seats.
284.

287.

he provident

a display.
283.

.
., ,

--

275-276.

119

(--), cautions,

infinitive of

to

careful.

show himself

off

and make

.
-,
,,,
.
i.e.

without waiting

foi'

the servants to arrange

laying hold of (Gen. 115


having made (him) get up.

c).

'

^^,,
-,
iwel

,
-.

-,

-]

-,

,
-.

-,

^.

-teVat

-)^)6.

290

,
,,

-,

295

'

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

120

-\

291.
295.

to

&v represents
299.

300.

TTj

301.

iirl

on which{ever) day.

TO

Review the declensions


48

", .
<,
(~/
7 -,

5-,
teach

()

, ^,
Lat.

cf.

(-).

-(,

to

the better) to

make

(b)

ns,

27

A-B.

Infin.

treat.

()

Cf.

mal-

outrage.

-,,

throw

iracrxw,

Cf. didactic.

-.

,
-, ,,
outrage,

know

{g)nosco,

he will advance,

progress.

to

of (a) ris

eyvwv, Pf.

come

recognize,

(--

advance

(c) thematic active participles, 50

TE

know).

7670^0x1 having become.

122 a.

(to

LXVII.

issue).

179, I b.

wrepaiq. on the next day.

progress.

off,

-6$.
3.v.

298.

step

he says he would gladly learn,

&v

296.

(-

make mention.

ivhat(ever) will result

suffer

make

differently, change.

(-

thology,

- -,-,

for

-)

cf.

pa-

for

is

()
()

flute playing.

? ()
-is

avXos () flute.
immediately.

- -dv of drawing, loriting,

()

-TOs

it is
-"fj

likely, natural.

wonderful,

-(>v

strange.

although (followed by par-

ticiple).

painting.

ing.

Ikos

the art of paint-

Cf. graphic.

it

of such an age, so old.


just as if
.

.
,
,
/

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

121

IZ'

,
,
- ^

KoX

ovSev

elirov,

Xeyet?,

' ,,

eirei

et

305

BiSa^eLev

yevoLO.

et

-^,
'*
,
, ,
, - ,

---,

,
.
-, -,

-<,

-,
304.

inel
:

3^5

*
,

peated in 306

ei

310

.-,, ^-,
-^

,
325

Slv)

7^ .

since even you

32

would

The

&v

is re-

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

122
310.
312.
314.

Zeiixippus of Heraclea was a painter.

--

{eir-av-epwTaw ask, again).

.
,
,
,--.
,

315.

eh

316.

Orthagoras of Thebes was a music teacher, his specialty being

'

iiute-playiiig.

319.

in lohat ?

day by day.

'
335

,
,- ,
, .
.
-,
,
-.
6

330

IH'

3.

'

rj

^-,

340

345

,
,,

^,

-\\
-

",

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

(
331.

the arts,

Ttts

i.e.

123

the special studies which had been re-

cently added to the curriculum in Athenian schools, such as arithmetic

Translate: they lead


calculations), geometry, astronomy, etc.
back again against-their-will (AKovras) those who have fled

from

335.

Compare

11.

2.34

(-).

-(,

342.

345.

ff.

wise counsel, prudence.

they might best administer,

promise.

it

-\ ()

337.

how

(^/)

the technical subjects, and, etc.

F.

---

how

best to

8irws hv

,--2
.

administer,

hold oneself under (aji obligation),

announce, advertise, promise.

Herewith ends this selection from the Protagoras, of which dialogue


constitutes the dramatic introduction. The conversation develops into

a discussion of the nature of virtue.

LXVIII.

Svolv

,^.

Review: The conjugation

of

95

'

the declensions

of the active participles, especially of the perfect active


participle,

50

SeSios fearing^

(/?
''$
C

knowing^.
having

fled.,

Like

decline

having

made.

The

Infinitive as a

Verbs of

176

Noun,

Thinking., 179, I a

Infinitive with
with a Participle,

172, II a

c.

Herewith Exercise

Verbs

45.

of Fearing:

I fear
is

(perfect used as a present.

not

common

Cf. oilha).

in Attic prose, except in the

singular of the indicative

more common

is

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

124

I fear

The most

(second perfect as present).

,,,

frequently occurring forms are

6,

,
, -, ^

participle

-, -,

() flight,

Of.

', ^,

put

infinitive

to flight, terrify.

flee in fear., he afraid., fear.

Cf hydrophobia.

fear.

TO
When on

of corrupting the

was

called of

young men,

God

whom

the Athenians believed,

and others to a searching examination


aWovs) summarily

suggestion that by renouncing this

mode

of life he

ov

elvai,

tyJ

8eSieVat,

TOL

,'
y)

SoKeiv

eivai,

',

ovoev

ovoels

oeoiacTL

6<;

el

aya^oil'

OTL

/^

oiSe

oiSev.

elSevai

to

rejects the

eivai

yap

and

might escape condem-

This, he says, would be conclusive proof that

nation.

and

Socrates, holding the conviction that he

to devote his life to the pursuit of philosophy,

subject both himself


3ei

before a court of his fellow-citizens on the twofold

trial

charge of not believing in the Gods in

,,
,

eii^at,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


oe aoLKeiv

etoevai.

.)

otl

ovhe

1.

Awo\oyiq., 29

the fear of death.

Observe the order of emphasis.


this ignorance of thinking.,

4.
9.

11.

12.

in

any respect

+ -).

17.

(=

irpb

See

again).

than any one.

"

-^

the

b (end).
whether God or man.

See

16.

know.

etc.

(=

the {conditions) in {the house) of Hades.

iv"

14.

Unseen {one)

in this (point) also here

disobey the oracle.

because

.,.

aya^a

3.

15

ecrrtv,

,.'

et

peKriovL^

aTreiueiv

koll

125

in preference to the evils which 1

102.

LXIX.

^.'.'

evo? h4ovTe<i

yXvKV.

The First-Third-Declension

Adjectives, 43, 45.

TE

-, -^

lie

down

to sleep, sleep.

()
()

perception.

{.).

(
thetic

()

from

Cf. aes-

ovop

this place.

{-)

icondrous.

{) change

{)

change

of

resi-

deuce.

Tb^Tcpovthe one {ofttoo).


-la -ov

-(-$
()

most.

dream.

much, more,
polygamy.
roiros () place.
Cf. topography.
iroXvs

Cf.

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

126

^
^

Later in the course of his speech before the court Socrates remarks

TOL

eivaL

ecrrt

.',

firjh'

^'^

}
,
'
,
^
'
'
^
,
} ,
\eyop,va

Te9veo)Ta,

ivOevSe

etre

rh

1.

to be nothing

rhv

3.

etc.,

ovSev

/cat

hrj

death,

and

to

eivai,

\.

it

is

such

have no perception of anything.


the one loho is dead.

( condition)

\-6

,
,
,
^ '^ ,
, ,.
,
,
,,

according

as people say.

1.

oTSei' ei

2.

'

638,

^.

833,

^.

'

'

3-

as

180 a.

1477-8.

to,

.
,
,, ,
@ , -.
.
, ,
THE FIBST YEAR OF GREEK

.<

'>
'

4.

TOL

TL

^<,
' 4-^

ipa,

ov

ecrri

5-

,'

'
-.
()

-.,
;

, 58.

-.,

ipiei,

1.
2.

oi

This

3.

fast

\\6s
is

and lying down


&V01S dv

4.

'

it is

I am

first

clear that,

Prose

lost.

" breathing

's

break-

beneath the earth.

^.
.

ipei.

To

.4< -^;.,
ovpavo'i,

-).

you could accomplish.


yrjv

LXX.
^

..

e/xo?

Gazing

137.

quotation above

^- a late form for ^v I was.

7.

31.

is eider-down.''''

awois

5.

(
().

dead
they have
a parody of the
the

^.

161,

'

6.

127

'^
'.

e'iOe

et?

'Av0oXoyia<;, VII, 669.

Star ?

at stars,

Star of my soul

Ah me 1

TEE FIRST YEAB OF GREEK

128

That I were heaven, to gaze with


Those myriad eyes on thee !

all

Translation by Dr. Walter Headlam.

nouns and adjectives,

Review: The Third Declension


30-38, 44.

Modes

of Expressing Wish

With

a)

Optative, 162.

b) With Past Indicative,

153.

TE KAI

,{-).

,at

F.

gaze

()
look earnestly

at,

ya (^), --,

,, ,

marry

bind.

,,,
),

hum {-,

die,

(?).

8,

quire (wevd-

()
Kcpds

Cf. aster.

-ipos star.

(),

858 twelve years old.

? =

(),

now
()

(),

()

that!

().

hope

at length, already.

by inqui)-y,

-)

kin-

caustic).

learn

Cf.

need.

(),

A. fdiyov touch (poetic).

(or

KaCco

-aros horn.

gnat, mosquito.
(poetic)

-aros eye

(-).

irapos formerly (poetic).

, ,, ,

mistletoe, bird-lime

()

bull.

(),

(pre-

Cf.

-aros

Minotaur.

kiss.

pared from the mistletoe berry)


I.

^'
"

e)(et9

TO

ia-iSyq,

/^.

'

Thine eyes are fire, Timarion,


Thy kiss a limed lure
TJiou kindlest tchom thou look''st upon,

Whom

in-

touchest, hast

him

sure.

Translation by Dr. Walter Headlam.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

2.

129

Epitaph on Aesigenes

- ..

Hail, Mother Earth

That

erst

Not heavy,
To press

Aesigenes

was unto

thee

noio in turn may'' st please

not heavily.

1>.
,
,

Translation by Dr. Walter Headlam.


O.

7
,

Epitaph on a Boy

', ,

Epitaph on an Unhappy

e.

Man

,.
^^

,
,-, , ',-.,

$
1.

2.

VII, 309.

Tavpos

,^
--,
^
6

VII, 453.

-,

,
^
-

ws

thoti hast

cLv

.,

'.

160 a, 197.

(him) bound.

may^st thou have {thyself) upon

235

,
,
,
, -<

THE FtRST YEAR OF GREEK

130

he put away, laid away.

3.

sixty years of age.

4.

of Tarsus.

--

eWe

-,

(-).

alighting upon.

5.

receive

having sat upon.

(- -).

creep, crawl.

-, and
.

,,

live (Infin.

smi7e.

(Cf.

).

(Cf.

{6) animal.)

laugh.)

". ,,
-,
."
.
-.
,
dance.

{)

(Cf.

place for dancing.)

bring forth, bear {young),

etc. (re/c-

-).

"ApKTOS

1.

yap

'

^r]Sev

/
2.

Zsiis

'
'

.
iScov

poSov

',
6

/cat

^,

'
,-.

.
avrrj

6-

et/xt

'

"Opvis

',

et

-,
.

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

'
'^.

'

iSvvaTO.

boasting.

awjcward.

3.

4.

fat.

,.
.

LXXI.

Temporal Clauses,
Verbs in -, 83.

The

was

he

1.

131

170

Classification of

.,
;

8'.
865-866.

Imperative, 171.

Verbs according to the Progressive

Action-stems, 59, 60.

TE

,, , -,

()
make

clear,

show

free).

, ,(
F.

{\$).

(poetic)

set free

(eXeudepos

view with

-,

envy, admire, praise

ircpdo),

through,

(f^Xos

deem happy
happy (poetic)).
pass

complete

()

emulation, envy, etc.).

()
(),

aX-yeivos

-cDiOsconiesi.

-17

C/".

agony.

painful.

(to), -ovs, seat, abode.

()

cJiest,

(),

vault, tomb.
seer.

Cf. mantic.

?
'

()

(wipas

end).

ita.TpL'i (J)), -idos

-a -ov

()

(),

fatherland.

of

one'' s

father.

ancestor.

-aros

end (poetic).

^
.
,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

132
1.

yvoivai

Ihelv

'

'

\
.
4^'6)
^
),
%, .

2.

3.

),

The

,
'
.

'^4

he

1417-1419.

\6

1529-1530.
irore

call to battle as the

lSy).

^.

Greeks entered the battle of Salamis,

480 B.C.

, ,',, ,
,

^,

^
4.

Cf.

402-405.

-.

Browning's translation in Balaustion'' s Adventure


That song of ours which saved at Salamis :
"
sons of Greece, go, set your country free,
Free your wives,'' etc.
^

I.

M17

-, ^

avhpa
'

,
.

(&, 963-964.
1

6vTLva accusative of

oWu.

^ ,.

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK


2.

M>^

/xot

elr)

re

() ,, ,

,
..
'^,

'
'^
ovSev

6)(,

133

979-980.

ovSev etSore?

LXXII.

<.

391

'.

Verbs with Second Aorists


1) Verbs with Thematic Second Aorists, Lesson LTII.
(See
2) Verbs with Non-thematio Second Aorists.
:

-- ---

63,

86.)

a) Those with TJiematic Presents

run away (hpa-).

-?.

- "
"

' "-

step,

"

(/-).

ognize

or

or

go (/3-).

(").

,.'

*,
-^.

b) Those with Non-thematic Presents


(for

(^-

place,

put

give, offer

send, let go

((-

".

enter

19 a) make stand,

^e-).

-).

(17- e-).

rec-

set

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

134

Learn the conjugation of


Personal
87 A-B.
endings and thematic and non-thematic formations, 5356

non-thematic second

the

-verbs, 77

aorists,

63

peculiarities of

with

reduplication

60 b

the

',
,
,
.^ . , , ;

t,

active participle in -as, 50 C.

,,*'),

1st

-, -, .

2d

(for

--,
--, -,
.
--, -,
,,
-,
.
--, --, --, .
(-).
-(<,

()

,,

(make) stand

(make) stand up.

(make) stand away.

point out.

beside.

Mid. point out

to

consider

oneself., think,

(make) stand upon.^

()
()
.

point, edge.
.

at one time

()

acme.

Cf.

'

KLvSvi'o'; tol

e^ets,

Very few verbs have both a

instances the

first aorist is

intransitive, thus

middle of this verb

is

I set up (for myself),

,,.

stand.

Many instances

first

I caused

23,

and a second aorist. In such


meaning the second,
;

to stand,

The

perfect active

The

stood.

transitive like the first aorist active


etc.

'

557-558.

regularly transitive in

aorist

intransitive

-($,

187,

-,... -^
is

of the occurrence of this very important verb

already been met in the preceding lessons


TTJs

$.

.
,

at another time.

'

razor.

iroiipos poetic for

understand (lit., stand


with a specialized meaning.

have

287,

58,

upon), appears to be for

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

.$

,
1-isk.

common

here means chance,


uncontracted form of
(balanced) tipon the edge of a razor. This is a
and very ancient proverb.

".

, .,

.
-.

First-Second Perfect:

1.

MevavSpov,

8e

3-

'

<;

iv

.
., -

iav

TTaiSiov

superlative
?

Tois

of the use in late

Greek

yos).

0--4

ev

elnev

',

'

'-'.

tois apyo'is.

an instance

(=

309.

Trj

^
TTj

Mop. 237.

,. 252.

^, '

,
, -"
eKeivQ

6.

-^

87

.. 242.

,
-.
,
.. , ].
.

2.

135

you will not

enter.

159.

of the comparative for the

-,
<; \

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

136

iv

OTL

'

iv

-^-

,, -^-^,<
,
-8 .
\4

Tats

.
-

(TuaL,

Kat

7.

'

.,

he

iv

'

',

-'

oy

LXXIII.

Review the preceding


-as,

^,
," '- .-,
,
,
,, ,
iv

(,

lesson

and

]3articiples in

50 c).

Herewith Exercise

46.

lepov

I.

ets

)(^
5

'

4-

^
'^

3
*

-,'

oirws

Lva.

Equals

lift

hv

give back,

as

Up {upon),

much

raise.

make return.
I possess.

as

.^

.- ,.,
,
,
). ^
- ,
.\
,
,
.
-,,?^^,,
.
^
^.- ,"
THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

lo

2.

ervnre

137

',

evayyeXiov

$,

,)

"

iwicrroXijs

rijs

i-iy'.

',

".

eav

',

Tijs

^^/

irpbs

^/?

SetKvvvra

Tot's

KayaObv

Cf.

(
^1*

&-.

eavrbv

uepX

-'

.
', ly'

'

LXXIV.

^.^

ev

T7J

\q..
set

So

iv

fire).

()

(6),

>

(8).

to

extinguish

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

138

Review the forms ( 50 A, B, C a-e) and uses ( 173176) of the participles.


Review Lesson XXVII and
Exercise 18.
Master the following verbs

-- - -
- cIXov

grasp,

seize, take^

etc.

Harpy.

Of.

(take for oneself^ choose.


perceive.

Cf.

aesthetic.

| |

point

out,

(-).

show

50 C.

-| -|

accomplish (Act. and Mid.).


describe, narrate.

137.

-| -| (.

collect.

(Gen.)

,
^

?
5

St-oicretl'

TELV,

-| -|

obtain

etc.

hit,

.
re

^-.
eVt

re /cat
re

iv

acquire, possess.

/^

'

--

-^-

^-4

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

-,
6
^-,
,
.

,
6,

139

rt

el

y^viOTTOieiov
rjei

jote^'

iavTOv

2,

8.
9.

13.

how he

Tois

in the ability, etc.

the subject

having,

is

Socrates,

dealt with, etc.

i.e.

Euthydemus.

with.

i.e.

-,
, ^,
-^
-,
,
.'
^
, ,
^
.
'^
,
."
^^
^ - ,.
.
^,
'

'

/,"

"

,"
","

"

ovtl,

"

^^,

"

"

"

^
^

"

20.

27.

yaa y4
to he

ADMIRE
pursuing.

you.

25

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

140

LXXV.
Review the

nevTe

aorist passive (see Lesson

the declension of the participles in


decline

pleased,

Middle verbs with

appeared.

oe

LX) and

50 C.

-eis,

learn

Like

Bcis

persuaded,

having

of

passive form,

aorists

141.

Master the following verbs

-,
-- .

he

ashamed, feel

dis-

grace.

deny, refuse.

he in

-|

wish, he willing.

need

of,

want (Gen.).

converse ivith (Dat.).

(^please oneself with), he pleased

with, delight in (Dat. or Part.).

proceed, go.

show

fear.

{Of

appear.

'

,
-.
,
'"

^," 7?

"

yevi"

crvX-Xeyei

.
/cat

35

"

{Of.

.}

%<
,
^,,
^^<
-,
Se

30

oneself,

"

"

yap

"

-^ ."

'/'

^^

" ^'^

" "

"
,"

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

,"^'
.
',
,
.

?
.
.^'
," .
"

"

,
"

31

f.

45.

"

'

"

-, '8,)^,
." ,
"

"

"

y',"

fell into a

profound

silence.

for

179, II

you are seeking, you

desire,

,.
^

"

,"

^17

45

"

--' -. -.
ri

."

tol

31.

-"
,"
,"

"

^,

"

"

"

141

"

-.

.
98.

'

,"

^,

"

^7,,

"

."

"

"

'

',"

6
55

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

142

,
." ' ," "^ /<

Ti ovv
Uijaat

<7?

"

vrjvaL

^17,

"

epya

/aeWot,

''

57.

Kar-eipyaffai have

58.

ouSej/os

"

6^17

{-'..).

you achieved
would appear as just as any {one

b'lKaios

else)

^^
, -, < .
:
.

LXXVI.

Traijviov

-'

'Aveo\oyLd<>.

is but a Stage, a Play ;


Take then your part,
And put all seriousness away,
Or bear the smart.
Translation by Dr. Walter Headlam.

All Life

Review the declension of the


and learn the conjugation of

is

set up,

dedicate.

Of. anathema.
put off from, lay
Of. apothecary.

place upon.

Cf.

epithet.

posit.

--.

set

down,

de-

C)

put, place, 88.

compounded with eighteen prepositions

the following

aside.

participles in -cis ( 50

note

transpose.

Of.

metathesis.

of.

set

hy the side

Cf. parenthesis.

add

to.

Of.

put together, com-

pose.

Of. synthesis.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

.
^,
,
^}

'

TA

" BouXet ow,"

,
, .
elneVf "

(^
7,

^'

/," ,

"

"

"

"

, .^

"

,
."
^^
".
, ^^
/ -^^,
.
,
." ^
"
,"
'
^
,
"

^.'^
;

"

''

"

'

75

^^

^5

ovSkv

'

"

"

^,"

"

"

"

"

'

'

'

7,

"

"

."
"

"

"

"

,,
/."
"

"

^7,

/'

"

,"
;

"

"

65

"

^/,
"

^^,

'

/^ev

/,'

"

^","

^,"
;

"

"

"

/cai

e^r/,

^."

---?
6

eivai,

,?,

'

,"
"" ," .

"

ev-

epyov

" "

""

143

"

"'',"

TrJ

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

144

66.
77.

^
^ ,
.
to be in need of this,

LXXVII.

of

,,,
ow,"

making use

/ ,

TA
"

88,

also of the drill in Exercise 47.

, "

'

.
})
-,
,
"',

elvai

oe

eivai

,'^

."

"

."
,

,
05 "

," ,

ye

; ,
,
^-^
'^

,
,"

iav

iv

-,,

"Aeyet?,

"

,"

^>

"

Seiv

"

" iav

"

;"

"

" ;^'

ye

Selv

95

that this is necessary.

Review the conjugation

go

i.e.

arpaT-qybs aipedeis having been elected general.

"

'

" i^-eivai

,^'

-."

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

^
rj

. ' .

- , .

88.

91.

94.

make

new

distinction (and say) that

oh

it

but that one ought, etc.

discouraged.

falsely declare that reen-

aor. subj. of

^.
. fearing

Seiffds

{-).
107.

'

- .

forcements are coming,


99.

e^etv

is right, etc.

93.

eyoiye

<5

',,

"'',

Tt^eVat."

145

.=

LXXVIII.

/rots

he

lest

himself

destroy

102.

Contract Nouns of the First Declension, 28 D Uses


of the Genitive: Avith verbs of earing for, etc., 115 h;
with adjectives, 117 with improper
of price, 116 e
;

prepositions, 130.

'
,
AI

Se TTore

AQIAI.

/cat

eSofcet

"^',"

a^tat

,-,

A'

'^^;

,
yap

'*

yap

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

146

,
, -

>
,
,
- -, ,,
)(
4

' -,,

hvolv

4.

,"

yvpeia

"

."

"

',"

6 'Avtl-

' '

"

eivaL

15

/cat

/ca

',

eivaL.

--\$
,.
.

2.
5.

iv.

,.

the one icho


8.

11.

I am
14

was neglecting

to

examine himself as

in the presence of the

buy

18.

tioo

Thv

.,

191.

'
}. .

LXXIX.

'- ;

eva'yyeKiov

Learn the conjugation

of

the

compounds

of

of

el,

\.

this, xohether, etc.

'

.
', .

offer, give, 89,

ing the participles in -oOs, 50


Herewith Exercise 48.

Of

etc.
(i.e.

minae.

().

considering (inquiring, loondering)


ff.

much,

himself

his friend).

Gen. of the dual

and

to hoio

man

c.

note the following

includ-

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

-.
-

give in return.

give bacJc, restore,

hand over

Of. apodosis.

au

ecTTt,

<

,"

=
27.
28.

29.

6,

eiraywybv

,-

rj

hear one (complaining) that,

(29-30)

lest it

eupovros sell for

25

'

,
-.
)
.

"

-^.

24.

20

, -

) ^

-fj

ye

eavrov,

,
,
6

,'
.

"

B'

eivau,

-^^.

poSlBo

another,

to

-"

AIQIAI.

/," - '^,

give
to.

betray.

sell.^

AI

avrjp,

give a share of

(Gen.).

Of. antidote.

"

147

whenever

to sell.

be a temptation.

what he
it is

etc.

will fetch.

possible to get, etc.

to offer for sale.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

148

? .

LXXX.
To

'

"

.
,

'<;,

Review the conjugation


of

,
avepi

'

oySoT]

of

89,

739

^.

and learn that

point out, show, 90, together with the declen-

sion of the participles in -vs, 50 C.

Herewith Exercise
1.

49.

TOL SiKaiov ovre

avSpa
iv

.
,
.
$,
'
.,.
4,

. . 609-615.

,,

2.

eivai

'

3-

4.

,'

'
,

,.
222

,'

^.

Qeiyvidoi, 149-150.

oioa

-.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

irepi apeTTj^

^
,
. ^^ '
.
.
\

5-

Trjhe

yevecr^at

8e

17)

) 6

-%
)
.
^
,

4.

persuading them by their pre-

(sc.

cepts.
5.

&

=: 8

1.

in the inward parts.

such outward advantages as I possess,


See Lesson VI,
and
bear nor carry.

An
.

.
164, 3.

Attic Insckiption, 600-500

A/^
[

'

eivai

)(,

149

ic

b.c.

^ - ' .
5

neither

OF GREEK

THE FIRST

150

ADDITIONAL SELECTIONS FOR READING

This selection, The Punishment of Harpagus, is taken from the first


of Herodotus (108 ff. ), and serves to illustrate the studied cruelty of

book

oriental torture.

( '/5), king of

the Medes and Persians (594-559 b.c),


some day supplant him in the kingdom,
determined to make ayay with the boy in his infancy. Accordingly,
summoning the nobleman Har'pagus, his chief administrator and the
most faithful of his subjects, Astyages gave orders that the child, the
son of his daughter Man'dane and Camby'ses, the Pensian, be put to

Asty'ages

fearing lest his grandson -would

death.

ovv
OLKeiov

,
6

)(),

/caXeicra?

re

^'

avopa.

--,
-)
, -. eXeyev

TOiaSe

crot

e/xe

re

.
$ - (-)
^(/7

,,

"

'

Oaxjjov

4.

-) {-\\

abuse, misuse).
5.
6.

e^

by

means disregard

(lit.,

157.

(?)

(-)

throio aside, deceive).


nepi-w^iT-gs

later,

fall foul of

yourself, be your oion tindoing.


es (= eis) is the form regularly
7. ^s ceavTov to your oion (home),
employed by Herodotus, as by Thucydides. It is very common in early
Greek. Attic prose (except Thucydides) regularly employs ets.
in whatever manner.
6(^
8.
afterwards =

",
-
/THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

'

ySovXet."

'
-.
,^

151

avSpl

ovSev, e?

,^

varepov

ere

-
, ,
^-. '
.
'. ',-.^ '
TOl*

^."
-)

yiyve-

et

'

OLKaSe

'

"

.
, ,
,

"

J)

'

'

,
,
-.

-, .

neither at

(( .

any time in

TO 7'

13.

15.

{ -)
--$

(^)

17.

25.
26.
28.

spoken

rrj

childless, i.e.

^;
.

178,

dressed

()

and, etc.

rendered

{in) the robe for

will not give assent to his resolve.

without a son.

25

).

death, robed for burial.

22.

the past

man (i.e. in myself),


my {service) must he

have you observed any untowardness in this


dutifully.

^-/3^

9,

^^~

'

Si

"

7}

eVt

'

shall {is about to) pass to.

6
30

,
'

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

152

eveKa

'

Sei

'
,
.
-,
yeveadai

."
eiire

35

, -,
'

"
^, ^^ ^-.

^.

-,
45

- ^'

,
-,

,
Sia

-^.
'.
,

Teray/AaL

^,

'

31.

33.
44.

47.
48.

--

Ttva

ere

51.

deliverance.

'.

'

some one of the {servants, household) of Ast.


6v to (one) of the herdsmen
whom.
.

{-, . -).
().

P.

(that) he Will destroy you.

being with child and daily expecting

.
^
,
,
^,
-\)

'^ --^,
-.
,, '
THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

'

e?

153

eV

repoL

ttJ?

55

avSpa.

-,

'

,
.
-,
-^
6

"

,'

ei-

eiSov

iSeiv

'

^,

).

)(,

'-^^
}-

-, - ,
.
- etvat

)5.

do^o).
57.

,
^- .

63.

68.
72.

'

for lohat reason, not being accustomed (to

-\$ (-, ^-/


^
.
he stood over

seen, etc.

65.

179, II B.

appeared,
61.

.
.

65

'

ota

(like a

175

vision

sleep),

he {suddenly)

(that) which

would that I had not

153 b.

. P.

affwaipbv

-^

in

e.

.1

{to he

rb

astonish).

gasping and screaming.

gone carrying)

to

carry uioay.

tivos

could never have guessed whose child

it

really

civ

{-) was.

145,

154

,
,
,
. .
^^ ^
.
,
,
, ^,,
THE FIRST YEAB OF GREEK

-^
75

,',,

re

Se

^,

}.'

eh)

'

-SLKv.

-, --

6,

85

ohov

\oyov

oe

'

'

'

go

-,
-.
"

.
.

95
74.
75.

84.

86.
87.
88.
92.

93.
95.

--$

' ()

clothing, especially cloak, wrap.


(existing openly) prevailing unrepressed.

clasping.
(e^Tj)

115

c.

he said there would come.

-\().(-/).

Tedveos

^/
,
-,

to see (it).

Fut. Part, of Purpose, 175.

a still-born child.
you loill be caught

()

,-

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

.
,

,,^ ,

."

155

,-^8

, ) ,.

,
,
--,
.
^
. , ,.
^ - ,, ^ ,.

105

iy

'

'

no

"5

at

(').

97.
99.

and (noio)

TO

been buried).
11.5.

115

for the purpose of putting

101.

112.

in view of the present

Trpos

(i.e.

existing) circumstances.

to death.

the one

138.

bestowing {upon)., giving.

Future participle.

(child) lay buried (had

Aor. mid. of

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

156

.
^^,
'^
, ,-, -.
elvaL

I20
hrj

eivai,

elvai,

^
)
-,
^
- ., , -,
.
)
.
) ^
,
,
, , -$
8

125

30

Sr)

135

Srj

^,

'

"

121.

in

name, surname.

name

only.

\$.

124.

The King's Eye was

confidential adviser to the king,

.
^
)-

he assigned the
125.
128.

130

him.
131.
136.

office,

The

without ceremony,

to

subject

7-

opyy

5e

an added

in Persia the

yipas

and

name
to

of a

another

yipas (rd) a gift of honor.

merely

ws

Adverb, use of ace.

in

each one
is

().

KOpos.

^aaTiyCiv he handled

him roughly, whipping

rt.s soon as he tms released.


98.
anger just as he was, i.e. loithout delay, at once,

etc.

-,

,
-,

.
-,
.^

THE FIBST YEAR OF GREEK

Se

SeiKvvs

ISojv

Tou

157

eVet8r)

- --

" ,'8
, ''
".,' , "
*

'

;"

.8 -,^
,

ySacrtXea.

)(^

eti'at

'

8,
-

-,
^
,
-.
^,

150.

153.
154.

wishing

-.

159.
160.
160.

punish

the

150

55

'

hoy for the sake of the honor of Artemhares.

of themselves

refuse to obey, disobey.

^- -^

until.

es S

'

157.
tion, etc.

to

45

^.

-."

142.

14

xpbvos

es

dvayvwaLs {there) came to Astyages recogni-

eavTOv to correspond to himself, to be like his own.

too independent

(i.e.

for a slave's child to utter).

the lapse of time since the exposure.

158

, ,
, ,
-.
.
^
^
-,
, .
^>
.
-", . -,-,

TTejxxfjaL

-^<
inl

e/c-TrXayei?

65

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

), ," , ^ "

'"

.'^

70

elnev,

'

'

'

7/.

175

Sr)

-]

,
8

-^-

Si

'^

-^

Sr)

163.

(-)
-!

174.

iva-yKOLS

182.
186.
kill.

85 6

4-9

^'^^

162,

^^

"

amazed, dumfounded.

recovering himself.

-.
-. -.

(necessities) tortures.

Aorist participle.
use to the uttermost,

make

aicay with,

,
^
, " ^'
,
,
-. ^. -^
-^,.
THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

'

'

e'/c

159

evSov

eiSe

4.

//7

'^

19

.) )

'

/,

., -,
-

),
,^

^ ,,

"
,

,,

191

put
f.

to the test,

Sttws

179,

198.

following)
208.

i\ey6evos

189.

^^

effect.

be convicted

205

on cross-examination.

cross-examine.
(aor. subj.)

-!
.

^-

,^

-^

'

^,

igs

having

the anger

(jiven

commands

(=

c3).

156,

to this (i.e. the

which he felt toward him.

2IO

,
,
- ,', ,
---, .,?-,
THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

160

,. ,

TO

"

"

re

215

^)

']

220

, ,)

--

"

,,

225

230

^
.
),

tevat

-,

, ^.-

211.

it

215.

ev

216.

222.

224.

221

?
TO.

.-

/ca

6
Si

-,

had been repeated (iraXiWoy^w).


I did not bear it lightly.
=
4.
.

,
-

120

b.

(^).
yeyovus about thirteen years of age.
the things that

had happened.

-,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

rot?

161

,
,
,- ,
/cat

-.,

"
,
.
^
--

'ot

^.

,
?
,
, ^
-

"

235

240

/cat

6 245

.
-, iScov

/cat

'

o/c,
2?,.5.

' -.
-^

-.

^t

.,
6

Each guest had

a separate table,

250

which was placed

beside him.
the hands.

237.

he was made to eat the

In the famous feast of Thyestes,

flesh of his

own

children,

which was

when

set before

him by his kinsman Atreus, the same parts of the body, the head, hands,
and feet, were kept apart in a basket. See the Agamemnon of Aeschylus,
1587 ff. The reason for this is disclosed in the concluding paragraph of
the story.
240.

el

tQ.

if he

had enjoyed

the dinner,

at all.

;
:

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

162

II-III
After so ferociously wreaking vengeance upon the nobleman Harpagus,
Astyages sent the boy Cyrus to his parents in Persia, who received him

with great rejoicing, forasmuch as they had supposed him dead. In


course of time the lad grew to manhood, and conspired with Harpagus

and others to overthrow his grandfather. The


Astyages was deposed and Cyrus became king
;

sians,

with Persia in the ascendency.

ries of his

By

revolt
of the

was successful
Medes and Per-

vastly enlarging the

empire, Cyrus gained for himself the

title of

"The

boundaGreat."

His rule extended from 558-529 b.c.


About the time that Cyrus usurped the throne of Persia, Croesus, son

Lydia (c. 560 b.c), Avith his capital


kingdom as far east as the Halys river,
which was the westernmost boundary of the empire of Astyages, and
attacked and subjugated the Aeolian, Ionian, and Dorian Greek cities of
Asia Minor, except Miletus and from the tribute levied upon his subjects and from the gold mines of Asia Minor he became fabulously rich.

of Alyat'tes, succeeded to the rule of


at Sardis,

He extended

his

Upon

the

Astyages in 550, Croesus determined to attack Cyrus


this purpose conducted an expedition across
urged forward by the response of the oracle at Delphi

fall of

and the Persians, and for


the Halys river,
Kpoitros,

"

A\vv

-, ~/\

Halys, will destroy a great empire.

-\

CroesilS, if he cross the


Croesus believed that "the great

empire " would be that of Cyrtis, but as events proved he was himself
defeated and forced back into Sardis and there taken captive by Cyrus
(c.

546 B.C.).

"The

capture of Sardis Avas an eventuality of Avhich no one had

So great had been the wealth and might of Croesus,


none deemed his overthrow possible
and the sheer and sudden fall into nothingness made perhaps a
deeper and more abiding impression on the imagination of Hellas than
any other historical event. It was the most illustrious example that the
Greeks had ever witnessed of their favorite doctrine that the gods visit
seriously thought.

so dizzy the height of his power, that


;

with jealousy

men who

enjoy too great prosperity.

of Croesus himself crept into their sympathies

And

the personality

the admirer of Hellenic

and wisdom, the adorer of Hellenic gods, the generous giver out of
abundant wealth. Never more than for the memory of Croesus did
Greece put forth the power of that genius, which she possessed in such
full measure, of weaving round an event of history tales which have a
deep and touching import as lessons for the life of man." ^
art

his

J. B.

Bury, History of Greece,

I, p.

238.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


Some
the

arch.

and revolve about


monhowever, that Solon's archonship fell between

of these tales are told in selections II

visit of

163

and

III,

the Athenian lawgiver, Solon, to the court of the Lydian

In view of the

fact,

594 and 590 e.g., while Croesas did not ascend the throne until about

560 n.c, the story of the visit of Solon to Croesus is perhaps apocryphal,
although Solon appears not to have died until after Croesus' accession.

But whatever the element of truth in these tales, they admirably


the style of Herodotus and his belief in divine nemesis.

illustrate

? ^
.
,
,
II

reXevra,

e^-eSe^aro

,
%

eyeveTO

, , -.
.^
. 6

-\.

'^

--

"^ '

.
,
6 ---

1.

Alyattes was king of Lydia

4.

irSiv

10.
13.

\5,

^s

(c.

617-560 b.c).

113 d, 114.

being 35 years of age.

for

9.

to the

ovs

'

102.

payment of tribute.
rovs iv ry

Awptias,

cr^eSot'

'
),
\,
,
et^e

,
^
,.
",^,

ot

,
6

-LKVovvTaL

ocXXol

',

,.,^ ,
,
-.

'

25

-,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

164

'

'
35

"

-.'^ -.
-
6

19.

30.

ws

32.

\6yos

33.

35.
37.
38.

had

he

subdued).
26.

'

/.

'

futbjpct

aftencard on the third day.


fjv

made

ovoev

as he had opportunity.

woXvs frequent report.

-\

how through

love of knoioledge.

a desire has

come upon me.

e.rpecting, thinking.

not resorting to flattery.

(he

,
held

122 a.

having

.--" ,
THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

Trj

\\
\

-^

\4yeL

'

,
, -,
Xe)(^9ei'

"

Sr)

'

-/^

etvai

165

< -

"

fxev,

-,6

,
,
)
^,)
,
\\ ."
,
, -, 8
^
, .
eiSev

in-eyeveTo.

45

'

"

55

'

40.

41.
4.3.
,

-^
4

the reply

?3
-'^
.

TTjs

44.

48.

in the

()

on

56.

him being

loell off

(in the

means) of

,.

, ().
$ 17!), II

few miles northwest

of Athens.

the very spot where.

52.

perity) of Tellus.
(youv) certainly

he saw children born.

(to

midst of prosperity.
at Eleusis, a

iv

51.

54.

turning upon).

his City being prosperous.

him

(lit.,

(45) very frequent in Herodotus for

45.
life) to

(-).

severely, earnestly

,.

the

many

blessings (the great pros-

siipposing that he woxild at

receive second place (carry

away

any rate

the second prize).

livelihood sufficient (for their needs) teas (theirs).

166

65

,, .

\eyerai

lepeiav

eoei

yap

-^ ,

62.

iv

uipq.

\
,
-^

,
61.

--

^- - -,.

'

"

75

,,

rotdSe

^
,
^ .

ohe 6

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

.,

0%

to be

conveyed by team, be taken by carriage.

in season,

wpq.

being prevented (^excluded)

by the {lack of ) time.


63.

viro-5uvres.

69.

^eos,

the divine

but iu

power

1.

70

debs {i.e.

").

The masculine is used here

of the deity, regardless of the sex of the

to be

70.
72.

86,

().

67.

dead

{-).

tohat children she

had obtained,

of

god in question.
i.e.

that she

had

been blessed with such children


74.

Kleobis,
75.

KXeo^et she prayed the goddess to give to

etc.

her, i.e. the goddess.

,, ,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

^,

oovvai

)(,

/ -,
-.

re

167

'

",
^
,
,^ '/, , . , -^
iv

."
^

Srj

'

'

"^ ^^
8$

avSpcov

"

^,

'

"

"

ovSl

,--\8

-.
)(
)

{-,)

80.

^
.

-,
6

TO.

rrjs

eaLo>s

the second place {in point)

fortune.
85.
87.

has been cast aside

^pwT$s

95

The great temple and the precinct of Hera near Argos was one
most famous centres of her worship in Greece.
83.

go

of the

of good-

().

you ask me (a man) who knoios

the

divine nature, etc.

').

(rrjs
tQ
Herodotus makes Solon first reckon a year as having 360 days
(70 X 360 = 25,200). He then adds an intercalary month
irdv) in order to make the year corHepov
each second year

89.

93

$)

iv

ff.

(^

--

^
,^
.

168

,.

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

8 at

Seof,

'^.

'

Oe

^,
^
, ,

- -./
, -

,
^
.
^,

''

105

,.- ^
6

'.

-.'

^
- -
6

4s
respond with the seasons (' ai
This
falling at the 'proper time).
that the seasons may
makes 35 extra months in 70 years, and an average of 375 days in each
In this reckoning Herodotus is of course in error.
year.

ry

102.
102.
104.
107.

erepq,

the one (lay

to the Other.

altogether, loholly.

TO

tmtil

human

I learn

life is all

uncertainty

that you have ended your life in

prosperity.
109.
aorist.

he overturns them root and branch.

Gnomic

136.

111.

07

113.

/Lie^-eis

TrotijffayueiOs

ovSevos

giving up, ignoring

holding him (to be) of no account.

(-,

98).

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

169

,^,
,.
III

'

eXa/3e

iavTov eivau

yap

-), 6

-evhovTL

aXrjdeiav

,
8 ),

,
"^ .
-^ ,-,
,
yap

(jjv

'

".

'

koyov

^ ,-,

-).

3.
7.

11.

12.
13.

15.
18.

5-? (-\\).
as one

was

---

may

conjecture.

172, g.

disabled, ivas blighted

(-).

(/3).

(i^-eyeipw).

ayerai

he got

(i.e.

brought home) a wife.

although he

lest

(i.e. Aty.^)

was accustomed,

something hanging (on the walls),

etc.

etc.

? ,
. -\

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

170

)(

20

'

Iv X^pcrl

-LKveLTaL

25

yevea

, ,-.

,
3 '

)(,

^
,
5,<

'

'

"'.

,^
6

"'^,,

-,,
;

^
- -' ^ -,,
)

"

" 6

"^,
."
," ^^

'

'

35

"

"

20.

'
^

''

^]

his son being occupied with the

marriage

(having the marriage in hand for him).


21.

who was a

Victim of a calamity,

i.e.

who

loas

guilty of murder.

The murderer was


25.
eSeiro, \. he sought purification.
under a ban, and could not enter again into social relations until he had
been purified by some one who took pity upon him. The purification
consisted in the main in the ceremony of sprinkling the blood of a pig on
the hands and head of the guilty person.
33. The name Adrastus means
The Unescapable.
:

34.

i-f\avo

37.

ws

38.

05

d7il'en into exile

to friends.

().

130. c.

Cf. 40, iv

(-).

yoxi loill

().

need (lack).

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

.^^

^ .
^\ ^ .' ^-.
\ . - ,, )(^-.
-

iv

Statrat'

iv

iv

171

'

yiyverai.

-- ,
-, epya

'

in

'

oijSev,

'

"

'

-\\
."
,

-,

'

."

-^fJv,

as lightly as possible.

39.

05 a monster of a boar.

43.

epya works.,

44.

i-iroiovu

58.

ws

62.

55

,
,^--.

-42.

^. -

"

'

-,

45

i.e.

cidtivated fields.

would (were wont

they

to) do.

135.

as zealously as possible.
.

C. refusing

(saying^ no

^), etc.

- ".

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

172

Trporepov

65

re

, - -^.
avTov 6

^,.

aypa<;

e;5(t9,

TLvd

--;
ayopav

rtcrt

^ ^

.
-.
,

eivai,

avhpX

'

,)

"

-,

hi
85

" ," ,

75

.''

-6

64.

es

^,

Sia

"

yap
oxJjlv

-.
-,
it

was

wars and on hunting expeditions


Heretofore has it been permitted us to
to enjoy the noblest reputation.
enjoy the fairest and noblest reputation through going, etc.
67.
exets you have shut out, have excluded.
formerly permitted us

me) going

(i.e.

-.

to

7-?5
=

68.

82.

ei TTws

during
85

my

ff.

somehov I might

if

be able.

ttjs

$^

lifetime.

-/-

it is

pardonable for you,

etc.

,^.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

,
^ ^^,. ^.
^ ^}
. ,
^. ^
crot ISovtl y' oxjiiv

etjott

nepl

173

e/xe

'

top

St/cato?

'

rjv

go

'

.
' .,-,^ .^
),
," ?
-

'..

],

,,

/cat

,
,

95

tei^at

'

'^,

],
{,

"

-^-

,,
oSov

'

" *1

^
/."

105

"

You say

to say.

89.

that the

dream

said, etc.

as having been conquered, inasmuch as I have been

96.

overpersuaded.
106.
108.

as he sets out, etc.

dWws

I would not

go, etc.

ya (otherwise) under other circumstances

}^\>^

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

174

^,
,
-- -",,
, ,
.
^ -'
,. ^^ --

no dvSpa

/catov

-. {
,
)
--.^'
-^
^
. ,
levai,

ev

^^
yap

Se,

hei

aya-

TTOieiv

115

'

veal' tat

'

120

eg

-).

Srj

rvy^ai/et

125

yyv

.
-

hvooylo

payvo
115.

expect

SO far as his guardian is concerned, so far as depends


118.

veaviais re

and dogs.
123.

of hitting, missiiig, etc.


126.
129.
tressed,

Sr)

yyov.

'

30

Srj

--/$

115

unharmed

on his guardian.

{equipped with) attended by


waiBos.

men

Genitive with. verbS

e.

ayyeXQv, futVLre -paruciTple oi purpose.

(thrown

together in

trouble, confuse, etc.

175.
confusion) greatly

dis-

, ,
^
,
,
,
\
.
- -..
,
-,,.-TEE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

Ty

eVaXet

eKokei 8e

eTaipeiov,

re

'

-^^

peiov

35

140

'

'

"^ -,
,
-, ^
"

^,

175

145

^,

^, ,
Slktjv,

-,

?,

150

."

"ASpa-

'

155
133.

^eovs

134.

di)

it

cared for the murderer.

, \.

he had found.

138.

150.

179, II

(he escaped notice feeding) he

137.

ing

()

he had suffered
Zeus (God) of the hearth.

et

had without knoiih

176 c.
179, II B.

except so far as

you wrought

it,

etc.

176

,,.-,
^
- -THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK
eVetS^

iyevero

eivaL,

^,

(quiet

156.

from men)

xohen quiet prevailed

about the tomb.


157.

-'-6($

(recognizing with himself) being conscious,

believing.

158.

he knew.

95.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

177

I EXERCISES

1.

For additional
baa,
;

To accompany Lesson II)

pronunciation

drill in

baa !

where ?

NO!
I too,

bow-woio
iro

ircus

whither ?

yes

how ?

ov no !

1.

\alp rejoice! good- morning


ttcos

you

you.

et ego.

too, et tu.

hail! farewell!

how are you (for me)

' / am ill.
/ am well,
/ am learning, I understand,
am not, etc.
I do not
I knoiv.
/ am speaking (/ speak^ Greek.

I
know.

.^

Each pupil should make


of all the

classifying

words

at this poiat a complete list


Lessons I-II and the exercise above,

in

them according

mihi,

i.e. I

not, ordinarily

am

to accentuation

interested in your condition.

has no accent, but attaches

and arranging
120.

itself in

pronunciation

word that follows. But when it stands alone (in which case it
means 7io!), and when it is the final word in its clause or sentence, it
receives an acute accent
Why ? See further f.
In ancient Greece it was not the custom to shake the head as we do
to indicate denial or refusal, but to throw it up and backwards,
and
especially
should therefore be accompanied by a toss of the head.
to the

THE FIE ST TEAR OF GREEK

1(8

each group in alphabetical order.

compared and kept


are as follows

may

lists

be

The groups

acute accent

a) on ultima:

b) on penult:
c)

These
and drill.

Words with

I.

for reference

KaX6s beautiful.

had.

^^

zvisdom.

on antepenult:
a) penult and ultima both short

book.

6VTpos

(^ w w)

second,

) penult long, ultima short


Words with

II.

circumflex

a) on ultima: uo^SiS wisely

ircos

b) on penult (ultima short)

( _ w).

cts-

5.

2.

accompany Lesson III)

The Greek language has been spoken


for thousands of years,

lions of people.

to
is

But

aud

is still

as a living tongue
spoken by many mil-

of course the ancient Attic dialect,

which these lessons and exercises are an introduction,


no longer employed in this way. In learning the Attic

dialect,

however, one should constantly emphasize phrases

rather than isolated words.


cise, therefore,

In the accompanying exer-

master each of the type-sentences, copying

and repeating aloud each of the phrases invoh^ed until it


then write the other
veritably becomes a living phrase
sentences in conformity with the model, and repeat each
;

one aloud
I.

many

times.

"

understand, you do not.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

5, -

09

'

understands, the sister does

know, you do

I.

are not.
(o

'

am

not.

3.

5.

am

103 b)

The

2.

II.

not.

brother

{,),^),
I

am

not.

is

writing

my

reading

You

4.

you

brother

are writing, I

speaks Greek, the brother does

sister

^,

not.

You understand, I do
'
The

7iot.

not.

179

'

One understands,

the other

does not.

One

6.
ing,"

writing, the other

is

etc.

8.

is

not.

One speaks Greek,

(^ol8v'), etc.

III.

7.

etc.

9,

'

One is readOne knows

have

book,

you

have not.
10.

have a friend, you have not.


11. I have roses
12. You have a large book, I a small (one)

( 100), etc.

(^^.
IV.

;;

Have

Have you a book ?

YOU a

or

book?

YOU

Have

Ans.

too

Ans.
a book?

Ans.

14. Have YOU


Have you a friend?
Yes.
15. Have YOU too beautiful roses?
I too.
17. I have both (/cat) a
Have you a brother?

13.

roses?
16.

brother and
books.

V.

(/cai)

$
'

We

18.

sister.

There

There

is

is

have roses and

no one wise.

nothing

evil.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

180
19.

There

There

24.
26.

one

no

is

dear.

21.

bad.

20.

better.

nothing

is

beautiful.

22.

23.

worse.

25.

large.

beautiful.

useful.

-)

3.

{
(^

this exercise

proceed as in Exercise II)

Enclitics, 10 (the four accentual types).

()

amicus sum.
amicus

es.

amicus

est.

amici sumus.
amici

II

'.

Repeat with

.
6.^

fool.

3.

estis.

6()

amici sunt.

III

IV

)
^
)
^

(^,
(^,
().
(^,
.
(^,
(^., ), ..
(^, 8~) ()
1.

4.

"
,

Grreek (PI.

clpii.

1.

"><).

f(hid of horses (tTTTro?).

fond of
7.

2.

books.

foolish, a

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

.
'

kyui

You

8.

a)

I.

"ycwp-yos

are a philosopher, I

farmers are wise, we are not.

farmer

?,

'

am

b)

a farmer.

Fond

10.

//) are wise, some (0?

The

9.

Some

11.

beautiful.

'

of horses is the

fond of books, the physician.

181

The

12.

(04

roses are

beautiful, the trees are not.

How

II.

How

13.

()

beautiful

beautiful the

book

is

the trees are

How

17.

know

do not

does not know.

do not,

We

25.

(T(p

the

the farmer

know.

b)

This (one)

19,

He knows that he
know that he knows.

does not

that you know.

that

we

23.

You

are wise.

philosophers.

^^^ brother himself.

Strictly these differ slightly in emphasis.

BROTHER

that

tall

the (self)same brother.

'

()

How

-)

4.

He

How

20.

know
know that we are

do not

is

() (^
We

know

21.

etc.

small

is !

14.

15.

that I know.

he knows.

21.

(sm^.)

are!

How

/ know

(olhev) that

You

the roses are

fond of horses

knows
22.*

16.

a)

III.

18.

((^)

hevhpd)

trees

beautiful the rose

himself; the latter, The brother

The former means The

HIMSELF.

Repeat with :

1.

OF GREEK

FEBST

182

2.

8.

is handsome.
5.
The same physician is wise.
7. The father
6. The same f^meis are fond of horses.
himself is wise.
8. The same (one) is both wise and

4.

good.
II.

^Lol

a) ovTs
It seem o

to

JIE.

d)

also.

to

.
^

b)

It teem so to me.

10.
to
9. It seeuKS so to the same physician.
11.
to the philosopher
the physicians themselves.
13. Does it
12.
to the same slaves.
himself.

seem so to the
in. a) SOS

Give me the book.

TO

|MH.

Gfive the hook to

TO
14.

Yes

l|rother him.self ?

15. To the
To me myself give

Give the books to the same brother.

brother himself give the rose.

the roees.

17.

IV. a)

;
18.

b)

ME.

Am

16.

Give them to me.

What am I to give yoii ?


6m
To whom am I to give the hookf
I to give

you the same

give you the book itself ?

to the farmer?

Am

20.
to the

21.

rose
I

b)

19.

Am

I to

to give the books

same friend?

22.

to the same wise physician ?

V.
23.

Call the

cian himself.
26.

the brother.

same brothers.

24.

the physi-

the philosophers themselves.

25.

the fools.

1 writs, Iftas,

foie

*o

% coBBonaiit.

{ef.

*rm)^

is

often ivmoaiieed and wrinen

be-

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

'

5.
(Tip

a)

^.(

5;

TTcos

b)

am ill, you are well.


am not.
3.
What
What are these saying ?

well,

stand.
8.

6.

We

are

a)

'.

, May

10.

May we

we

these rejoice.

not.
III.

16.

a)

'.

b)

c)

11. May we be
13. May
May you not rejoice.
May these rejoice, but not you

14.

May the farmers rejoice, the physicians


May this (one) consider the \vise rich.

.
writing

b)
these

22.

.
you.

d)

c)

18.

Be (ye)

learn-

etc,

20.

Do

etc.

23.

Do

not

Let him not be urging,

etc.

Let the brother not,

a)

not he

not
Let these not consider the

21.

be urging these things.

Do
c)

(thiiigs).

Be (thou) speaking Greek.


19. Be (ye) not,

wise rich.

tell

5.

12.

consider the wise rich.

to

are

saying

he telling {%aying^ nothing.

ing these things.

IV.

you

are

e)

15.

{do not keep')

17.

These {ovtol

(rt)

-)

be writing nothing.

learning nothing.

-).

2.

c)

They do not under7. We, etc.


They understand perfectly.
telling you nothing.
9.
You (j9?.) are

reading nothing.
II.

d)

I.

4.

-)

understand perfectly.

183

24.

b)

' ' /

cannot

have nothing
tell

{say), non

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

184

habeo dicere.

We

25.

e)

irplv

before telling,

urge (are commanding) you to be learning


26. These are urging us, etc.
27.

these things.

not to be learning,
things.

have nothing to

have nothing to

Xe^eiv

Can he

tell

us this

the physician.

;')

you.

These

30.

Before telling

34.

me

me

this ?

etc.?

this, call

the same physician.

35.

fore writing this, give

Be-

36.

the books.

(Lesson VII)

6.

I.

tell

Can you tell me


32. Can you (^pl),

31.

us.

tell

(9
33.

not to be writing these

28.

etc.

We

29.

so.

it is

it is

as

follows.

You

I.

mother

are well.

am

2.

You

are

My

3.

ill.

It is not so.

(say

'

the ')

5.

It is not

Not the farmer, but the physician is fond


Not the sister, but the brother is fond
Not the books, but the roses are beautiful.

of horses.

is ill, I

well.

4.

as follows.
II.
ii\Li

I am

not

ov

but.

but foolish.

noli wise.,

of horses.

6.
7.
8.

handsome, but wise


but as follows.
III.

the philosopher.

is

not only

(the
11.
1

The man

When

is

It is

man}

Not

not

so,

but also.

not only handsome, but also rich.

accompanied by an adverb,

self) be, fare.

10.

9.

is

intransitive

{have one-

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

We

12.

Do

14.

book

Tlie

13.

are, etc.

also beautiful.

these things, but also learning (them).i

I.

be writing

(Lesson VIII)

7.

let

not only large, but

is

not only

185

us be going,

Let us be writing this.


3. Let us not, etc.

Let us be reading the


Let us not be going.
Let us be learning these things.
6. Let us not, etc.

I.

book.
5.

II.

What

we

are

we

to be reading

be learning

lav

III.

4.

What mn I to

7.

2.

What am

9.

I, etc. ?

if

it

lav

he so.

if we have not money.


11.

If

we

be learning these things.

What

8.

you?

to tell the physician

give

are

'
10.

12.

to

not,

If

()

have money, I shall have


friends.
14. If you have money, you will have (e|ei9) friends.
15. If these, etc., they will have
friends.
16. If
they have not money, they will not have friends.
17. If
13.

etc.

we,

If I

etc.

IV.
18.

20.

dv

We

should speak Greek.

23.

We should

22.

dv

Would you speak Greek?

learning the lesson


this.

()

19.

We should

21.

Would you

be learning the lesson.

Omit the word

not be

should (might) be writing

would not be learning anything (Gk. ovhkv


1

not, etc.

for

'

them.''

).

24.

These

V.

25.

if

if

should be

it

el

so.

we should not have money.

If it

should not be

26.

so.

If

you should not be

we should be learning these


should
have money, we should have
we
27.

well.
If

28.

things.

If

friends.

should have friends, they would have money.

29.

If these

30.

They would

rejoice.

^^
^\^

-\
-$

We

enjoy

reading

writing these

2.

a)

II.

b)

I shall

6.

make you

these things.

make
11.

you vriting.

reading the book.


see

you

(j^?.)

III.

a)

(^through tvriting}

12.

This (one) will

9.

He

10.

see

learning

7.

my

reading.

15.

By

these {exercises}

learn

is

ace. sing.

The

ace. pi. is

14. I

16.

many

(PL 7/3^9.)
1

not, etc.

brothers

('i/i^')

learning the lesson.

13.

writing.

not, etc.
--i"

stop reading.

us stop writing these things.

I see

5.

I shall make you stop writing.^


I see you reading.

stealing.

8.

The one
These enjoy
4.

enjoys reading, the other (does) not.


stealing.

enjoy reading,
etc.

tiot,

learning the lesson

3.

do

--

Do you

1.

things

^j<v'^

^^"^

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

186

-^^.

do

writing

(things').

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

b)

I believe

have) friends^

By

17.

you

that

Having

{if

treasures.

many things.
18.
Having friends, we believe that we have

reading this he learns

19.

treasures.

20.

3^ou

Though they have

22.

I have

187

they

21.

(say 'having'') friends, these do

not believe, etc.

(Lesson X)

,
.
, ..
,
,
,
,.
.
,.
9.

Repeat Exercise IV, substituting for

'05,

bride,

-.^

10.

(Lesson XI)

Repeat Exercise IV, substituting as in the preceding


and in the same order the following vords

.
$

exercise

See
pi.

athlete.

house-servant.
poet.

11.

.
.

(Lesson XIII)

'

this book.

these hooks.

'

oii.

179, I a.

2 yvv-f) is

Nom.

.
,
.

step-mother.

an irregular noun of the third declension


Ace. pi. 'yvvaiKaz. 39.

//,

Dat. sing,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

188

Repeat, substituting KLV0 (-a) for

How

I.

tiful, this

large.

beautiful this rose

(one)

4.

is

not.

3.

This book

2. This rose is beauis


These roses are small these
!

That book is larger than


letes are handsomer
5.

(?)

wreath

(/

8.

to those poets.

II.

6.

than those.

Stephen) to

Of.

that (one).

These ath7. Give the


this

to these girls.

athlete.

Call

10.

these philosophers themselves.

11.

the physician s book,

TO

this rose.

9.

;
,
$,

these sisters.

(^^ than

larger

is

(raSe).

my

books,

),

(or 1

Come, give me, if you are

ivilling

(or if you please),

etc.

Give my book,
Give her her (' the

12.
13.

wreath.

poet's

(things).

15.

please,

teach

will

the farmer's

20.

you

sister.

the

14.

your

sister

these

the

17.

{').

wife

this

to

brother's book.

your brothers.
18. Teach ME.

16.

servants.

poet's

if
')

19.

us.

the

21.

farmer himself.

(Lesson XIV)

12.
1
it

if

be necessary,
1.

If I

am

wise.

,,
2.

If I

be wise,

it is

el

etc.

If

you are

if

it

wise.

If I

3.

Repeat, substituting for

plural forms and

necessary,

lov

If

the words
teacher.

61,

he

c.

is

wise, etc.

,,

should be wise,

making each

if

should be necessary.

etc.

Repeat, using

clause negative.

{ ).')

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


speaking the truth

If I ain

1.

you are speaking the


is

truth.

189
If

2.

If the pupil (o

3.

speaking the truth.


4. If I be speaking the truth,
5.
If I should be speaking the truth, etc.

etc.

Repeat

is

in the plural

What

1.

better in

is

nothing, etc.

a good friend

3.

in

life

than good health

What

poet says that (Xeyei otl)


Is

6.

ills.

'

() -

b)

(Lesson

;;

many

bless-

XV)

Is he speaking (the) truth?


;

He

c)
is

is

13.

a)

There

2.

better possession

the tongue not the cause also of

ings (a<yaeS)v)

I.

negative form.

is there than
no possession, etc.
5. The
the tongue is the cause of many

There

4.

and

Is he not, etc.
is

speaking (the) truths

not

he ?

Are you speaking the truth

I.

etc. ?

3.

You

10.

'they.'

are not, etc.

Is the

Greek

labors

we could

12.

He

is

man

.
II.

15-18.
19-22.
repeat.

is

'

he

13.

Repeat a) with
must learn,

we

By

Change the pronoun

little

14.

c)

must

must
to

By

/ must

, ,)
or

b)

not,

Repeat with we,'


11. Is he npt a

not achieve greatness, could

a)

this.

Greek?

Are you

2.

4-9.

not a Greek,

no means.

say

do,

believe.

(or

and

THE

190

FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

-,
,

Repeat b) with kcXcuciv,

23-25.

.
.

26-29.

III.

Repeat

c),

changing

30-41.

42-57.
subject to

ivhat(ever) should he hurtful.

what(^ever^

(may^

be hurtful.

.
,.

|6.

Repeat the clauses under a) with


Repeat the sentences under b), changing the
J,

you, this

(one')., these.

14.

OS

(Lesson XVI)
Whomever) does such

iroici,

(things).,

.
,,
,
, .

I hate.
dv
<iv

.,

5-9.

II.

10-25.

you (ye),

.). ,

to
and making the verbs
Repeat in negative form.

Repeat, changing

plural.

dv

that which is hurtful,

^
^
,, ..
6

a)

1-4.

.$,

b)

I.

to

7,

(or

dv

Repeat, changing the subject to the

these.

athlete.,

we,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

in.

191

,.
Repeat, changing the subject to we, you,

26-29.

farmer, these same

15.

05

this

girls.

(Lesson XVII)

my, mine, mens.

6$

your,

yours, tuus.

our, noster.

05

your, vester.

6$

a brother of

a comrade of

yours.

mine.

my
b

MY brother.

09
Change

to

Your

1.

friend
5.

brother is wise

Your father

2.
is

is

your

brothers.

comrades.

8.

10.

()
Do

12.

Do

other

To one

()

not be doing such things!

16.

we

to be

Whom

doing
are

we

15.

to love

my

Do

17.

Let

13.

14.

are

Whom

this!

not hate

sister.

()

our

book, to the

Be doing

9.

(^).

Whom

brothers.

7.

my

11.

Our

3.

my

Call

sisters.

give

the brother's (book).

brother desire such things, but not

are

is not.

4.

my

not desire such things

().
), beau-

(omit

sister

a poet, mine

6.

com-

and repeat;

to

and

a teacher, yours a farmer.

my

Call

YO UR

eraipos
rade.

(^)

repeat each with

tiful.

GOM-

your

RADE.

BROTHER.

we

are

me

What

to hate

we

my
?

to be

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

192
teaching

Be teaching me.

18.

my

19.

slave.

our slaves.

20.

22. May
Let us not be doing these things.
do such things.
23. May this (one)
24. May these never, etc.
25. If I should
never, etc.
learn this lesson.
do such things, I should never
21.

never

(/^)

(/)

26.

you, etc.

If

If we, etc.

27.

28.

these girls,

If

etc.

(Lesson XVIII)

16.

Repeat Exercise XI, substituting

Master the following prepositional phrases


from me.

Trap'

hy

tvol^

me., at

house.,

hy you^ etc.

chez moi.
Trap'

,,
. to me.

Repeat with

to

..,

\.

Tivos

on what account ?

why?
instead of

bia

this.

; on what account? why?

La TO

on

this account.

., .,

'
'

tions).

with these.
with you.
contrary

to

concerning

to

this.

before this.

irpo

in view of this,

irpos

according

.,

ivith us.

ircpl

TovTots on these (^condi-

you.

the law.

on this account.
Iirl

froin you.

irapd

my

for

wherefore.
irpos tovtois in addition to

the law.

TovTO,

these (things^.

7.
"

irpos

hy the gods

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


17.

(Lesson XIX)

Master the following phrases


;

where pray f

TTS>sbr\;

'V

Tivos

come now/

on

I.

THESE (con-

to

ME.

(usually written evye^.

05

-ye

THIS account.

on

LS

ditions').

193

veri/ wise.

VER

wise.

\ and

much

tainly

the

cer-

very many.

greatest.

5.

yi

VERY many.

and

"ye

certainly

"

hk

Repeat these phrases, substituting plural forms


1)

Masc:

oi

2)

Fem.

oStos

- .

. .
18.

-.
,
^

(See

(Lesson XXI)

174.)

Observe that in these two words the accent


ye,

ye.

is

recessive.

Contrast

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

194

The one who wishes

1.

to be rich.

wishes to be becoming wise

(^

one who understands these (matters).


phrases 1) with the negative
1) to

the

plural,

4.

Repeat
with
2)

5-12.

learning this lesson.

is

2) to

the

The one who


3.
The
The one who

2.

yiyveadai).

each

these

of

13-48. Change

feminine (both sing, and

and repeat.

pi.)

The one wishes to be rich, the other (does) not.


You wish to become wise, we (do) not. 3. We delight in friends, you (do) not.
4. If we delight in
friends, we shall have friends.
5. If you, etc.
6. The
one who does not delisfht in friends does not have friends.
1.

2.

(Lesson XXII)

19.

What

pray are we to be replying? 2. Let us be


we do not know. 3. Do not be making this reply (say 5e replying this'').
4.
Let one be
replying that he does not knoAV, let the other be making
no reply (say be replying nothing ").
5. If we be making
1.

replying that Qort^

'

'

this reply, shall

we

be telling the truth?

6.

If

you, etc.

7.
8. If we should be making this reply,
should we be telling the truth ? 9. If he should, etc. ?

If these, etc. ?

10.

If I should, etc. ?

12.

May

11.

We

have nothing to
rich, what must we do ?
friends.
17. In friends
18. Let the one delight in
14.

19.

If these poets should, etc. ?

you be making no reply.

Are we

reply.
16.

take

May

13.
15.

If

May ve
delight,

these, etc.

we wish

not in books.

horses, the other in books.

to delight in friends or in horses


20.

to be

delight in good

Are we

to reply that

we know

or that

THE FIRST FEAR OF GREEK


we do not know
reply that
22.

^)

on

195

Am

21.

I to

delight in a good friend or in a good horse

might make

this reply.

we

this reply, should

should not

make

By no means.

24.

We

23.

(Lesson XXIII)

20.

Review Exercises 16-17.


a) TovTO irepl

I.

b)

This

great value (or importance or worth)

consider of

hold in high esteem.


of greater value

TrXeiovos

(importance'), hold in higher esteem.

c) TOVTO

of greatest value

(importance), hold in highest esteem.

Repeat each of these sentences, conjugating the verb in

a) in the present indicative; in b) in the future indicative

in c) in the optative of the progressive action-stem.

Repeat, substituting the verb

(in

which case

the meanings given above remain unchanged).

Repeat, substituting in a) Trcpl


(importance)

in b) ircpl

c) TTcpl
1.

of

Friends

^).

2.

we

5.

May

7.

you,

'-

etc.

these
8.

etc.

May you
11.

We

he

3.

6.

worth
;

money

ought,

(Lesson

May

(pi.).

9.

in

(^

4.

consider, etc.

Do

thou, etc.

etc.

XXIV)

What are we doing? 2. What


What are we to be doing ? 4. Be

1.

little

worth, etc.

consider of greater worth than

21.

3.

of

less

least, etc.

you

Let these,

10.

of

shall

we do?

doing nothing.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

196

Be calling your (say

5.

them.

7.

Vie

9.

will call

me ?

Consider

13.

Some

12.

me happy

you happy.
These friends,

know.

me

calling

calling

11.

Who

you, some will not.

call

(^).

I shall

you

19.

am

6.

are calling them.

14.

shall

con-

poet,

etc.

I shall

not

The

16.

etc.

etc.

Some things

18.

is

will

We,

15.

We

8.

Who

10.

sider
17.

them.

I shall call

shall, etc.

the ') brothers.

'

know, some things

we
To-morrow
20.

21.

become
24. We should be becoming wise.
23. We, etc.
wise.
26. If any one ask
25. May we be becoming wise.
me about this, what shall I reply
?
?
these
28.
you
)? 27.

these same

22.

farmers.

shall

()

We

29.

(-,-

we think we understand
The one is fleeing, the other standsThe one will flee, the other will stand-

shall reply that (ort)


30.

these (things).
31.

firm (/AeWi).
firm.

(Lesson XXVI).

22.

,
,

Repeat the phrases with


ing for
pi.) of

.,

-,

iraXs,

the Greeks.

the man.

Am

themselves.

3.

man ?
are we

to the
to be

making

these

men

".

the mother.

Do

2.

to give the

not keep calling


the mothers

same

boys themselves

to the
5.

gift to the old


4.

What

reply

to the Greeks ?
mother ?
boy has no possession more

precious than a mother (say 'there


6.

"Ycpiav,

the same fathers.

the same boy.

to

the father.

Call the boy.

1.

(Exercise 16), substitut-

the appropriate forms (both sing, and

is

for a

hoy^' etc.).

mother has no possession more precious than a boy.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


For boys are anchors of a mother's

7.

a mother

life

197

(say

'

of

life

for

')

23.

(Lesson XXVII)

Review Exercises 8 and 18, and study carefully the


in 174 and 176.

examples cited

In the following sentences use the verb


1-4,

in 5-8,

in 9-12.

The

1.

health

is

the best (thing) for a man.

3.

^.

man's character is known from (his) speech.


value nothing niore highly than justice (^
I

5.

wise.
I

9.

10.

8.

hear

that

we

11.

the same
you making

saying

these will hear


12.

May we

(things).
this

same

hear you reply-

ing to the physician that you are well.

24.

Review Exercise
1.

My ('')

'

(Lesson

XXIX)

13.

father always prevents

me from doing

2. Does ^our
whatever I wish.
from doing whatever you wish ?
3. Fathers always prevent their (' the ') children from
doing whatever they wish.
4. Whenever
these
children may wish to be reading something, their father

(say

be

doing'}

father prevent

you

(}

will prevent (them).

5.

If these be able,

vent us from doing whatever we

may

wish.

they will pre6.

vji_

We

(}

you always

To-morrow

reply.

4.

we are foolish. 6. We know that we


knows that he is foolish is
7. Whoever
We know that we are foolish, but t/ou are wise.

know

are wise.

i),

gods, as the philosopher says, are mortal men.

To have

2.

in

followed by the genitive ( 115,

For these

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

198

men do

not wish us to be as happy as possible.

they happen not to love us.

you?

to

By

9.

me

Zeus, to

Does

8.

XXX)

(Lesson

Repeat the phrases with


ing for

(Exercise 16), substitut-

,, ., the appropriate forms of

and pL),
(Gen.

sing,

(Gen.

/?).

I.

For

7.

not seem so also

also.

,
25.

it

tis

(both

?!),

What do you

I.

we

4.

(things)

these

desire

6.

he

2.

these

We

desire

5.

3.

Are we

nothing.

to desire

Let us

7.

desire nothing.
II.

For how much are you


are you asking for etc. ?

What

offering to sell these (things^

9. How
8. How much do you ask for this horse ?
much is the farmer asking for this chariot ?
10. For
how much do the gods sell to us all the blessings of life ?
'

1.

Who

?) you
you

are

we

8.

you
3.

2.

Whose

the child")!

What

5.

are

are
are.

do not know vho (rt? or


you (say of whom

child are

Whose

4.

we to be replying ?
making .this reply ?
are we to be calling ?

are

to be

Whom

permit to do whatever he wishes


26.
1.

Know

(Lesson

QyvSiOC) thyself

not love thyself

Do

4.
1

Ace.

'

children?

are these
6.

.7.
9.

On what account
To whom, etc. ?

Whom

do these

XXXI)
2.

Love

^>^
thyself

8.

Do

not love thyself too-much

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


(Xidv^

5.

199

The one who loves himself too much does


If we love ourselves too much,
6.

not have friends.

we

shall not

have friends.

we

8.

11.

What am

7.

these

9.

Don't touch this!


12.
to touch these (things).

touching

10.

Touch

My

Qthe') mother
permits me
13. Do not touch
the chariot
14. Does your father permit you to govern
the mule-team?
15. By no means, for he thinks more
of the slaves than of me, his ('') son.
16. In the
day-time
these attendants rule me
at night ^
(jjVKTo^ 8e) my mother rules me.
this!

(^
27.

What was

1.

we
eating

(Lesson
saying

these

XXXIV)
you

this slave

?
?

we

Whom

2.

was

3.

?
you
w^e
I was eating nothing.

ruling

What was
you

We

were
was preventing
you from doing these (things) ?
7.
No one was preventing us from making this reply.
8. We were becoming wise, you were not.
9. Why was the dog in
the manger (say the in manger dog ') not permitting the
horse to eat ?
10. The horse was eating the barley (say
of the harley'^, for the dog was not able to prevent (it).
11.
Who was dying?
12.
We were not dying.
13. We were not replying.
14. We thought
we were dying.
(jt?Z.)

1.

neither eating nor drinking.

6.

5.

Who

'

{}

.28.

(Lesson
down

XXXVI)

(along') the road.

near the postern-gate.


1

See 119.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

200

according

TO

to

Plato.

the opposite city-wall.

in a position opposite the

v
wall.

ls TO

wall.

to

a position opposite the

from a

the wall.

Make an intensive study of


1-15 (Lesson XXXV), preparatory
based upon this passage.

is

out.
I am going away.
3. We, etc.
4.
You were, etc.
time for me to be going away

for

6.

these

you

in

10.

lines

toward.

in.

These,

etc.

Come

out

5.

It

-).

(^

for us

7.

Come

9.

<;.,

irepl

to a dictation exercise

1.
2.

position opposite

8.

11.

Ap-

out.
away.
Let us be going.
13. I was going away.
in.
toward.

14. We were, etc.


toward.
in.
out.
16. We were absent, you were going
15. These, etc.

proach

12.

away.

29.
1

What was I doing ?


these

We

(Lesson

2.

Tliese boys

and regarding us (say

You

you
?
was not hesitating.
.

'

XXXVII)

3.

He

we
You

kept turning around

turning around he was frequently

5. These boys, etc.


etc.
7.
My
For they were phiinly eager to approach.
father was wont to regard (say was regarding') the slaves
as of more value than us his sons.

regarding'').

4.

kept,

6.

'

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

am

1.

I was saying that I was


more beautiful than you.
were saying that we were more beautiful than
6. These
5.
What is smaller than this book ?

wiser than you.

wiser than you.

We

4.

you.

XXXIX)

(Lesson

30.

We

3.

2.

are

books are smaller, these larger.


angles

201

is

the larger

Which

8.

is

7.

Which

the largest

of

these

Which

9.

{)

10. I was hesitatthe happier ?


which of these men was the worse.
11. This (one) they were wont to consider (say 'they
were considering^) the worse.
12. My mother was wont

of these

same boys

ing to ask

me

hold

to
13.

There

is

is

higher

in

31.

What

1.

etc. ?

are

than

these

brothers.

(Lesson XLI)

are you asking

me

to be asking these

(?)

men ?

What

2.

(fte) ?

are these physicians

3.

we

regard

nothing more beautiful than a good friend.

4.

5.

You

is

he,

What

are asking

which
of us is the wiser.
6. You were asking which of us was the more beautiful.
7. Do not
keep asking this.
Let them not be asking these
8.
(questions).
9.
We have nothing to ask you. 10. If
you ask this, we shall reply that we do not know.
11. If
you should ask this, we should make no reply (say ''he
replying nothing''^.
12. This boy was hesitating to ask
me about this (matter).
13. The one was asking, the
other was answering.

I.

OLos

or
Olds

32.

am

able

qualified^ both to deliberate

and

(Lesson XLIII)

Qfit,

to fight.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

202

Repeat

. -

this sentence, conjugating the verb

out the present and future indicative.


ing

,
,
)
T

through-

Repeat, substitut-

Repeat with

making the necessary changes.

$
II.

(or

a)

Since

desire, etc.

Repeat, conjugating the verb

in the present

and future indicative and making the other necessary

changes.
b)

Concerning these {matters^

you

shall try to question

,
, ,

also as one having experience.

Repeat, substituting for

(and making the other nec-

essary changes, observing that

compound
forms)

"?

(Lesson XLIV)

Review Exercises 23 and


a)

Although growing

many

,
?.

$ $.
33.

learning

is

adjective and so has no ^distincti\^e feminine

Tovs avSpas,

I.

experienced,

old,

32.

I am

nevertheless

(things^.

still

trying

to he

,,, '

Repeat (making the necessary changes) with

b)

Although

wise,

I do

not

what in the ivorld


Repeat with

it is').

know what friendship

is

(^friendship

^
,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


c)

irepi

the words

Repeat, substituting for


ToxiaSe,

Tas KOpas

a)

II.

'.

Tois

Xcyovtos ol

, .

b)

Repeat

203

this being so.

the words

a), substituting for

,,

1.
While we were conversing with one another Lysis,
being a boy, vas playing in the courtyard.
2. While

^?) was

Lysis (Gen.

versing with us.

playing, the others were con-

As we

3.

the others will say {epovat) that


friends.

And

4.

yet

cover what friendship

(^)

pi.)

of

priest,

,
-

1.

, ., the

From

4.

Into

7.

Before

the city.
5.

I believe you to be
you are not able to dis-

(Exercise 16), substitut-

appropriate forms (both sing, and

the horseman., b

( 39),

')

XLVI)

Repeat the phrases with


ing for

away (^-

is.

(Lesson

34.

are going

2.

Out

Far from

'

of

3.

6.

In

Around

the

Repeat each of these phrases in the plural.

Write in Greek each of the following questions together


with an appropriate answer.
2. Was he a
1. Come tell me, who was Socrates?
young man or an old man ?
3. About what were he

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

204

4. Who
and the boys cou versing with one another ?
was calling the boys and bidding them go home ?
?

6.

Were they

out what friendship was?

7.

What

Were they going

5.

to find

than good-health

Which

9.

beautiful

into the city

Who

8.

happier than a king

is

seemed to you

of these boys

able

better

is

more

to be the

35.

(Lesson XLVIII)

Observe carefully the difference between the progresand the aorist forms as illustrated by the following
examples
sive

Aorist

Progressive

what

ivas

do-

TTOico^cv; ivhat are

we

to

be doing ?

us he doetc.

ing, etc.

lav

T.

if

be

doing,

tav

should

I do

what are we

do ?

to

let

what did

';

ing f

if

let

us do,

I do,

etc.

etc.

T.

be

be doing this

TToicL

TToiet

.
do

dont, etc.

TTOLCLV to be doing.

doing
etc.).

(while

should

do.

this !

don' t do this

to do.

doing

doing,

,.

done}.

Repeat with
Observe further that the aorist participle

(having

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

205

Indicates an act merely as an occurrence without

I.

reference to time or duration, tlius

- He

a)

He

Contrast

said (while^ laughing.

b)

said with a laugh.

turn in announcing this

Vou did me

a-yyeiXas

was kind of you

(it

to

a good

announce,

thank you for announcing, etc.).

Repeat

a), substituting for -YtXaaas

into tears.

bursti^ig

Repeat each in the feminine.

, ,

Repeat b), substituting for a-yyciXas the appropriate


forms (both masc. and fem.) of iroitLv,

. -?

',
c)

Contrast

laugh.

laughing.
II.

Because of

an act that

Repeat, substituting for

(both masc. and fem.) of

36.

Study carefully
I.

to

recognize

or asleep ?
that

I am

"am / am .
Cf.

o28a

undone

brother

heard him

This done he said, havthe appropriate forms


dKoveiv,

- -;

(Lesson L)

dead.
c)

'- $

a fool

Exercise

b)

(/

(hv

kiiow that

23).

thirty years (of age).

lost,

my

^, ,

65, 66, 137.

I am

a)

fundamental meaning, often refers to


in time to that indicated by the lead-

ing done, etc.

Am I awake

heard

its

is 'prior

ing verb, thus

d)
e)

I have

I am

come

foolish.

/ am

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

206

He

^')

I.

pear

asleep

dead.

is

Are

5.

Ave are foolish.

these, etc.

about
lost

(vre/ot,

11.

We

6.

8.

am

twenty years
are undone

ap-

or

recognize that

ten years old.

129, e)

We

a)

II.

4.

These recognize that they are

7.

those do not.

ish,

3. They
Are you awake

These are dead.

2.

to be dead.

9.

of age.

10.

fool-

We

are

You

are

What have I done? ^

b)

have told {spoken')

all

the truth.

I have

'

'

c)

d)

violated the

j^^cic^

have neither seen

nor heard the man.

We have

12.

14.

etc.

seen the

them.

Who

men ?
17. To

told all the truth.

has broken the peace


16.

We

To have

Study carefully
a)

I have
b)
c)

20.

179.

spoken., etc.

"

To be dead.
To have spoken

18.

(Lesson

''

did not hear the man.

d)

15.

Have you
19.

To

the truth.

seen and heard.

37.

I.

These have not,

have neither seen nor heard

be awake.

be thirty years of age.


21.

13.

6$

LH)

am

saying that

was saying,

/ am

etc.

saying that

Observe that in English the perfect is constantly employed where, in


What has he done ? =
be more natural, thus
Compared with English, Greek employs the perfect infrequently.

Greek, an aorist
;

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK


e)

(or

I have

that

^)

I sai/

(or said^

(or had) spoken, etc.

deny that Iheard the man.

f)

g)

207

-uvai

oii

I refuse

to

I my

go away~).

h)

that

I am

olos

away

not going

|-

(i.e.

shall

say, etc.

Repeat each of these sentences


persons singular, and the

first,

plural.

Repeat with

-.

these things.

1.
3.

ovSeva

4.

2.

shall forget

5.

(Lesson LIII)

38.

Review Exercise

second and third

in the

second, and third persons

and study carefully the following


examples of progressive and aorist forms
35,

Progressive

/ am

learning.

I was
lav

learning
if

he

dv

he

learning these (thiyigs^.

may I

Aorist

I learned.

if

learn these

{things).

learning, etc.

may I

learn,

etc.

he learning,

learn, etc.!

etc.!

dont

he,

etc.!

to he learning.

(while) learning.

don't

learn!

157.
to learn.

learning,

having

learned.
1

Observe that

(shall) say.

followed by

ipQ)
is

{ipiw) is the future in common use meaning / will


not common, and
means I shall speak, ipd is

THE FIRST YEAR OF GEEEK

208

, ,
-.
,
, 3,-..
Repeat with

clirov.

1.

2.

5.

4.

(Lesson LIV)

39.

Study carefully
"*

a) 1

I.

3.

-
--

85, 152.

irats

If the hoy had asked me THIS, I should have made no reply.


b)
1
Even if were ill, I should desire to associate, etc.

c) L

If

many

Vos

young,

ivere not

I should

not he asking this

man

so

(questions^.

Repeat each of these sentences, conjugating the leading


verb in each throughout the indicative of the tense indicated, and making the other necessary changes.

(Lesson LV)

40.

Two

verbs of asking

(Lesson LIV) ask (a

1.

tion

question').

Construc-

two accusatives.

2. What was I askWhat am I asking this man ?


3.
What will I ask this woman ?
man ?
5.
If I be asking her many
4. What did I ask her ?
6. If I ask her many (questions)
(questions)
1.

ing the same

7.

If

should not be asking the boys these

(questions)
(questions)

8.

If I

should not ask them these

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

209

Repeat, conjugating the verb throughout the

mood

or

tense indicated.
10. Ask me this.
9. Be asking me this.
11. Don't
12. Don't ask me this ( 157).
keep asking me this.
13. Let him, etc.
14. Let them, etc.
15. Let them
16. We have nothing to ask you.
not, etc.

,,

IL
tion

ask

two accusatives.

favor^.

Construc-

Repeat the preceding

drill.

(Lesson LVI)

41.

2. I do not know.
3.
Do you knov?
I know.
5. Who
Does this man not know what friendship is ?
6. I think I know.
7. I
knows what the sophist is ?
8. May I never
I knew.
thought
1.

4.

(^)

(^)

know
11.

this'!

9.

May

we, etc.!

10.

May

knew.

12.

If I

was saying that

should not be asking so

many

14. If these boys, etc.

etc.

16.

Know

that
17.

we were
To know

the,

to

15.

Know

well that these will say, as

seem

wisest of

(questions).

to

all

we

these, etc.!

knew

19.

18.

Socrates

we

consider the

For he knew that he knew

(Lesson LVIII)

of telling^ saying.

i
J

is.

from seeming to know (say 'from

know''^.

men.

are going away,

not able to discover what friendship


differs

42.

I.

13. If you,

well (eu

nothing.

Verbs

this, I

Review Exercise

(.

37.

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

210
I.

him
I

What am I telling the boy ? 2. What will I


3.
What was I telling the man ? 4. What

say to him

this

If I tell this

5.

If

7.

should say this

should

this

tell

8.

did
say

If

should have said nothing.

9.

If

6.

tell

Repeat, conjugating the verb throughout the

mood

or

tense indicated.

Tell

10.

same

me

( 157).

say that

14.

Don't keep telling me this


this.
13. Don't say this
have nothing to say.
15. We shall

this.

(thing).

12.

11.

Say

we do not know.

also chance to be saying


also

chanced to say

tell.

1.

17, conjugating the

Toiixois

is

\vhat

(/)

17.

This

is

This

what

(eiirav').

,,

Repeat 16 and
II.

16.

(XJv^.

verb in the plural.

^:>omi out,

clircv

have come

declare,

explain,

2.

to tell, etc.

( 175).

Explain what you mean. 4. ovSev


Repeat 1 and 2, conjugating the verb as

3.

before.

.
..
43.

1.

(Lesson LX)

was admired (marvelled at) for wisdom.


4.

5.

2.
3.

6.

was delighted

at seeiyig, etc.

Repeat these sentences, conjugating the verbs throughout the singular and plural.

the first year of greek


(Lesson LXII)

44.

Protagoras was called a sophist.

1.

was

2.

Protagoras

called a sophist, but Plato a philosopher.

saying that Protagoras,

).

4.

etc.

you?

May

7.

We

12.

was

If

it

()

men never be called sophists


9. By whom
?
10. By his (' the ') father, or by a
11. He was not persuaded to go
^) ?
were delighted at seeing these men con-

slave (irorepov

that, etc.

these

The boys were


was Lysis led home
8.

home.

6.

3.

(^

said

would not please me


you, etc., would it please

should be called a sophist,

If I

5.

211

led home.

versing with one another.

(Lesson LXVIII)

45.

Many

1.

(ot

are few.

^'?)

Few know what death is (say


3. Those who fear death
many, those who know what (it) is

fear death.

''know the death what

4.

that (it)

2.

(^ii)

are

is').

though

fear death as

is

the greatest of

I kne\v well

(?

ev

all evils.

Repeat 4, conjugating the verb throughout, both singuand plural, and making the other necessary changes.
5. For I chance to fear death, although not knowing
that it is an evil.
Repeat 5, as above.
lar

(Lesson LXXIII)

46.
I stood

1.

standing,

made
6.

arise.

am

arising.
9.

2.

stand

().
(^.
8.

in the act of standing

the boy stand

am

(').

i.e. I

7.

made

).

5.

the boys arise.

should be arising.

10.

8.

am
4.

stood up.
I

should

should make the

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

212
others arise.

'

11.

myself

knew the man.


arising I went home ').

13.

12. I ran away.


and went home (say

Avill arise.

I arose

14.

Repeat each of these sentences with you,

this

same

slave,

we, you, those.

Arise

15.

arise

18,

16.

Know

Do

not arise

thj'self

19.

Let these not

17.

Be coming

to

know

thy-

-. -,
self

20.

47.

a)

I.

know

Let each (one)

(Lesson
;

I ascribe

$
-,
'

the blame for this?

?
?

e) lav

laois

f) el

XL

LXXVII)

b)

c)

shall

whom pray

d)

These

a)

b)

himself

hold in honor.

Those also

held in

dishonor.

Repeat each of these sentences with you,

the

man, we,

you, they.
2. Set it down (/cara-^e?).
Give me the book.
3. Don't set it dowai.
4. Let the boy himself set it
5. Let the boys themselves, etc.
6. Let him
doAvn.
am I
not, etc.
7.
Let them not, etc. 8. Where
1.

to place the stool


10.

11.

( 8^

Where

are we, etc.

These we should hold in dishonor, those in honor.


Plato ascribed the good to God, but not the evil.
48.

T.

()

9.

(Lesson

a)

LXXIX)
;

shall

b)

make grateful return

to these

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


for the

benefits,

'- /

c)

etc.

delivered, etc.

d)

-. -,

Maf/

II.

213

never grant, etc.

e)

toIs

Repeat each of these sentences as before.

Grant me (/xot) the favor.


betray your (' the ') friends.

2.

1.

Am

5.

I to

us not, etc.

8.

)
}

we should

If

9.

not have friends

(;

sharing
(o
13.

all

my

betray

friends?

4.

Let

6.

Are we,

3.

these

If I betray these, I shall not

Don't

not,

etc.

Let
have friends.
etc.

7.

share these (things) with you, would


10.

with

my

I delight in

comrades.

these (things) with you.

Having

Don't, etc.

sharing
11.

my

We

12.

delight in

The herdsman

gave the child to his wife

(sa}^

placed the child in the basket (et?

'woman'^.
ayyo^},

}.

ek
he carried (it) into the mountains
14. Having placed the child in the basket, they,

Having given the

15.

away.

child to his wife, the

These gave (say

16.

'

having given

we

pleasures

etc.

herdsman went
')

the child to

the herdsman and went away.

a)

I.

'
d)

LXXX)

-.
-.
^.
49.

(Lesson

Xe^CL oStos ffe

is

speaking nonsense, b)
c)

-|

e)

Whom pray

shall

II.

my

I aj^poiyit general?
I am making

a display of

skill.

Repeat, as above.
1.

The

just

man

time alone reveals

(say

'shows'^.

THE FIBST TEAR OF GREEK

214
2.

Sophocles the poet said that time alone reveals the

just.

3.

The man

()

seem to us

is showing off (e7-e^;l'^;i).


4. These
showing off.
5. The young man is

to show his
Having displayed our skill,

eager
6.

to be

skill,

let

the

old

us depart.

man

not.

MEPOS

TO

PART

II

THE GRAMMAR

216

, ).

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

1.

The Alphabet

The standard Greek alphabet has twenty-four


Form

217

letters

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

218

that was officially adopted at

Athens in the year 403 B.C.


was the Ionic alphabet. Before this date the Attic
alphabet had passed through many changes.
The primitive Greek alphabets contained three additional letters, which disappeared in early times. The most
important of these was F digamma {i.e. double gamma)
It

w.

Of. Fiov violet

when used
c) The

piScLV to

as a numeral,

see.,

p is written

viclere.

See

6.

51.

ancients used only capital letters

the small

came into use during the Middle Ages.


d) The letters were used as numerals.
See

letters

Punctuation

2.

Marks.

The

only

51.

punctuation

marks used in modern editions of Greek texts that differ


from those in use in English are the question-mark (;)
and the colon ().

Pronunciation

3.

Vowels

).

The

Of these
are always
e
sometimes short, somealways long ;
times long.
See 8, 9 f.
The sounds of the vowels are indicated in the table
above ( 1), but note further that
represents the long (open) e-sound midway between
vowels are
short;

case,

In transliterating Greek names into English employ the nominative

and observe that

=
=
=

/*

77

(init.)

7,

rh

ot

ch

Examples are

et

=
=
=
=
=

ps
ae

OS,

oe

evs (final)

ei, i,

ov (final)

S^p|i?s

=
=
=

eos (final)

Byzantium,
See further

Eu-hoe'a, Aiyvirros Aegyptus,


Ti-mo'theus.

=
=

ng

us,

um

eus
eus

Sophocles,
Xerxes,
Pro-me'theus,

6eos

8.

)IPH.

was originally pronounced

a)

-).

very early became


(for

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

220

to

Athens

Later, perhaps as early as the fourth

in glaze, and this


was pronounced like
modern Greek.
was probably rolled more than r in English. See

century B.C.,

sound

dz in adze, but

like

zd, as in glaz'd ; cf.

it still

b)

it

retains in

6e.
were respectively
it
in
were
similar
kh
hothead,
to th ph
that is, the sounds
Later they came to be pronounced
topheavy, packhorse.
like th ph kh {ch^ in thin, Philip, loch, and these sounds
are retained in modern Greek.
d) Every consonant M^as sounded.
or | Avas sounded like ng in sing
before
e)
in the early periods

c)

(7-nasal)

6.

,)

messenger,

( =

f)

Attic

cf.

angel

was possibly pronounced

sphinx.
like sh.

Breathings.

An

vowel or diphthong is always accompanied


whether it is to be uttered with or
without an -sound if with an expulsion of the breath (),
the (pronounced Ao)
the sign is written over the vowel
is called the rough
hemisphere.
This
sign
half, cf.
(smooth
breathing.
If no A-sound is present, the sign
- (pronounced ego).
breathing') is employed
b) If the initial vowel is a capital letter, the breathing
is written before the vowel
c) When an entire word is written in capitals, breathing and accent marks ( 9) are omitted.
a)

by a sign

initial

to indicate
;

'

'

'

, $.
'

d) If a word begins with a diphthong, the breathing

"

written over the second vowel of the diphthong

This

is

is

not true, however, of improper diphthongs ( 4 b)


Hades.

;:

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

"

When

the initial vowel or diphthong

221

accented, the

is

accent and breathing are written together:

have

you are.
e) Initial
is regularly pronounced and written with a
rough breathing
a stream, cf. rheumatism.
f) Before a smooth vowel ov not becomes
before a
rough vowel,
/ do not know ;
a Grreek

oh!

et

I do

not speak Greek.

So
and ir when exposed through elision (12) become
and
respectively before a rough vowel or diphthong

" =,' =,' =.

always has the rough breathing in the

g) Initial
Attic dialect

above,

cf.

hyper.

7.
Syllables.
Every single vowel or diphthong,
whether with or without a consonant, makes a distinct

syllable.

a)

In dividing a word into syllables


single consonant

--.

is

connected with the vowel

fol-

lowing
b) Combinations of consonants which can begin a word
are connected with the vowel following
:

Compounds formed without

c)

according to their elements

Quantity.

8.

The

-, -?.

elision ( 12) are divided

-^, -.

quantity

of

the

syllable

is

factor of great importance in the pronunciation of ancient

Greek.

See

9 f.^

syllable

may

be long

1 In pronouncing Greek proper names in English (see


1, note) it is
customary to ignore the Greek accent, and to accent the penult of the
word, if this be long in Greek; otherwise the antepenult:
Prome'theus (three syllables) io'os Timo'theus (four syllables).
It is usual, further, to give the vowels their long or short English
;

sounds, as follows
a)

A vowel

Orion.

followed by a vowel usually has the long sound

Ionia,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

222

By

a)

nature^ that

diphthong (

By

b)

position^

short, 3) is

is,

that

when
is,

has a long vowel or a

it

).

when

vowel (naturally

its

folloAved by two consonants or a double con-

(|):

sonant

4)

3,

- (

v^),

^),

---^

).

A
18)

short vowel followed by a stop and a liquid ( 17,


treated as either long or short
(^ >^).

is

9.

Accent.

a) Accent

English

it

Greek

in
is

chiefly

differs

radically from accent in

a musical or joiic/i-accent

stress

plays but a secondary role.


b) There are two kinds of accent in Greek, but three
accent-signs.

The two kinds

of accent are

1) Acute or sharp, indicated by the sign


pitch of the voice is raised as the syllable is

2)

Circumflex^

c)

The

or

the

uttered

rising-falling tone (")

?;
third accent-sign

is

(' ), the

The

(').

Grrave accent as

This constitutes the second element of the


circumflex accent, where it is perhaps entitled to be called

it is called.

b)

vowel followed by a single consonant (or by a stop and a liquid


has the long sound if it stands in an accented penult other-

( 17, 18))

wise the short sound

Cha'ron, Soc'rates.

But in such names as He'siod, Pausa'nias, Duca'lion, a, e, or


followed by a single consonant (or a stop and a liquid) before e,
and another vowel has the long sound.
c)

A vowel

followed by two consonants has the short sound.

The diphthongs ae and oe are sounded like e.


The consonants c and g are soft before e, i, ?/, ae, and
d)

oe.

when
i,

or y

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


Elsewhere

an accent.

it is

223

merely a sign to indicate that

a syllable which Avould normally be pronounced with the


rising inflection (acute)
the voice

a word,

remains

which

at the

is

last

This occurs when

is

incorporated in a sentence,

individual accent in that of the word-

its

group:
on the

level.

uttered alone has the rising inflection on

if

the last syllable (eVrtV),

and merges

not so pronounced, but that

monotone

regularly

sellable is

acute accent-sign

changed in writing

to

grave accent-sign before another word in the same sentence.

d) But a

acute is not changed to a grave before


an enclitic ( 10) or an elided syllable ( 12), or in the
words Tis who ?
what ?
final

The accent

e)

one of the

The

of

Greek word always accompanies

last three syllables.

circumflex accent accompanies only a syllable that

long hy nature (8), and may rest upon either the last
syllable or the syllable before the last (but only when the
is

last is short)

The

, .

acute accent

., ,

may accompany one

,,

syllables of a word, but the third

the last

The

is

short

of the last three

from the end only when

the breathing ( 6), is written


over the second vowel of a diphthong, but before a single
initial

See

accent-sign, like

vowel when

this is a capital

".

6 d.

f )

The rhythm

of

all classical

Greek depends upon

the quantity of the syllable ( 8), not upon the accent


(pitch).
10.

Enclitics.

a)

Some words

of

one or two syllables attach them-

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

224

selves so closely to a preceding

word

become virThese
Examples are

as to

tually a part of that word, as does -que in Latin.

are called Enclitics (i.e., leaning-words}.

,,

The

b)

an

effect of

an

enclitic:

1) Preserves
acute

to

, () .

accent and never changes a final

a grave ( 9 d): 8os


it has an acute on the penult

lowed by
3) If

i)

own

5 , "

2) If

cent:

its

it

number
word before

enclitic is to increase the

of syllables of the Avord preceding, hence the

and

is fol-

a dissyllahic enclitic, the latter retains its ac-

has an acute on the antepenult

circumflex on the penult

acute on the last syllable

(^^.,

(),

or

adds an

it

c) Enclitics retain their accent:

1) Sometimes for emphasis


it

seem

so to

2) After elision ( 12)

evil.

3)

)
wise.

is

pronounced and accented

' ',

d)

id

When two

each, except

or

i.

in its clause

does

all things are

,, .'

When it stands first


When it is emphatic

7) After ovK.
is not.

'

TO U too ?

eVri

the

man IS

there

est.

more

of course

syllable an acute accent

the

enclitics
last,

follow one

receives

another,

upon

from the one following

its final

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

225

11. Proclitics.
A few words of one syllable have
no accent of their own, but attach themselves closely to

the

word that

and the
Examples are

are called Proclitics.

K, el, ov,

But
by an

-ye

ol,

when

it is

Iv, els,

followed

Beos-

Elision.

12.

a) Elision
of a

a proclitic receives an accent


enclitic

These

in English.

follows, like a

is

the cutting off of a short vowel at the end

word when the next word begins with

05.

The apostrophe (') marks


pounds

a vowel:

the omission, except in com-

(for Stay.

and conjunctions accented


on the last syllable lose their accent with the elided syllable, and become in effect proclitics ( 11):
b) In

()

elision, prepositions

c) Other

words throw, the accent back

but without changing the acute to a grave

The only consonants allowed


word are v, p, and s (| = ks,

a)

()
(for

'

to the penult,

word

end
and

to stand at the

attach themselves closely to the

( 11).
of a

Final and Movable Consonants.

13.

'

its)

of

word that follows

All other consonants were dropped at the end

.,

bod^ (for

cf.

'), pe was
') and
he

writing

Lat. scribi-t^.

b) Most forms ending in

(also

all

verb-

forms of the third person singular ending in -e add


before a word beginning with a vowel, and often at the
end of a clause or sentence. This is known as v-movable.
c)

For

0X1 (oy/c,

),

see 6 f

226

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

thus, so may drop the s before a consonant.


becomes
before a consonant.
before
e) The ending -t of the pluperfect may add

d)

So

out of

a vowel.

Contraction is the
14. Contraction of Vowels.
term employed to signify the uniting of two successive
vowels, or a vowel and a diphthong, both in the same
Avord, into a single vowel or diphthong
>
of
contraction
learned
The phenomena
are best
by mastering the paradigms of contracted nouns, adjectives, and
verbs, 28 D, 29 C, 41, 81-83.
But note especially
:

that
, t,

and

CL

>

cl; oo, co, o,

contracted syllable

is

, >
and

regularly accented

0l

if

>.

either of

the original syllables was accented

a)

the

final syllable

(),

with the circumflex accent, unless

? (?).

original

final

syllable

had an acute accent

b) Other syllables according to the rules stated in 9


15.

Crasis.

Crasis

(^

mixture^

is

the con-

traction of a vowel or diphthong at the end of a

with one at the beginning of the following word


(/cat

),

16.

(/cat ez/)

Vowel-Gradation.

e.

word

(/cat eav^.

In

the same root or suffix

there frequently occurs an interchange of vowels similar

There are
two strong grades and one weak

to that in English, as in dri7ik, drank, drunk.

usually three grades,


grade, as follows

Strong

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

Examples are

carry

a carrying

--

nourish

--^

know

(Dor.

--

Att.

I say

I place

---^

have

voice

-s

was

nourished

I know

--

-s chariot

(two-carrier)

nourished

ciS-evai to

--0

227

a heap

I give

to

see^

we say

--

tve

-- we

place
give

consonants and their combinations


17.

Stops.

a) Stops (or

Mutes) are those consonants whose pro-

nunciation causes a complete though momentary closing of


the breathing passage.

Stops are of three orders (smooth,

middle, rough or aspirate) and of three classes (labial, palatal,

dental), as follows
Classes

Okders

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

228

(-),
(-^?), -".
(^--),

but

c)

IT,

become

and

and

, , and

So
vowel
e

>

are

>

Of)

becomes -

When

e)

, , or

two aspirated stops (,

- (-^

a,

and a

,,

/c,

is

would normally

regularly changed

(--,^

'>

>

Similarly

or
(/3e-

,)

first

>,

>t,

(^--^.

(%e-

19 a). ^

Liquids and Nasals.

18.

a)

see 61.

---((--)
-,

begin successive syllables, the


to its cognate smooth stop (,

-).

normally becomes

remains unchanged)

with

and the preceding

(a

short

if

(-/-),

d) Before

\-^^.

dropped before

(^7-8~),

, , and

are dropped before

then lengthened,

is

et,

become

with

, ,

|;

'

The

and

liquids are

Of

-nasal ( 5 e).

these

the nasals are

, ,,

, ,

and

play a very important

In the parent Indo-European


were frequently vocalic (written 1 m,
n, r), i.e. they served as vowels in the formation of syllables.
Of. fathom, yes'm, heavew, SittZ, brittle, etc. In Greek
or else
these vocalic liquids and nasals either became
developed a short vowel (usually a) to accompany and
or
r > ap or pa
1
became
support them. Thus
from
rn >
> , as follows
(e ---') from
(jreX-to), 20)
word-formation.

role in

language

1,

m,

n, r

-.

b) Before
(/c?)

it

ir,

,,

(?)

becomes Y-nasal

There are exceptions, as

---becomes

before

, ,

(--/)

before
it

-, --, ---.

,,

,|

remains unSee

73.

) --,.
THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

Thus

changed.

apparent exceptions

d) V before

f)

Initial

is

>

>

g)

is

a) In

>

and

was lisped

seven (orig.

b) Medial

ev

after a

-.

Digamma

Greek

dialects

to see (fiS-, cf.

survived as an

qf. septem'), tnrcp

20.

placed

is

diphthong

-sound ( 6)

to disappear
:

super.

between two

"y^vous (yevea-ot,

see 35).

(/r)

early disappeared from most of the

cTttov

said

(fe-n--,

cf.

Lat. voeo),

Lat. videre).

d) In a few words an
pleasant

(^-^)

was dropped, or

original initial

antl

shows a tendency

Lat. gener-is
c)

is

tovs (tov-^^^

vowels, especially in inflectional forms


cf.

(^6\-).

many words an

it

>

ec,

assimilated

- {)
-

There are some

doubled when a simple vowel

is

Omission of

rather

a, e

in composition or inflection

it

not doubled

19.

{-).

(/ueXay-?).^

or

- (-).
before

(eV-

dropped and the preceding- vowel

is

e) V before

see 67.

regularly lengthened (a
els (eV?),

(^-)

>.

before

c)

{-^)

229

(^afdS-., cf.

initial

disappeared

Lat. suavis^.

Consonantal

l.

In

very primitive times

many

Greek words contained a consonantal { = y, cf. pin^n '),


which effected certain important changes in pronunciation
and spelling. Some of these are as follows
'-

^ There are some exceptions.


Thus in the dative plural
dropped without compensatory lengthening:

before

is

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

230

(from

and sometimes

(^\-,

dpi,

>

,.

see 59

d)
59

>

a)

b)

59

-,
>

,.
, >

c,

59

).

c,

(=

5 f)

c, /3).

vi, pi, tvi, ipi,

and

C/^op-) fate,

iv, ip, Iv,

, , Up

see

c, e.

>

e)
see 59

>

1^

, sometimes

or

(see above, b)

c, a.

declensions of pronouns

The Persoxal Pronouns.

21.

a)

b) Pronoun

you (thou).

/.

(^Unaccented forms
are unemphatic.)

the

of

person

third

(him,

her,

( usually

if).

an

in-

direct reflexive.)
S.

N.
G.

a~\)

0/

you
of {from) you

of {from) him, her,

{from) me

D.

it

{for)

-,

{for) you

to {for)

him,

etc.

me
A. ,
P. N.

-,

vie

you {ye)

us

D.
A.

to

(for) us

22.

to

us

The forms

(for) you

yoic

ol

him, her,

it

they

of {from) yon

of {from)

G.

you

<ri

ive

of {from) them

--

to

(for) them

tr^as them

are usually enclitic.

The Intensive

Pkonoxjn.

The

intensive pro-

( 40 ), except
that the neuter nominative and accusative singular end in

noun

-0 (cf.

self is declined like

TovTo) instead of in -ov, thus

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


S.

N.

avTOs

G.

For the uses of avTos, see


28.

avTTjs

106.

The Reflexive Pronouns. The

231

reflexive pro-

nouns are formed from the stems of the personal pronouns


combined with
They have no nominative
( 22).
forms

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

232

The article was originally


The demonstrative pronoun

ties in accent, as

25.

a)

demonstrative pronoun.

the old demonstrative


This explains the apparent irregulari-

, .

suffix -.

with the

The Demonstrative
Pronoun outos

this.

is

See

10.

b)

The Demonstrative
Pronoun KLV0S that.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

233

Indefinite

^^

YXQ/iJ'^iA'^O

N-

Ti

Tis
Tivos,
Tivi,

Tivis

Twri

Tivas

The

dissyllabic forms of the indefinite pronoun,

when

accented ( 10 b, 2), receive an acute (or grave, 9 c) on


the last syllable, except in the genitive plural tivcs,
b)
one.

"5

whoever

Each part

is

is

compound

of os

who and tls some

declined separately, as follows:

234
P. N. V.

THE FIRST YEAH OF GREEK

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


N.

235

THE FIE ST YEAR OF GBEEE

236

d) The ending

nominative plural

ot of the

is

treated as

short ; see 28 A, g.

e)
tive

so regularly

accent

.
S.

The nominative
in''tI7e

in os is

]\iasc'uline,

09

00s

vocative

Feminine, and Neuter Nouns.

avTos

N.
the

has recessive

brother

()

sometimes used for the voca-

the

.filiend

same physician

TO

the

road

()

?
?

^
^
?
?
?
??

G.

the

D.

'

..

?
??

V.

()

G.

D.

S.

()

()

V.

.
the

G.

D.

.
V.

()

..

?
?

V.

()

G.

D.

Tois ovTois

Tovs

-?

"
-?
"?
-

jlvToiis

()
,

philosopher

VOVS (wo?) mind^


hone,

So

-.

irXovs

Compounds

-,

the

triangle

()

,\., .

voyage,

in -oos accent all the

, \.

nominative singular
around, TrcpiirXou,

gift

()

-.,

(^?)

()

siave
slave

"
^^

^?

()

()

?
?

Contract Nouns.

C.

child

(oareov)

{)

forms like

Trepi-irXovs

tlie

(/-?)

basket.

contracted

a sailing

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

237

Third Declension.

30.

a) The stems end in a consonant, t, or , and are in


most cases conveniently determined by dropping the endThe nouns of the third declening -OS of the genitive.
sion are masculine, feminine, or neuter.

b) The nominative singular of


feminine nouns

making

|.

is

the usual euplionic changes ( 17 c)

But stems ending

in v,

p,

lengthen the last vowel,

- (-),

if

being dropped

The

c)

short (>?;,
to

s,

>

but merely

> ),

while

(Xeovr-),

50.

In neuter nouns the stem


final

or s do not add

and lengthen

drop

those in

most masculine and


formed by adding s to the stem and

is

vocative singular

employed

as the nominative,

(/^-),

13.

is

usually the same as the

and

nominative, or as the stem, final

being dropped,

13.

d) The dative plural

is

formed by adding

- and mak-

ing the usual euphonic changes, 17 c.


e) Most nouns which are monosyllabic in the nomina-

, . ,,

and
There are a few excep-

tive singular accent the final syllable in the genitive

dative, both singular


tions
31.

irais,

and

but

NoLTNS WITH

plural.

iras,

Mute Stems

( 17).

43.

OF GREEK

THE FIRST

238
P. N. V.

G.

() <()
5
5
(5

D.

Xeovres

vvkts

.<()

Xcovrds

TraiSes

()

'Traicri(v)

iroSds

iraiSas

Neuter Nouns with Stems

32.

oj^a

G.

D.

Tip

'

Nouxs

Stems in

the divinity the

or

G.

D.
A.
".

G.

(-)

the pre-

server, sav-

5 ' 8

'
"
?

-()
)ior

(-)

05

xip

'5

()

A.

34.

( 18).

N.V.
D.

(-)

",

Greek the shepherd the dog the hand

(-) (-) (-)

P.

17 c)

()

6,

S.

-.

() (^-,

TOis

()

33.

opviGas

the chariot

.
V.

ix

(()

Plural

Singular

N. TO

opviGes

iroSts

Nouns

in

Xeipes

-')

-()

()

- with Variable

Stems (Synco-

pated NOUNS).
the father
s.

the

mother

N.

'

G.

D.

A.
V.
1

very

common

the daughter

'.

alternative

form

is

the

man

THE FIRST YEAB OF GREEK


P. N. V.

239

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

240
This

not true, however, of nouns of the type of


the principal noun in -, gen. -$

is

is

Nouns with Stems

37.

in -.

($

PacriXcvs the king

N.

G.

D.

.
V.

38.

(-)

()

G.

05

D.

.
The stems

(()
became respectively

and

(cf. Lat. bov-is, ndv-is)

Irkegular Nouns.

"
-

(to) milk

- and -.

few

of the

{)

knee

more impor-

-.. -, .
-,-,
-,
-, ", -,
:

spear

woman, wife

^5. Zcvs () Zeus


6.
(^) water

()

and

the p was

- -, -|(), -.
.
-.
()
.
,
,
,
,,. , ,
3
()

-, 1. -9,
1.

vaOs

SiXG.

Pl.

tant irregular nouns are

7.

-$

or cow, and

(ySou-)

then dropped, leaving merely

4.

{'8

()

vap before a vowel

>3.

toiis

or

068

V.

2.

-$

ship are thus declined


Sing.

1.

ol

-<()

(-X^t)

The nouns ,

N.

39.

?Plural

Singular

son

or

(), .

Of.

()

or

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

241

declensions of adjectives
40.

of

Adjectives

the

Fikst-Second

Declen-

sions.

A. The adjectives of the first-second declensions have


normally three sets of endings, of which the feminine
endings belong to the first declension, the others to the
the feminine ending of the nomiAfter e, t, or
second.
native singular

is

after other letters,

In the geni-

same form and accent.


and
few
others,
have no distinca
Compound adjectives,

tive plural all the genders have

tive feminine endings

(.

equal,

Tlie

young, new,

and

F.)

adjectives

small,

tlie

(.

F.)

(.)

dea7%

(.)

beautiful,

just,

unequal, are thus declined

un-

beneficial.

vtos

largest^

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

242

Contract Adjectives.

41,

and

Most adjectives in -os


The contracted forms are regu-

-oos are contracted.

larly circumflexed on the last syllable (/",


?), 28

D) and

are the

same

29

as those given above (B),

,,

except in the nominative, accusative, vocative, masculine

and neuter singular.


S. N. V.
-,
D.
-fj
So

(?)
of

disposed, G. -, D. '-.

(st.

as follows

D.

.
V.

. . V.
G.
D.

-? -,

\.

Neut.

(-009)

pi. eii-voa

true (cf

well-

(not ev-va).

The

35)

happy fortunate are declined


,

5
?
(
'

M.

G.

-^
-)
(st.

and

N.

declined:

Adjectives of the Third Declension.

adjectives

S.

is

simiile and
But compounds have no

silver.

distinctive feminine forms

42.

golden, of gold

G.

(r^o';')

05

N.

F.

M.

N.

F.

()

<( ()

ciJcXin hopeful,
Other types are represented by
fatherless, G.
G.
better, 48.
See also

43.

Adjectives of the First-Third Declensions.

The masculine and neuter forms of these adjectives are

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


of the third declension

243

the feminine forms of the

first.

true also of participles ( 50), which strictly beblack and irds (st.
(st.
long here,

This

all,

-)

is

every are declined as follows

?
5
M.

S. N.

G.

D.

-')

F.

$
(

<
F.

A.
V.

. . V.
G.

D.

.
44.

(
iratrai

<()
The

wide, broad
as follows

^,

adjectives

and ^apicis

()

-)

cvpOs
(st.

iratri

(st.

eupev-

iracri

Q>eupe-) evpv-^

graceful are declined

244

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


r\his

(-)

-yas

shamfful

(-) large
{-) sioift

-$

-<08

(for

more or

good

-KrTOS

less irregular

better

best
best

better

KpeCrTwv better

-TOs best

evil

small
1

much
easy

Comparatives in

48.

--8

^-')

beautiful

iroXvis

-\-<08

--)

(for

Tlie following are

05

--

pleasant

-05 (-)

245

(for

^-/)
more

most

are declined as follows (c/.

33,42):
M.
S. N.

N.

F.

better

G.

D
A.
V.
P.

or

. V.

or

or

G.

So

,, ', .
(()

D.

or

, ,^,,
(.

sive in the forms:

\.

or

The accent

is

reces-

ADVERBS
49. Most adverbs end in -, the majority being formed
from adjectives with the accent of the genitive plural

beautifully (/caXo?),

pleasantly

(^8),

formed by means

thus

justly (St/cato?),

(^<;^.

Many, however, are

of other suffixes, such as -a

very ;

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

246

-aKLS

TToWaiKis mani/ times


within ;

-: ^^\

homewards ;

secretli/ ;

-:
from

home.

The comparative
adjectives

is

of

the comparative of the

adverbs which are derived from

regularly the neuter accusative singular of


adjective

the

neuter accusative plural of the superlative


wisely

beautifully

So

superlative, the
:

more

very

most
least

less

DECLENSIONS OF PARTICIPLES (ACTIVE VOICE)


50.
-o-vT-^

A. Thematic Formation (Participles


75, 43).

The type

is

being (etVO

in
^

-,

st.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


B.

The

( 83),

and

participles of contract verbs in

( 82)

making, doing,

and

(-')

may

(-^)

247
( 81),

be represented by

showing (declined like

asking {a question^.

follows
Singular

{-)

),

The forms

are as

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

?AS

, ,

?
,

Tn the same manner are declined

G.

taking (ones) standi G.

.,

having done^

having selected^ judged,

\.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

249

THE VERB
STEMS AND ENDINGS
Every verb-form consists of at least two elements,
and an ending: -; most verb-forms contain
-- (rt.
st.
three or more elements
Each verb nor(rt. yvo-, st.
mally forms several action- and tense-stems; see 131,
52.

a root

-,

-----

''-}.

-),

59-70.

Verb-endings are of three sorts, a) personal endings,


b) infinitive endings, and c) participle endings.

Personal Endings; Thematic and Non-the-

53.

matic Formations.
son

they are

employed

Personal endings indicate the per-

a) primary personal endings,

in the present

subjunctives

When

the formation

when

the

is

are

vowel, the formation

54.

it is

is

not preceded

and

in the

in the imperative.

preceded by the
and
elsewhere

(o before

said to be thematic

endings

--, -.
stem

employed

the various verb-endings are

variable or thematic vowel


e),

of the indicative

c) personal endings

in all

b) secondary personal endings, or those

employed in the past tenses


optative

those

or

and future indicative and

-, -
i',

by the thematic

called non-thematic:

-, -,

The thematic vowel belongs

one of the elements mentioned in

52.

to the

For non-thematic formations


80.

THE FIEST TEAR OF GREEK

250

The thematic formation

see
is

,-

91;

by

illustrated

79.

55.

Secondary Personal Endings.


Active

'

Middle Voice

S. 1.

-V

2.

-<r

or

3.

(orig. -T, 13)

P.

-p''!*'

--

1.

2.

-T

3.

-V or -<rav

56.

-TO
-jieGa

For thematic formations see


thematic formations,

-<ro

91,

--

,,
,

(or -de)

79

for non-

86, 87.

Personal Endings of the Imperative.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

251

b) Temporal Augment, which consists in the lengthening of the first vowel of verb-stems beginning with a vowel
becoming , and i, o, and
/ heard
becoming respectively , , and
I was wishing
A long initial vowel (except a) is not changed of the
remains undiphthongs ai and ei > ,
>,
>
(rare) remains unchanged
changed or >
or
I found
/ demanded
I was gone
Verbs compounded with a preposition regularly take
there are a few exthe augment after the preposition
but
I was dying
ceptions
/ sat down
I was
Again, a few verbs have two augments

(or diphthong), a, a, and

().
,

(),

(),

---

(^),

().

{.-.).

(--)

seeing

(), -| I opened (-).

few verbs which originally began with


With an e of the
have
the syllabic augment.
or F ( 19)
/
verb-stem this is then contracted to l
Finally, a

had

(,
rt.

58.

-),

rt.

-), -|

broke

Reduplication.

completed action, or in
action,

and

is

(--)
(^<,

I
rt.

(--)

as following

Reduplication

is

some verbs merely

the
of

sign

all

of

intensive

a part of the perfect action-stem.

found therefore in

(-

fay-).

It

is

forms made from the perfect stem.

It is of several sorts

a) Verbs beginning with a consonant usually prefix that

(, t; see
I have fled,
/c,

a rough stop

(,
/
,am
- I

consonant with

%,

becoming smooth

have learned,

17 e):

have died,

dead,

b) Verbs beginning with a double consonant (", , ),


usually merely prefix an (/o being
two consonants, or

-,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

252
doubled):

have thrown,

/ have

Verbs beginning

c)

the regular temporal

/
,),
()
have

heard

6- /

know,

lied.

diphthong) have

Avith a vowel (or

augment

reduplication:

in lion of

(),

led

have recognized,

have perceived (^-

().

have seen

have

irregular.

is

CLASSES OF VERBS

The

conveniently classified according to the

A'erbs are

progressive action-stem, which

The

Thematic Stems

59.

a)

appears in

many

forms.

following are the most important groups


( 53):

Verbs with no element added

to the verbrstem (or

--

in man}^ instances to the verb-root) except the thematic

-%:

Three common

become,

b) Verbs Avhich add -T%-

c)

( 17)
steal

sit

down

(apiraj-).

\^erbs in

rarely,

or -^

7) Verbs in

(-).

(-

-, -,

(/-),

-Class],

dip

(-).

The stem regu-

20) [ioia-Class)

^^

for

(or

-,

19),

row (e/aer-).
from stems in

-,

-8,

few from

(-), -grasp, seize

-), from stems in - or - (or,

20 b)

beget, bear

(-),

( 20 e), from stems in


hope
(or by analog}):

a) A^erbs in

do

or

Verbs which add -i% (see

stems in

(-), '

injure

it,

(for

fall,

young.

larly ends in

-).

persuade (7reL0-%-, rts.


verbs have stems reduplicated with

dig

(-},

( 20 a):

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

Verbs

e)

Verbs

stems in

-, -, from

in

(^-)^

show

stems in

(^^-}.

-, -, -,
-ep, -iv, -ip, -,

in

-v,

call to witness

( 20 d):

judge

--,-

[iVw-Class]

(-).
e)

know

--arrive

perceive^

serted in the stem,

Verbs which add

(^-, ^-),

-%-,

a) A^erbs

witli

(Ik-'),

-%-

c)

(v%-, av%-^

---

unreduplicated stems:

be

- -set

(-,

Verbs with

^.

give

suffix

and

many

(-),

(-,

( 59 d)

-\--).

of the progressive action-stem does not neces-

determine the forms of the other stems.

sarily

to

^e-).

destroy, lose (for

The form

come

( 53):

{-').
b) Verbs with reduplicated stems:

show,

(XayS-),

sit

-),

cut,

and, with a nasal in-

take

find (eup-}.

NoN-THEMATiG Stems

60.

,-

drinks

from

stretch

(^-),

(^-').

d) Verbs which add a suffix containing


etc.)

( 20 c):

-, -, -,

corrupt (^/?-),

(rey-),

-,

253

While

verbs are regular, in the majority of cases the prin-

cipal parts

must be learned separately.

formation of tense-stems and action-stems

The Future.

61.

a)

The

present
future
give, F.

is

same endings as the thematic


Thus the
preceded by the suffix --.

future has the

( 53),

always thematic:

-.

stop, F.

-,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

254

b) Verbs in
future

exceptions
a /,

end,

c)
K,

have

call,

F.

etc.,

- and

verbs in

in the

(^ (^,
But there

are a

>

F.

do, F.

Verbs whose stems end in


have futures in |
y, or

|.

F.

regularly have

-.

after

teach

few-

TeXcoj

/a),

(-)^

leave, F.
have futures in
persuade, F.
, , or have futures in
d) Verbs whose stems end in a liquid or nasal (, , , ')
is then dropped
form the future by adding
In point of conju( 19 b) and the vowels contracted.
gation these futures, and also those mentioned under e),
are identical with the progressive action-stem forms of
IT,

or

'.

verbs in

( 81)
lean (/cXty-), F.

Verbs

e)

future in

f)

in

throw (/3-), F.

-^

of

syllables

few verbs are wholly irregular


see,

F.

,.

more than two

consider, F.

form the
bear, F.

62. Some verbs having active forms in the present


have middle forms in the future. These are known as
hear,
Examples are
verbs wath deponent futures.

F.

be,

F.

learn, F.

take, F.

knoiv, F.

|.

The Second

,
,
,
:

ask, F.

see,

F.

'

flee,

F.

The aorist
Root Aorist.
forms
middle)
is
of
three
action-stem (active and
1) Thematic, being the verb-root plus the thematic
(-%-'). See Lesson LIII and 84.
vowel %
63.

---

or

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

the verb-root without suffix

2) Non-thematic, being

--

stood

255

{- -'),

--- / came

to

recognize

(jyvw- <yvo-).

These aorists are very few in number, but like those


above are of great importance. See Lesson LXXII and
86.

(or -a). See 64.


3) Non-thematic, with the suffix
Formations 1) and 2) together constitute what is
known for convenience as the second aorist.
For the aorist passive stems, see 69.

The

Most verbs
First or Sigmatic Aorist.
form their aorist stem (active and middle) by adding the
suffix
See Lesson XLVII and 79 A, B.
c
Verbs whose stems end in a liquid or a nasal (, , , ,
being
18), regularly form their aorist stems in -a
omitted), and the last vowel of the stem, if short, is
64.

--.

lengthened
t

>

>

(77-),

stain

-.

>

e,

active

, -,

the perfect in

-,

66.

a)

28),

>

(^-),

i,

in the first aorist

-.

Active.
The first perfect
and is formed by adding

have loosed

().

Second Perfect Active.


The second perfect active is

I have written

cf.

. -,
{-'), .
shoiv

for

the reduplicated stem ( 58)


I have seen

(--),

/>,

ivard off

- have -

See 88, 89, 98.


has both
and

is

i,

(/cpiv-),

The First Perfect

65.

to

after

judge

{-^, .

Three verbs in
active.

(or

the perfect in -a

^), ^^, I

have fled

yi-

().

;:

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

256

perfect differs from the first only in the

The second

absence of the

Normally, a

perfect does not have a

which has a second

\^erb

first perfect, arid vice versa.

b) Verb-stems ending in

ir,

or

and

in

, ,

or

form second perfects. If the vowel preceding the final


become , and and y become
and
consonant is short,
perfects.
Examples are
aspirated
called
are
These

(/,

have injured

(,(,-^. -),

have

cut

rt.

-'),
J

rt.

st.

have guarded

^-

c) If however a long vowel precedes the final consonant,


(see
the latter ordinarily remains unchanged
do
There are some exceptions,
above).
:

(/-)

has two perfects

/ have

fared, and

have done.

perfect middle

is

Passive).
The
formed by adding the endings directly

to the reduplicated verb-stem

myself.
If

the stem ends

-,

, -,

view

Infin.

receive

Some verbs ending


to

before

in

Infin.

elai(v).

Pf.

Part.

Pf.

'-,

- drop

only before

(-),

(-),

-,
-,(-),-$.
-, .,

judge

-,-,
-

carefulbf

-, -,
(-),
-, -9
others drop the

have loosed for

injure

(--),

-.

So

in a consonant, there are the usual

euplionic changes ( 17, 18)


PF.

Part.

The Perfect Middle (and

67.

Pf.

the
;

-|,

before the endings

others, again,

change

-, -, -, .

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

- -,
- -.

(-),

appear

Infill.

257

Pf.

and

(forms in

Some vowel stems add

do not occur).

before endings not beginning

with
a short vowel at the end of the stem is regularly
lengthened and finally in some verbs a vowel is added
command,
to form the stem
;

-,

complete, Pf.

('-),

Pf.

"-,

For the accent

is

(/3-),

of the infinitive

and

The Future

Pf.

participle, see 78.

Perfect Mii)dle(-Passive).
formed by adding the future middle endings
the perfect middle stem.
This formation is rare, and

68.

This tense
to

, -,-.
".-,

Pf.

is

generally passive in sense

loosed,

shall

remember,

sJiall

have been

shall

The Aorist

Passive.
The stem of the aorist
formed by adding the sufhx -Qe {-) or - (-V;)
to the verb-stem as it appears in the perfect middle (omitting the reduplication, and with the necessary euphonic
changes, 17, 18).
In the indicative, infinitive, and
imperative (except before -vr) Ge becomes
/ was loosed,
was left (/-),
was done
rt.
ivas
made
69.

passive

is

--(-,

(-).

---

The formation
that in
in

-c,

in

called the first aorist passive

the second aorist passive.

meaning
was written
:

---

^.

is

-^,

See

---

-- -:

They do not

harmed

appeared

79 C.

Observe that the aorist passive employs only


endings.

differ

(),
((<-), --/ was

active

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

258

"

This tense is formed by


70. The Future Passive.
or
adding the future middle endings to the stem (in
-77)

of

the aorist passiA'e

shall be done,

shall be written.

FORMATION OF THE MOODS,


71.

The

Subjunctive.

The

Etc.

subjunctive

72.

The Optative.

of

all

( 53) with the

action-stems has the primary endings

lengthened thematic vowel "/?:

shall he loosed^

-t|S -t).

The optative adds to the action-

stem the secondary endings ( 55) preceded by the moodExcept in certain cases (see below) the
or
suffix

primary ending

-,

is

used instead of -v

--, .,

-The

79.

Xvo-t-s

suffix

appears before active endings only (and so occurs reguIt is always used in
larly in the aorist passive, see 69).
the

--

singular active

--'),

(,

of

Mi-verbs

, ^,

in the singular

aorist passive:

may I

be giving

active of

may I

('/,

89),

contract verbs in

and

is

he
is

(for

usual

--

always employed in the

--, --,

79 C.

In the first person singular active the secondary ending


after the long form of the mood-V is used (not

-)

suffix

-.

Before the ending -v of the third person plural the


suffix appears in the
73.

form

-- may

they he loosing.

The Imperative.

Thematic progressive
a) Thematic stems ( 53)
action-stems and aorist action-stems, both active and mid:

dle,

form the imperative by adding the personal endings


vowel ( 56).

of the imperative after the thematic

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

Of

259

is regularly omitted, and


these endings
loses
and the vowels are contracted
> eo >
19 b).
There is no imperative of the future stem, and the per-

(-

its

fect active imperative is very rare.

b) Non-thematic stems

In the

first aorist

and middle the imperative endings are added


in

--

--

( 64) active
to the stem

(or -a), except that in the second person singular

(^-)

active

middle
79 A, B.

is

and

(-oy),

supplanted by
For Mi-verbs see 86-98.

The

74.

replaced by

is

(-')

in the

(-at).

See

Infinitives.

a) Thematic stems ( 53), active The progressive, secaorist and future stems add the ending -ev, vidiich is
:

ond

(- -

then contracted with the thematic vowel


(Xeye-ev'), eiirciv

to eiv:

(aee>a)),

{eiTre-ev},

etc.

,,

b) Non-thematic stems, active The first aorist has the


ending -ai (a of the stem being omitted)

The

perfect has the ending -c-vai (a of the stem being

omitted)

-, "-^.

-, -.
The

aorist passive (see 69,

For the

infinitives of

end) has the ending

Mi-verbs see

77.

All middle and future passive infinitives have the ending


67).
75.

(-,

The

Participles.

All active participles (except

the perfect) and the aorist passive participle have the suffix
-VT.

The

The

declensions are given in 50.

perfect active participle has the suffix

-via in the feminine).

See

50 C.

(with

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

260

All middle and future passive participles end in -^VOS

- -ov.
The Verbals.

76.

The

verbals in -tos and -tos

by adding these

(see 177) are formed

suffixes to the

rerb-stem, with the necessary euphonic changes ( 17,


{irpay-),
\K-TOS
18)

(-), -09,

(a/cou -).

In the last example a

is

inserted.

The

The Mt-verbs have many pecuMi- Verbs.


which are best learned by mastering the forms
They differ from -verbs only
themselves ( 86-98).
in the progressive and second aorist action-stem systems,
77.

liarities,

aorists in

All Mi-verbs have vowel stems, except

except for the irregular


sit

( 64, end).

The Mi-verbs had

a tendency to

become

i2-verbs;

cf.

88.

Accent of Verb-forms.

a) Verb-forms generally have recessive accent,

word

and

be (eV-)

{-}.

5 for
78.

first

i.e.

the

accented as far from the end as possible (see 9).


Final -ai is usually treated as a short syllable X-ucxai.
is

i\Iany

of the

contracted forms are apparent exceptions.

Other exceptions are


b)

The accent never precedes an augment

tion.

c)

The second

aorist active infinitive

circumflex on the final syllable

or reduplica-

in -lv has the

d) So also the second aorist middle imperative in


put in! 88.
become!

e)

But

the latter

sell! 89.

when compounded with

prepositions have recessive accent:

-:

dissyllabic

put down!

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

g)

behold!

But

Compoiinds

f)

penult

say

, -5

of

Bts,

S,

give back

and

261
accent the

provide

come! go! ivpi find!

vhen uncompounded accent

dTT-cnre speak out

the

give

take!
final

ihi

syllable.

up !

h) The following regularly accent the penult: (1) first


aorist active infinitives
KeXevaai
(2) second
aorist middle infinitives
perfect
middle
(3)

- ,,.
:

,
,,

(and passive) infinitives and participles

i)

and

All participles.

all participles in

final syllable in the

$, 5,

(4)

all infinitives in

All second aorist participles in

-ous -us have the acute on the

nominative singular masculine

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

262

CONJUGATION OF THE VERB


-VERBS
79.

(stem

Conjugation of

-)

loose,

unbind,

set

free, etc.

A. Active Voice.
Progkessive Action-stem

- - -
-
SrBj

Indio.

S.

1.

2. Xv-is
3.

P.

2.

-
-

3.

-<,()

1.

Impeb.

Opt.

Present Tense

Infin.

- -<
-

60

-()

Past-Imperfect
Tense
S. 1.

P.

--

2,

--68

3.

--()

1.

--

2.

--

3.

-Future Tense-stem

Future Tense
S. 1.
2.
3.

1.

2.
3.

<-

(-

<-8

(No
subjunctive)

<-

-<()
1

Very

rare,

[<(-
"-
(-]

and only

-eiv

(No
imperative)

in indirect discourse.

(-

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


AoRisT Action-stem
SUB.I.

Indic.

Paet-Aorist
S. 1.
2.

3.

P.

1.

2.
3.

--

Teitf^e

*-

-as

-(()

<-|

-(

(-

-- (-
- (-()

..

< -

Perfect Action-stem
Present Perfect

(Subjunctive,

- <- '
Opt.

optative,

and

263

Partic.

\v<ras

50

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

264

Progressive Action-stem
Indio.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

265

Perfect Action-stem
Opt.

SUBJ.

Indio.

^
'
,

^
Paktic.

Present Perfect
Tenise

S. 1.
2.
8.

1.

2.

3.

S. 1.

2.

3.

Past Perfect {Plu-

-'-

1.

perfect) Tense
S. 1.
2,

3.

P.

1.

2,
3.

4$

.2.

-'

3.

5
'

(()

iV

^
(

-'

Future Perfect
Tense

S. 1.
2.

3.

1.

2.
3.

"

or

(No

<
-

subjunctive)

[<

(No

imper-

-<]

C. The Passive Voice.


The middle forms of the progressive action-stem and

of

the perfect action-stem are either middle or passive in

But in the
and future systems there are separate forms for the

sense, according to the verb or the context.


aorist

passive, as follows
1

There are no forms of the perfect middle (passive) imperative

common

use except that of the third person singular

been loosed.
2

Very rare

only in indirect discourse.

let it

in

have

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

266

First Aorist

and Future Passive (69, 70).


AoRiST Action-stem

Indic.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


Progressive Action-stem

267

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

268

S. 2.

P.

3.

2.

3.

Lmpekativk

-")
-ere)

Ivfixitite

iroiei

/e-e)

-)

(^iroie-eiv)

Pabticiple

(-)

iroitL

iroieiTt

50

Past-Impep.fect IxmcATivB
S. 1. (iwoie-op)
2.

3.

P.

FtnrEE
AoEisT

-e)

itroUi

-)

-'f)

3.

-.
-.

Peefect

iroiiis

2.

eiroiow

-es)

-ov)

'.

-.

.
(^)

conjugated like

conjugated like

-.

conjugated like

Middle (^Passive) A'^oice:


making {doing ) for myself, lam being made.
Progressive Actiox-stem

lam

THU FIBST YEAR OF GREEK

Past-Imperfect Indicative
S. 1.

P.

{(-6)

2.

-01')

3.

-)

1.

2.

-) 7.
-) -
-)

-,
: ,
-,
3.

FtTTiTRE

conjugated like

82.

Contract Verbs

A.

Active Voice:

-.
-.

.
.

conjugated like

conjugated like

Perfect:

AoR. Pass.

conjugated like

in

-.

(^')

I ask

Progressive Action-stem

a question.

269

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

270

P.

Future:

1.

-)

2.

-ere)

3.

-ov)

-,

-,
-,

conjugated like

or

Aorist:

conjugated like
conjugated like

or

conjugated like

Middle (Passive) Voice

.
;

-,

(^^

trial of, try.

Pbogkessive Action-stem

84

.
make

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


P.

1.

2.

-,
3.

AoKisT

83.

, .

eiriipoo-ee

conjugated like

conjugated like

(^)

<.

-.

CoNTKACT Verbs in
Active Voice

-6)

-)
-)

271

make

clear,

Progrkssive Action-stem
Present Indicative
S. 1.

(\6-)

2.

-us)

3.

-ei)

P.l.

-)

2.

-ere)

3.

-overt)

\6-)
-T)s)

-()

. 2.

-ere)

3.

-(>)

--)
--{)

--)

-)

-)

-y]Te)

-otre)

-)

-)

(/-/)

Past-Impj)rfect Indicative

(\)

P.l.

-)

2.

-6)

S. 1.
2.

-es)

3.

-e)

3. (

-0J')

Declined like

Participle

Infinitive

(-)

-e)

3.

-;)

Imperative

S. 2.

Optative

Subjunctive

50

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

272

Middle (Passive) Voice.

B.

Progressive Action-stem
Subjunctive

Pkbsent Indicative

(-)

S. 1.

P.

2.

-ei, r?)

-)

3.

-erat)

-ijrai)

1.

-6)

-)

2.

-ecrSe)

3.

-ourai)

Imperative

(-)

S. 2.

3.

2.

3.

-)
-^

Optative

{-)

(^-)

(-/^)

-)

{7]\6-)

-)

(-/)

Infinitive

\6-()

Participle

(-!)

-)
Past-Imperfect Indicative
S. 1.
2.

84.

(-)
-)

3.

1.

2-

3.

The Thematic

-ero)

-)
-) -)

Aorist, together Avith the

Thematic

Progressive Forms, for the sake of comparison.

A. Active Voice.
Progressive Action-stem
Present Indicative
S.

/ am

learning

2.

3.

Past-Imperfect Indicative

I was

Aorist Action-stem

'

AoRTST

I learned

learning

()

()

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

273

274

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

---

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


:

replied.

1.

2.

3.

P. 1.
2.

3.

answer, reply

Aor.

to

(lit.,

-- - - -Indicative

S.

Middle Voice
words) /or owese^).

B.

cAoose (one's

275

--

-
-
air-e

86.

Optative

Imperative

'-
-,Participle

Non-thematic Second Aorists.

See

Intake (something) stand ( 87).

I stood

-(>

- -

-
Infinitive

Subjunctive

(- -).

63.

Sec. Aor.

276

C.

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK


and

I enter.

Sec. Aor.

I entered.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


Progressive Action-stem

277

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

278

P.

1.

2.

FuTCEE

(first

3.

5 <,
aorist

(ending

in

<
-)

in the singular of the indicative

elsewhere, second aorist.


Indic.

See 64.

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK


A. Active Voice.
Progressive Action-stem
Pkes. Indic.

279

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

280
Past-Imperfect

Future and perfect are regular

2.

-6
-'

3.

F.

1.

90.

. P.
.

.
6.

(only in

Subj.

compounds
Opt.

\.

point

Active Voice.

as

Impek.

-
. .

out,

show,

eSiSocrOc cSCSovto.

compare

- - - Second Aokist

Indic.

S. 1.

.
---- .

SCSooO ISCSoto

F.

I sold)

Infix.

'-$

78 e

,.

c8ci|a,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

281

Progressive Action-stem

8( 8 8

Pres. Indic.
S. 1.
2.

3.

8'

(
. .
lam

Scikvvt)

Past- Imperfect

8-

91.

Inkin.

Paktio.

SciKwoOai

8$

(rt. e?).

Indicative

Subjunctive

Optative

Imperative

(-

S. 1.

P.

Impkh.

Opt.

Sun.i.

(-)

2.

(I

3.

<()

1.

-'

2.

3.

lr(v)

Infinitive

Participle

ovcra

50

{-) <()

Past-Imperfect Indicative
S. 1.
2.

or

55

3.

P.

1.

2,

3.

Future Indicative
S.

1.

'-

2.

crei

3.

P.

1.

2.

3.

Optative

Infinitive

Participlb

6<-

<-$

6(0,0

<

<roiTO

-(

'itrtfrQt

92.

<]

/ am

conjugated like

present and

( 91), thus

/ am

absent are

All forms of the present indicative are enclitic, except

Very rare

only in indirect discourse.

el.

T^ FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

282

--

Optative

Indicative Subjunctive
S.

1.

2.
3,

-ci

\.

irap-fi

Past-Imperfect

So
93.
S.l.

'-,
.1

'-8

irap-fjs

-<()

-,

am

Imperative

,-]

---

\.

-.

-.
:

going

(rt. el-

Infinitive

Fi-ti:re

1-.

-(..

Cf. Lat. ire).

Participlb

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK


'.

1.

283

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

284
96.

(rt.

-^

sit;

found only

in the progressive

action-stem, and in prose (as frequently also in poetry)

-( -
-.
- -- .
.

regularly

compounded with

Indicative
S. 1.
2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

down, thus

Subjunctive Optative

Impbeative

Infinitive

Participle

\.

--

-(

Past-Imperfect:

97.

,
-.

Like
thus
s.

(rt. kcl-

is

-)

lie,

F.

frequently com2)ounded with

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

285

--

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

286
often

modified, tlius

(^-,

mind, self-control

omitted)

soundness of
a thing

{-,

-05

(-, final vowel lengtliened

made, poem

sta-

Ablaut or vowel-gradation ( 16)


plays here an important role
carry, bring,
a
tion

added).

carrying, bringing.

FOKMATION OF SlMPLE WORDS.

I.

The following

some

are

A. NoUNS

the suffixes employed to

of

indicate:

Agent, or simply the person concerned in the action

, nom.

-:

-$
, --

-Os

horseinan

linr-eijs

{-^.

pupil

nom.

{Bo-),

Feminine

-6

tl8,

nom.

>

,
- (
nom.

unsdom.

-:

nom.
nom. -09
nom. -9
nom.
:

odor

-id:

{cf.

\-

-05 earthquake {,
becoming
,
-/
-: 05 youthfulness

truth.

endure).
shake).

(jev- yov-).

"yeve-ais act of

justice,

housemaid

(-)).

smell

-(
hardihood

-eid)

(oi/CO-9)

, nom.

>

-epia

oIk-tls

-tis:

Action, quality, etc.

giver

speaker {pe- speak).

suffixes are

queen.

, nom.

(-^.

nom.

(veo-?).

---{ {-(-
{

Instrument, means:

-,

nom.

-lov:

10,

j^our

plough

Place

cup

pot

drink

(^- -)).

(- -)).

nom.

p>lough).

nom. -lov:
Hence c-io, nom.
muse).

forge

Those

coppersmith).

Muses
come from nouns
seat of the

-ciov:

in

--. THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

-:
, num. -:
thenon (-^^.

senate-house

in

287

(^^.

maidens apartment, Par-

Diminution (often implying affection, contempt, etc.):


10,

nom.

-lov:

.-,

little child,

(),

young hoy

nom.
nom.
nom.
young

-,

(').

daddy

-lov:
-lov

-,
girl.

Adjectives

There are many adjectival suffixes. Some of the more


o, a, nom. -os, -, or -a: Xonr-os remaining

important are:

(- -:

-)).

(\enr- Xoltt-

nom.

-(-

S,

ural

lo,

y\f6vh-r\s false,

-5

nature},

warm;

ivo

ta

-ios heavenly.

}: -09
, nom. -:, -

nat-

(/co,

-ivos genuine.

ivarlike.

mindful.
II.

Formation of Compound Words

The Greek language formed and still forms innumerable


compounds. These are divided according to the nature
(1) of the

first

element, (2) of the second element.

A. The first part


a) adverb:

is

^-^

often an

well-horn;

b) preposition (see 123-129):


hoth sides (of the shore-line), amphibious
c)

numeral

events ;

d) an inseparable prefix

-,

contest

living on

consisting

of five

-9

-, expressing negation {A-privative')


hlood); a-iraGeia
cf. anaemic

without hlood,

an ahsence of

suffering, apathy.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

288

((-?
(

--

-, denoting uyiion (^A-copulative^


of the same tvomh, brother

- -
ill:

dysentery

soften).

>- (Latin semi-):


B.

hall),

The

last

womb').

evrepa

the

in-

dyspepsia

testines);

one born

hemisphere

ripen,

element of compound nouns or adjectives

regularly consists of a verb-stem or noun-stem.

In the

-$
-$ - -

-5

latter case the

noun

(,

merry

dishonored

or adjective usually changes its form

diaphragm, mind);

().

Compounds generally have recessive


But there are many exceptions

Cf. 78 a.

accent.

leads a boy (to school, etc.);

father,

one

who

throiving-stones,

pelted with stones;

cf.

killing one" 8

slain by one's father.

cf.

AGREEMENT
100.

neuter plural subject regularly has

the singular

the trees are

its

verb in

(Greek

is)

beautiful.

101.

neuter predicate-adjective

is

very often used as

the substantive-predicate of a masculine or feminine subject

102.

relative

the accusative case


the antecedent,

if

wealth

is

(a) blind (thing).

pronoun which Avould normally be in


is

regularly assimilated to the case of

the latter

is

a genitive or a dative: b

Croesus the first

irpiuTos

of the foreigners

).

whom we know

(about)

(=

THE FIBST YEAR OF GREEK

289

USES OF THE ARTICLE AND OF THE FRONOUNS


103.

The

to the ( 24), was originally a


in Attic Greek it has

article,

demonstrative pronoun, and even

the force of a demonstrative in certain uses


a)

The

article

frequently (jenerie in

is

dXXos

see 191.

reference

the friend (i.e. generally

speak-

ing, a friend) is another self.

b) The article

'
we

use a

very

c)

weak

is

frequently employed where in English

possessive Qcf. the

German usage)

does the father (i.e. your father) love you

much ?

With proper names and with abstract nouns


may be used or may be omitted:

article

d) The noun

is

are the

(possessions')

beautiful, oi

often omitted

supplied from the context

when

it

Cf

also

of friends.

the

or

wisdom.

or

Aristotle.,

the

can easily be

common
the

many.

104. 1) When a noun is preceded by the article any


modifying word or phrase usually stands immediately
after the article, either

a) before the noun,

i.e.

.
,- .

in English

b) after the noun, the

between the article and noun, as


or

article being repeated:

This position of the modifier (for the two a) and b)


are really one) is known as the attributive position.
c)

third attributive position

2i,iiv\h\\te

is

when the

article

follow the noun (the afterthought position)

and

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

290

^.

and attribute is rare, espeLesson XI,


When the modifying word or phrase is not preceded
2.
by the article, either before or after the noun, it is said to
This position of the

article

cially in prose (but see

,,^

stand in the predicative position

The

of personal

genitive

<;,

tive position

pronouns

(,

,,

regularly stands in the predica-

';'),

(never 6

( 106).

105. Demonstrative pronouns ( 24, 25) regularly


stand in the predicative position ( 104, 2):

The demonstrative may precede


or

this

').

this book (not

man.

But with the names of persons

or follow

the article

avr\p

may

he omitted:

or

this Socrates, Socrates here.

The intensive pronoun


( 22) is used in
and
Exercise
Lesson
V
three ways (see
4)
1) In apposition with a noun or pronoun it emphasizes
I (my)self.
and means self:
accompanied
by the article,
noun
is
the
when
So
106.

being in the predicative position ( 104, 2)


or

2)
(the')

When

it is itself

preceded hy

the article

self(same), the same, the very

the

3)

the teacher himself.

The

same

(one')

means

itself:

brother.

oblique cases (genitive, dative, accusative)

when

used alone serve as the personal pronoun of the third perthem.


her,
him,
son
:

'

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

107.

each (of two),

both,

291

many) generally stand in the predicate position


With
the article is often omitted
( 104, 2).
with the accompanying noun
or

each (of

(^)

108.

each day

The pronouns

but

( 23) are generally

But sometimes they serve as indirect reflexives, and in some indirect reflexives:

knoiv thyself!

stances refer not to a subject but to a dependent Avord

'"
109.

Possession

is

etc. (see 104, 2

my,

expressed by

106, 3)

your,

by
my own

cise 15);

103

b.

of me,

of you,

by the pronominal adjectives


your (see Exer-

our,

Relation-

very frequently suggested by the


For the dative, see 120 a.
is

both mean this;

and

110.

of myself, etc. ( 108):


child (or, simply, my child).

ship or possession
article,

from yourself I shall instruct you.

that.

Of

usually refers to what precedes (so

the former

manner).

the following

exactly reversed.

to what follows (so


But sometimes these relations

in the preceding manner)

may

Even

refer forward

in

are

answer this!
These pronouns are often used in lieu of our emphatic
RU, SHE, THEY, etc. (i.e. the Greeks said this (one),
that (one), those, these, etc.):

SHE permits you


Note

also

doing?
( 10 c)

and

to

do these things.

toOt'

that too.

''
;

here he

or

you there ! what are you


that

is!

thafs

it !

is

to

say

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

292

USES OF THE CASES


111.

In the declension of nouns, pronouns, etc., Greek


nominative, genitive, dative,
five cases

distinguishes

and vocative. These correspond to the six


cases in Latin and to tlie eight cases in the parent language from which both Greek and Latin were descended.
In other Avords, as Greek developed into a separate language, three of the original ca.se-form8 were discarded and
their functions or meanings were assumed and expressed
The ablative, which
by one of the other case-forms.
expressed the idea "/roTW," was thus absorbed by the
the instrumental (" with ") and the locative
genitive
"
(" ow,"
in," " among "), by the dative, thus
accusative,

-,

Latin

Nominative

Geeek

Vocative

Vocative (address)

Accusative

-Accusative (object)

Genitive

From

>

Acciisative
^ - -Genitive

Genitive ("o/")

"
Ablative ( from " ) - "
"?/"')"-^
^^-Zl~~Instnimental
^'Locative (" on,^^ " in," " among'''')
Dative C^for,'^ "
'

Ablative -z~w

Dative

Nominative
Vocative

Nominative (subject)

'

(","

")

..^-^^

SsS.Dative

meanings and
Greek divided
the pure ablative

this table it is at once clear that the

constructions of the Latin

between the genitive

and

ablative are
the

dative,

in

the Latin
Q'-from ") being expressed by the genitive
instrumental-2i\Adit\\Q {''with" "?/") and the Latin loca;

tive-ablative Q'on,'' "

in,''

''

among'''),

hj the dative.

In

Greek, therefore, the meanings and constructions of the


those of the
genitive case fall into two broad classes
:

pure genitive ("o/") and those of the ablatival-gQmiivQ

;;

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

293

Q'-from"}, and the meanings and constructions of the


those of the pure
dative must be divided into three sets
dative ( '"for,"'' " to "), of the instrumental-dfitiye, and of
:

the locative-diitive.

The

which prepositions may be employed


But the piire geniand the pure dative ("/or") never employ

cases w^ith

are indicated in the table by italics.


tive ("(>/'")

prepositions.

112.

The nominative

vocative

113.

The

is

sometimes used for the

uses of the accusative are virtually identical

with those in Latin

a) Object:
fighting a

case

so regularly Beds Qnever 0ee).

see

/ am

you;

(^Qognate accusative.)

battle.

b) Double object

I am

teaching the hoy geometry.


c)

Object and predicate-accusative

we

call the

d) Accusative
Xshilled')

of

man

Specification

in all things;

by birth.
e) Adverbial accusative:

much;

way, with
f)

way;

in every

all

speed

a sophist.
:

in what

way?

greatly

first ;
(sc. ohov^

wise

an Athenian

in the quickest

why ?

Accusative of Extent of Time or Space :


there he remained five days.

(or
yes by., ov
g) Accusative in Oaths with
no by.
See p. 13.
For the accusative with prepositions, see 126 ff.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

294

as subject of

175

an

iufinitive,

172

accusative absolute,

h.

114.

The

genitive

is

in

Greek

compound

case ( 111),
some abla-

of its uses being genitival in origin (" o/"'),

some

few of its uses are difficult to classify.


(^Adnominal Genitive) the geninouns
When used with
tive may express a large number of relationships, such as
tival ("-from ").

possession^ subject,
etc.,

cause, part, material, measure,

object,

exactly as in English: love of friends, cup of water,

piece of advice, worship of Grod, etc.


In certain phrases the noun upon

which the genitive


depends is omitted, so that the genitive appears to be
to the
(sc.
governed by a preposition ts

"

doctors

(sc.

to

els

house');

the

teachers,

to

in (the house) of Hades.


school; Iv
The genitive with a noun is frequently employed in the
predicate in any of the foregoing relations

for

it is

"

(the nature) of the free-born to

speak the truth.


115.

With verbs

the genitive

is

either the object of

the verb or serves as an adverbial modifier thereto (e.g.

116

f).

With

the following groups of

believed to be of partitive origin

a) Share:

verbs the genitive

is

with verbs meaning

-;

.-

why

dont you share your conversation with us ?


b) Enjoy, taste
enjoy
c)

all the

Touch.

good things.
taJce

hold

of,

make

trial of:

ov

she does not prevent you


these things.

we
-uci

ae

from handling

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


d)

Aim

desire

at, strive after,

295
rot

Ipd of (all the^ gods Death alone yearneth not

ov

after gifts (i.e. bribes') (Aesch3'lus).

e) Reach, obtain, hit (and miss)

(Sophocles).

toils

Begin:

f)

follows.

-,

(Jiear, smell, etc.)

PaaiXeiici

neglect:

-,

a sound.

Fill, be full

j)

he began his speech as

"

Perceive

i)

-|

will never attain the heights without

g) Mule, lead, be leader of:


Love is king of the gods (Plato).
li) Memember, forget, care for,
dont heed, any one I

I hear

you

of :

whenever one praises

the beautiful,

them, become filled with pride (Plato).

The

116.

genitive

used with verbs also to express

is

other relations, some of which are

Thus

origin ( 111).

a)
etc.

clearly of ablatival

it is

employed with verbs meaning:

Cease from, remove from, release from, be distant from,

the island

being not far distant from the mainland.

b)

Want,
he

lack,

empty:

who does no wrong needs no

Note especially the phrases


lacks much)

(lit., it

(i.e.

it

lacks little);

nearly

all.

laiv

(Antiplion).
it is

far from

(or simplj- 6\iyov) almost

almost nothing;

c) Differ from, surpass, be inferior

to,

etc.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

296
but

gentlemen, here also in this respect differ

I,

from

the

majority of people (Socrates).


The genitive with verbs often denotes the
cl)

Source:

ME you shall hear

all the truth

from

'

(Socrates),

e) Price, value :

at the price of toils the gods sell to us all blessings

(Eijicharmus)

for how much

irevxe

does he teach? for five minae.


f)

Cause (with verbs meaning admire, wonder

blame, be angry, etc.)

praise,

at,

envy thee for thy wisdom, but detest thee for thy
cowardice (Sophocles).

-,

g) Crime (with verbs denoting a judicial

action')

am prosecuting for

slan-

der and ami on trial for murder (Lysias).

note
h) The genitive often follows compound verbs
down upon, (^down)
compounded with

especially those

against

despise thy youth! (Paul).

117.

The

genitive

is

let

no one

used also with many adjectives,


meaning the verbs

--

especially with those that parallel in

mentioned in 115-116.

Such are

a) aiTios cause of accountable for

part in; d|ios worthy of;


the like.

different

b) adjectives of the comparative degree

lowed either by the genitive or by


let your talk
Tt
(Menander).

having no

from ; and

these are fol-

than
be better

(=

quani)

than silence

118. With adverbs also the genitive is very frequent.


See especially the so-called improper prepositions, 130.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


Finally the genitive

119.

denote the time


by day ;
ing

ivitkin

is

used adverbially to

itself

which un action takes place

during the day ;

in the even-

in winter ; Ocpous in sum-

vuKTos at night;

297

during five years.


mer ; irevxe
For the genitive with prepositions

see 124

ff.

for the

genitive absolute^ 175 g.

Like the genitive, the dative is a compound case


is used properly of persons and
when used of things, personi-

120.

The true dative


( 111).
expresses personal interest ;

fication

"/or "

is

The

present.

sometimes "

rich for another

true dative

commonly means

" better suits the English idiom

to

man

such a

itXoutcl

and not for

himself,

is
;

(lit., what shall I learn for


what would you have me
you?) The last sentence illustrates what is commonly

learn ?

known as the
The dative
:

-,

employed

the possessor with

a) of

verbs

ethical dative.

of interest is

also

and similar
is for ms

have a brother {there

a brother).

b) of the agent Avith verbals in -tos and -reos ( 177),


and with the passive perfect (and pluperfect) when the
subject
city

must

avTOis
(i.e.

is

not personal

be benefited

by you

the

(strictly for

tuhen preparations

you)

had been made by

for) them.

c) of the indirect object

give

8os

me

the

book.

So the dative is used with a large number of verbs


vhich in English are usually transitive, e.g. verbs meaning help, please, obey, serve, meet, be

like,

etc.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

?
,
?
9
298

help

me! rots

if

it

irciGou obey the laivs

l tois

resembles the preceding (instances).

d) with adjectives, adverbs, and nouns which are of


kindred derivation or meaning with verbs that govern
the dative

hostile to

equal

to

freedom ;

each other.

.121. The in strumental-(\.'dX\\e ( 111) expresses instrument^ means, manner, respect, cause, association, accompani-

ment, etc.

fact;

5?
in

KOLxnj

this

ttovois by

common;

(ivay')

little

friends.

Note especially

(i.e.

by a head")

equal in temper;

in which (ivay^

in

labors;

a head shorter

in silence

in
;

take delight in (please myself with) good

and

use (i.e. serve oneself ivith)

folloiv

and

follow

he

me !
had

formerly used the room as a store-room.


1l22.

The

'

Zgca^ip-flflt.ive

expresses

a) Time (the day, night, month, year, festival, etc.)

day;

the third

on the same day

on the preceding day;

month;

on the folloiving

07i

ctcl in the tenth year;

vaiois at the Panathenaea.

This is more common in poetry in prose it


at Marathon.
found only with proper names
The dative is used with many compound verbs and with
prepositions
see 125 ff.
b) Place.

is

THE PREPOSITIONS
123.

The

prepositions were originally adverbs and only

gradually became stereotyped as prepositions governing

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


The

299

was retained in some


which abounds
Prepositions are employed as
in the pages of Herodotus.
the first element (or elements) of innumerable compound
words see 99. Frequently, too, a preposition with its
cases.

original adverbial force

instances, as in

and

next, afterward,

case

is

repeated after the

compound

The

leap off from the horse.


prepositions are used with the genitive, dative,
to

and

accusative cases ( 111).

The

124.

prepositions which govern the genitive case

(, '

only are
a)
against):

6) instead of (original

what account f why?


In compounds
[anti-, ant-]

(,

b)

from

in return for

'

6;

the beginning ;

In compounds
back),

etc.

ills.

against, in opposition, in return, instead.

Lat.

'

from^ awag from: air'


from which

ah")

(sc.

^')

time, since.

give

meaning,
tlvos; on

instead of peace;

from, away, in return, hack

(-^

and often suggesting completion, exhaustion,


to be

utterly coivardly.

[apo-, ap-, aph-]

Lat. ex, e) out


c) | (before a consonant e'/c
out from the city ; |
from : Ik tt]S

'"9

from what you say ;


voias from set purpose, ivith
In compounds:
tion:

d)

irpo

(sc.

before

out,

from childhood;

irpo

out

irpo-

design.

from,

often implying comple-

etc.,

learn by heart,

) ^~)

of,

[ec-, ex-]

before this

before the town

formerly.

In compounds

in behalf

before^ forth^

in prefer-

of,

[pro-]

enee.

Prepositions with the dative only

125.
a) V

18

7-

(At-, e\-,

among, on: kv

in,

OF GREEK

THE FIRST YEA

300

b, c,

Lat. in with ablative)

among us ;

in the beginning ; kv

on a stately chair.

In compounds

m,

(-,

b)
old form

-, -, -,

avy-,

with:

tols

the aid of

ivith

0c3

em-]

[en-, el-,

on, at.

18

my

b, c, e

friends;

Prose usually (and


with the genitive.

God.

quently also poetry) employs

with

fre-

with, together, altogether.

Compounds

are frequent in prose as well as in poetry,

[syn-, sym-,

In compounds

syl-, sys-, sy-]

126.

With

the accusative only

LS, Is (orig.

^
;

Lat. in with accusative) into, to;

morroiv

to ten ;

Is tl

els

to

In compounds:
127.

a)

^amounting')

for speaking ; els

what (^end)

on the

until; Is

into the city; S

is

used

is

?
Of. episode

into, in, to.

(--).

Prepositions with the genitive and accusative only:


(hi

Lat.

a) Genitive

di-, dis-')

through:

ttoXcws through the city ;

iravTos constantly ;

'

me ;
') Accusative

of^ wickedness;

for
In compounds

through

(i.e.

by)

after a long time.

this reason

through

(i.e.

on account

on what account?
;

through, also apart

(-

why?

because.

send in

;
;:

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

- {\ '
different

directions^

sugs^esting

often

b)

along, according

down (doionfrom, down

6)
to,

Trerpas

down from

'

{down) upon

beneath the earth


/S)

by sea;

me ;

c) virtp (for

both by land

along the road, on the

toOs

according

a) Genitive

19

to the

to

laws.

[cata-]

Lat. super) over:

above, on behalf of

(the) head;

and

way

according

down, back, against, completely

the rock

head;

the

against us.

day by day ;

In compounds

against^

down-stream;

Accusative:

'

etc.

etc.):

$
"'

a) Genitive

completion,

[dia-, di-]

destroy utterly,

down

301

over

xiirep

on behalf of the

city,

beyond Sicily

Accusative: beyond: virkp

more than half;

yond

{one's) power.

In compounds
ceedingly,

over, above, beyond, in

defence of

ex-

[liyper-]

With

128.

be-

the dative and accusative only

is

used

(^av) up:

a) Dative

upon a

upon (only

poetry)

sceptre,

Accusative

horizontal
river

in

up

along,

motion

by hundreds;

over, through,

among, of

through the army

up

the

every

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

302

day.
Not common
Xenophon.

In compounds

with the

Prepositions

129.

[ana-]

hack, again,

up.,

in Attic prose except in

genitive.,

and

dative.,

ac-

cusative :

('

a)

hence

Lat. ambi-}, originally on both sides,

Attic

In

about.

what they had.

ling about
/8)

Dative:

his wife.

7) Accusative

with

cliietty

accusative.

a) Genitive

used

prose

quarrel-

in fear about

about Miletus

the

ol

Croesus and those with him.

In compounds

on both sides, about, around, for the sake

[amphi-]

of.

(eV,

b)

'

6)

upon, on:

?
"?

a) Genitive:

during

time

rats

sickness

irl

ness;

ttjs

'

7 our

upon the couches ;


upon (in addition to^

Trl

something

the earth;

lifetime ;

four deep.

eirl

Dative

my

to

make

it

to

a profession ;

$
sick-

be

learning

lirl

tovtois

on these conditions.

7) Accusative
through:
horse;

eirl

for a time;

upo7i,

up

to,

to,

towards,

against,

mounting

hri

Btipas to the doors; cirl

'

for one's hurt.

for

five

years;

his

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


In compounds
for.

c)

upon,

at,

toward,

'

against,

among:

6) with,

(/^er,

a) Genitive: with: ol .'

Dative

m addition,

to,

eph-]

[epi-, ep-,

/3)

303

those with us.

among, amid (Homeric).

7) Accusative

into the midst, after

of), after (in time or

rank)

search

(i.e. in

after

this.

(^-(^-(-88

In compounds
of), after

share with

seiid for,

Dative

; cf.

from (most frequent with


from me.

'

at

my

with

house.

motion to (in prose only of permotion along, by, past (a place) along-

Accusative
side

beside,

with, beside, at the house of (usually

persons)
sons)

"

from

persons)

also de-

alongside, by, near:

a) Genitive

it

[meta-, met-, meth-]

()

d)

carry over, change

notes change or reversal

metaphor),

give a share

summon)

contrary

'

to

'

to

me ;

along the coast of the mainland; trap'


in each deed;

trary to expectation.

In compounds

alongside,

misunderstand),

by, past,

amiss

con-

(-

[para-, par-]

e) TTcpi around (on

a) Genitive:

all sides),

about,

about:

concerning:

ircpi^;

what

about ?
1

Trepi

syllable.

often follows

its

noun, in which case

it is

accented on the

first

??

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

304
/3)

Dative:

about their necks;

ircpl ,Tots

KuPetiCLV irepl xois

to

take risks with

one's dearest possessions.

Accusative

around the PeloKvpov Cyrus and his fol-

ircpl

ponnesus;

ol TTCpl

lowers.

In compounds
vive'),

f)

exceedingly

around, beyond

(-^

(^-

very glad),

irpos at, by (^fronting), near:

a) Genitive

irpos

talcing

by the gods

your side;

-?

irpos

way of Cyrus ;
agreed by all.

characteristic of the
irpos

it is

Dative: irpos

sur-

irpos

"6

near the city ; irpos

iroXet

TOts in addition

excel,

[peri-]

to these thiiigs, besides.

to the light; irpos


7) Accusative irpos
in view of these considerations.
:

In compounds

g) \1
]

a) Genitive

toward, against, in addition,

to,

(, *
:

under, by (of

under
Dative
7) Accusative
"YTJS

the earth;

tlie

'

agent or cause): viro


by me.
to staiid

to

[pros-]

19; Lat. sub) under:

6, for

(a place) under,

towards or during (of time)

0-

under a

tree.

(along) under,
viro

the side subtends the angle;

at nightfall, also during the night.

In

compounds

under,

behind,

secretly,

gradually.

[hypo-, hyp-, hyph-]


130. In addition to the prepositions proper ( 128129) are the improper prepositions, or prepositions which
are never used in composition.
Examples are

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


With

a)

the genitive:

without, apart from; i-yyvs


in the presence

near; p,irpoa0ev in front of;


before, against ; evcKa, VKV on account

with regard
within
to

(cf.

(usually follows

to

eveKa

account,

out

of,

so

adverb

cept to

ME)

except

Ivros

behind

ME (often also a conjuncclear to every one ex-

together tvith, at the

together with, close to (cf

6<;

motion:

- $?

came

Perdiccas and into Chalcidice.

to

YOU)

straight toward,

apart from, ivithout.

c) Accusative

b) With the dative


with;

noun

between;

except:
tival

its

of
of for the sake of
eveKa on which

far as concerns

beyond (of time)

straight)

305\

to,

of persons only,

same time

similar to).
after verbs of

he

es

THE VERB

Ways

of regarding Action; Action-stems.


Every action can be regarded in one of three ways:

131.

can be thought of as being in progress, can be visualized, as it were, as it proceeds from step to step (" to
or again, it can be regarded
be writing ") [time-exposure]
merely as an occurrence, its actual duration, whether long
first, it

or brief, being for the time ignored ("

shot]

or, thirdly, it

to write

") [snap-

can be thought of as completed ("

to

have written"").

To express these three different ways of regarding action


the majority of verbs in Greek form stems which are
known
this

and

as action-stems.

book

The

first

is

the progressive action-stem,^ as the

in consequence all forms built


1

of these

upon

it

called in

stem

itself

invite one to

Usually, but incorrectly, called the present stem.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

306

regard the action as

-- |

beiJig in process,

from the stem


from the stem
writing,

--,

thus

and

"

ive

being in the act of learning,

So

act is called the


;

being in the act of

The stem which merely names

holding (having^, etc.

undefined)

"^-

are both forms

of the progressive action-stem (see 52, 53).

%-

to he

are writing,

aorist action-stem

see Lesson

(^-

XL\"II and

the

unlimited,

The

136.

third

stem is the perfect action-stem.


In addition to these three action-stems there are two
time-stems ; namely, the future and the future-perfect timeAll of the forms built upon these
stems (or tense-stems).
two stems (indicative, optative, infinitive, participle) refer
to

future time; see

133.

Ways

132.

Time.

of regaeding Action and Position in


As there are three ways of regarding action

( 131), so there are three time relations or j)ositions in


These two sets of relations
time: present, past, future.

each other

cross

they are not parallel.

That

is

to say,

the time-distinctions are superimposed upon the actiondistinctions (see 133), thus

I shall

I am

writing,

The

133.

Tenses.

The action-stems

in themselves express position in time.

mood

I was

ivriting,

be writing, etc.

is

( 131) do not
indicative

The

the realm of time-distinctions, and here by add-

ing certain prefixes or suffixes, or both, are obtained the


tenses.

These are seven in number, as follows

Present

Past-Aorist

Past-Imperfect

Present-Perfect

Future

Past- Perfect (Pluperfect)

Future-Perfect

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

307

Of these the present, which is regularly a presentand the past-imperfect (or past-progressive),

progressive,

usually called merely the imperfect, are both formed on

the progressive action-stem.


future-tense stem, as

end).
is

The

formed

is

The

future

formed on a

is

also the future-perfect ( 131,

past-aorist, usually

termed merely the

on the aorist action-stem

'- /

aorist,

wrote.

Theoretically there should have been formed also a presPerhaps such


ent-aorist corresponding to our ''I write.'"
I declare, say. For the tenses
a form is found in

of the perfect action-stem see 137, 138.

The scheme

of stems, tenses,

and moods

is

set forth in

79.

Uses of the Action-stems and the Tenses

134.

The

present

tetise

( 133)

is

in general

employed

Greek
he sends
more common in Greek
(for he sent^ heralds.
Sometimes an attempted action is

exactly as in English, but the historical present

in

is far

expressed

thei/

With

long ago, or

are trying

to

persuade you.

any other expression

of past

time, a verb in the present has the force of a present and


perfect combined
been (and
135.

still

The

we have long

are) learning these (things').

past-imperfect tense

denotes a continued or

customary or repeated or attempted action in the past.

The particle dv sometimes accompanies the past-imperwhen it denotes customary action (see 145) ciroC-

fect

they would (were accustomed to)

dv
do the hoar no harm.

With

a negative the past-imperfect often denotes resist-

ance, refusal, etc.

(woidd

not,

they woidd not be persuaded.

could not)

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

308

The function

136.
131,

of the aorist action-stem, as stated in

to refer to an action merely as an occurrence, its

is

The

actual duration being ignored.

past-aorist indicative

an action as occurring in past time but other


forms built upon the aorist stem do not refer to past time,
refers to

thus: Indie,

wrote

us write this ; Opt.

See further

etc.i

84,

especially Exercises 35

The
state
king,

This

38.

\|;.

Subj.

Lessons

and

aorist often denotes the

is

may I not write

XLVII and

LIII, and

beginning of an action or

became king,
with a laugh

let

this?

(i.e.

become

to

bursting into laughter^.

called the inceptive aorist.

Not infrequently the

past-aorist indicative is used as a

?,

present to denote a fact of experience or a general truth

$,

{gnomic aorist)

5,

the world's a stage, life's the entrance;

-9

you

come (in^, you behold, you depart.

Sometimes,
patient or
present^)

dont we

too, the past-aorist indicative is

eager

questions

(where

English

ov

call

used in imemploys a

why

then

Prodieus also?

Occasionally the past-aorist, like the past-imperfect,

employed with dv
to

to express repetition

ctircv

is

dv he used

say.

137.

The

perfect action-stem invites one to regard the

action as completed ( 131).


three tenses ( 133).
1

In the indicative

In indirect discourse the aorist optative and the aorist

it

forms

infinitive

refer to past occurrences (see 179, 1 c), but these are secondary

special usages

made above.

do

and

and do not affect the general correctness of the statement


For the use of the aorist participle with reference to a prior

action see Exercise 35.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

309

-- -

"

In Greek the perfect emphasizes the enduring result of


to he
/ am awake ;
action

the

awake;
I remember;

I am dead;

is

I have waked
In a great

rather upon
up, etc.

many

see Exercise 36.

Greek perfect

instances, to be sure, the

English perfect

made ; but usually even here the enduring


the action is still more or less prominent.

have

of

hawl-

whereas in English the

the completion of the action

corresponds closely to the

lam

shudder ;

ing^ hawling {ivitensive perfect);

emphasis

dead;

to he

((^^

effect

Note the following (see 65-67):

I perish, I am

I am
-)).

(by birth)

Ifear

nize

have come

()-

become

he horn,

-^
(^
(and

destroy, lose^.

lost

/rei-

hpoi-

to recognize,

(^yev-

/rt-).

(^<^^

I know

recog-

7^0-)).

I am awake (^iye
lam accustomed.

awaken Ceyep- iyop- /?-)).

likely

resemble

eoiKC

it

is

(ei'/cw

resemble

(/ret/c-

pOLK- pLK-')^.

I stand ; 87.
I know ; 95 (fetSIforget
I have, possess
I remember

138.

The past

poth- fiS-).

(^

forget

(- -^),

acquire').

remind).

perfect (pluperfect),

perfect, emphasizes the enduring result.

like

the present

In English the

is constantly used where Greek employs an


hence
in Greek the pluperfect tense is comparaaorist;

pluperfect

tively infrequent.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

310

For the future perfect middle see


perfect active

The future

139.

68

the future

extremely rare.

is

upon a time-stem

tense refers to future

( 133).

command

The future

time

it is

formed

used familiarly

is

you yourself will


So with ov in questions:
judge
will you not pelt (him') ?
For
with the future indicative, see 149.
to express a

(7/:).

The Voices

The conjugation

140.
voices

active, middle,

of the Greek verb includes three


and passive. Of these the active

and passive require no explanation.


The middle voice lies between the other two atid is
essentially a reflexive {cf I teach myself I make myself
stop, je

upon

me

doute).

himself, or in

affects

It represents the

subject as acting

some manner that directly or indirectly

himself

I make

1)

I make
Tpeiro^at

myself

stop,

I cease

{cf active

(another) stop).

turn (an-

turn myself, turn (A.

-other, etc.).

show myself,

2)

I write for myself {A.


/ copy for myself

made (A.

(A.

carry

show

appear (A.

forth).

or

write).

have a copy

copy).

(off) for
hear, bring).

myself win (a prize)

,)

In some instances the original difference between the


shine,
(or
active and middle has faded
:

be bright.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

Many

141.

verbs have only middle forms in the pres-

ent (including
action-stem).

311

all
forms built upon the progressive
These are known as deponent verba (cf.

Lat. morior, sequor):

in classical Greek);

wish, be

willing (never

receive (take to one's

Although the forms are middle, the meanings are

self).

active or intransitive.

Deponent verbs usually have middle forms also in the


future and perfect but in the aorist some have middle
forms (known therefore as middle deponents), others have
passive forms (passive deponents):
/avor, A.
;

I favored (middle deponent), but


/ wished (passive deponent).

wish, A.

have both middle and passive aorist forms


ceive, A.
I was
I received and
See 142 and Lesson LX; see also 62.
142.

The

passive voice

is

Greek has no

expressed by middle endings

mi/self stop or

few
re-

received.

distinctive

In the present, future, and perfect the

passive endings.
passive

in

I am made

/ make

to stop.

In the aorist the passive employs active endings; see


69, 79 C.

The Moods and Theih Uses


143.

The moods

in ancient

Greek are the

subjunctive, optative, and imperative (see

Accompanying these

indicative,

Lesson VI).

are the infinitive (a verbal

noun

in

origin) and the participle (originally a verbal adjective).

The

indicative

is

the realm

of tense-distinctions,

and

In
there are seven tenses (see 133 and 134-139).
contrast with the seven tenses of the indicative, there are

only three subjunctives, optatives, and imperatives

those

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

312

formed, namely, upon the progressive, aorist, and perfect


action-stems, respectively (but the perfect forms are not

common, the imperative being even

The

rare).

differ-

ences in meaning between these three sets of forms

grow

out of the fundamental meanings of the action-stems

They do not

( 131).

are no
This is
a fact of cardinal importance in Greek syntax; thus:
differ

in

tense.

TJiere

tenses of the subjunctive, optative, or imperative.

us be

let

tl

let

us write something (aorist);

writing something (progressive)

something (progressive)

ivrititig

be

write something

(aorist).
See further 84 and Exercises 35 and 38.
Future stems never form subjunctives or imperatives, and
future optatives are rare and are employed only in indirect

discourse to represent a future indicative after a past tense

(see 179, II B).

All of the action- and tense-stems form both infinitives

and participles
future perfect.

progressive, future, aorist, perfect, and

See 172, 173.

There are two negatives (see Lesson VI)


ot
These are used in
and
(c/. Lat. no7i, ne).
with the indicative and potential
general as follows
optative ( 163), sometimes also with the infinitive
with the subjunc( 172) and the participle ( 173}
tive, optative of ivish ( 162) and also with the infinitive
see 159; for
and participle ( 172, 173). For ox
150, 158, 160 c, 180 b.
see Lesson XIX, also
and
For compounds of
144.

(,

180

a.

146.

The

adverbial particle dv is employed with the


and the subjunctive to limit the

indicative, the optative,

meaninors of these moods.

It is

used in

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


Independent clauses

I.

313

with the past tenses of the indicative:

A.

'
ctires;

'

dv
would be equal; but it is not.
dv
what would you have said? See further 152.^

a) to denote unreality:
the angle also

b) to denote past potentiality, past probability,


potential]

dv

I might

etc. [past

dv

have said ;

they

could not have thought.


c) with

the

and past-imperfect indicative to

aorist

express repeated or customary past action ( 135, 136


(end)).

with the optative (never future optative) to express

B.

the opinion

of

speaker (or writer) as an opinion

the

[potential optative]

dv

it

may

be

so.

See

further 163.

Dependent clauses

II.

in

conditional,

relative,

and

temporal (sometimes also final) clauses with the subjunctive.


Here dv attaches itself to the subordinating
conjunction, so that the subjunctive in such clauses

regularly introduced by tav


or

;)
=

if,

OS dv

and

dv} and

(=

et

is

av, often contracted to

dv whoever,

(=

dv wherever,
whenever, and

See 167, 170.

the like.

See further

179, I b.

Uses of the Indicative


146.

The

indicative

mood

tions of fact, questions,

Unreality

sary,

it

may

is employed in simple declaraand exclamations also in simple

be indicated also by

xcas permitted, etc.

eSet,

(or

it

was

neces-

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

314

conditional ( 166 A), relative ( 166 B), and temporal


Other uses are
( 170) clauses, and with dv ( 145).
treated in 147-153.
147.

a) Clauses introduced by otl, 6s,


because,

that,

as,

that, (how')

since,

have the

The nega-

indicative (or the potential optative, 163).


tive is normally ov.

b)

Some verbs expressing

by a clause with the

pity, etc., are followed

introduced by
(that 7iot)

I (neg. el

indignant that

I am

surprise, delight, indignation,

),

not able

to

oios

'

sag what

indicative,

English that

if (if not),

am

I mean.

These verbs are sometimes followed by otl or as

that.

Verbs signifying care for, strive for, effect, etc., are


followed by the futu7-e indicative (rarely the subjunctive)
(how) that (neg.
introduced by
see to it that you aid me.
148.

?)

5
149.

"

and

with the future indicative are

frequently used in Attic Greek (without an introductory


verb, see 148) to express a

|-'

150.

by

Verbs expressing
lest

(neg.

of the indicative

command
and

let

"

infinitive

so

fear, cautio7i, etc., are followed

when they

as

to,

is

refer to objects of fear

so that is

or the indicative.

the result

us.

with the present and past tenses

are present or past (see further 160 c)


eXeyev beware lest he was speaking in jest.

151.

or a prohibition:

him not deceive

which

followed by either the

With

the

infinitive

presented as a tendency:

(neg.

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

315

with the indicative (neg.


ou), as an end
so
I saw nothing.

SO as to see;

attained:

152. Unreal or Contr ary/


have in the protasis l with

C onditional

Fact

to

Sentences

past tense of the indicative,

a,

in the apodosis a past tense of the indicative

( 145).
The past-imperfect

is

with dv

used of unreality in the present,

or of an act or state conceived as continuing in the past


(prot. were,

had been; apod, would

be,

would have

been")

the aorist, of a simple occurrence in the past (prot. had;

apod, would have^

the pluperfect (yeri/ rare), of an act

completed in past time Qivould have had'). Thus cl


dv
if this were true, I should tell you.
etuov dv
I should have told you.
el

, ',

153.

Hopeless Wishes are expressed by

by or el
and the distinction be-

a) a past tense of the indicative preceded

The negative

oh that!

tween the tenses

5,

VKpox)S

infinitive:

doing this

c)
infinitive:
it

if they

(=

dead

and not

bodies,

8
!

the living

ought (aorist of

owe), with the

would that I were not


would that you had

iroietv

not done this

the same as above ( 152)

would that you were in

the habit of eating

b)

is

is

followed by an
dv or simply
I should like
dv
would that they) were speaking the truth.
Uses of the Subjunctive

154. The uses of the subjunctive ( 143) in standard


Attic Greek are seven in number, as follows

>

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

316

Independent Clauses

A.

1.

Exhortation; neg.

2.

Question of Appeal ; neg. (rare)

3.

Prohihitioii

4.

Modest Assertion; neg.


Emphatic Future

155.

156.

157.

158.

ov.

5.

with aorist subjunctive).

with aorist subjunctive).

159.
B.

Dependent Clauses:

6.

Conditional and relative clauses

7.

Final and object clauses ; neg.

155.

In Greek, as in Latin, the

the subjunctive

is

let

scrlbdmus

156.

let

neg.

first

).

167.

160.

person plural of

constantly employed to express exhorta-

The negative

tion.

(compare Lat. we), thus

is

us be writing!

ne scribdmus

us say

In Greek, as in Latin, the

junctive (singular or plural)

first

person of the sub-

eraploj'ed in questions of

is

Questions with the sub-

appeal or deliberative questions.

junctive always expect an answer in imperative form.

negative (rare)

is

what are we

to

what am

I to

The

be writing f

say ?

a) Questions \vith the subjunctive are often introduced

by

^) -

PovXci do you wish? (pi.

or

(or

or

shall ive say this ?

157.

Negative command

is

expressed by

with

a) the imperative of the progressive action-stem, or

b) the subjunctive of the aorist action-stem:

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


a)

do not be learning

' |$

317

).

do not learn! (not

women

never take

ls

(your) counsel (Menander).

into

The subjunctive introduced

158.

may

b}'^

express a

cautious or modest assertion^ a suspicion that something

may

'

hut

'

suspect that this

true !)

lest this he

The negative is
may

be true, or the like.

be true (ah,

may

this

not he

true.

The subjunctive (generally

159.

of the aorist action-

stem) preceded by
is sometimes employed as the
equivalent of an emphatic future indicative with

'
160.

this shall

The subju nctiv e

is

NOT

employed

come

pass.

to

and

in final

object

clauses

a) Pure final clauses (expressing purpose) introduced

by

Lva,

$,

that, in

path, that you

b) Temporal

order that (neg.

may

SiKaios

).

5 keep

to the straight

he honest.

final clauses

introduced by

not before, until (neg.

).

wait until you become of age.


c) Object clauses introduced

by

See also

until,

they do not
170, 3.

(neg.

ing verbs and expressions oifear, caution, etc.


aircOSc
to

be

rich,

may forget

lest

the

")

way home.

hasten not

quickly you become poor,

follow-

fear

lest

we

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

318

Uses of the Optative

161. The uses of the optative mood ( 143) in standard


Attic Greek nvefour in number, as follows:

Independent Clauses

A.

^^

1) Wish (neg.
av (neg. )), 163.

162.

2) Potential (optative with

Dependent Clauses

^,

3) Conditional and relative clauses (neg.

4) In indirect discourse,

assimilation to anotlier optative (neg.

II

The

162.

possible.

or

),

by

179,

164, 2-3

realization

expresses a wish

conceived,

oh that! (neg.

may I believe the wise to


may only depend on this !

rich
it

if

a wish whose
however extravagantly, to be
The optative of wish is frequentl}^ preceded by

optative

is

or cl

i'0

168.

after a past tense or

etc.,

The

he !

"

Iv

accompanied by the particle


dv ( 145) corresponds to the English potential forms
with may, can, might, would, could, etc., and to the Latin
potential subjunctive: credas, dicas, putes, etc.
This use
163.

is

known

optative

The negative

as the Potential Optative.

'

dv

I might

cXol tis dv

not he wise,

is

irovois

with small labors how could one

achieve great deeds? (Euripides).

164.

The

optative

is

frequently employed as a repre-

sentative of an original subjunctive or indicative


1.

in indirect discourse after a joasf tense

2.

in questions of appeal

and

see 179, II

and object clauses


commonly) when such

in final

( 160) after a past tense, or (less

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


a clause

is

319

dependent upon another clause containing a

'

potential optative or an optative of wisli

Thus

he

was

at a

how he should deal ivith the matter (orig.


how am I to dea:l, etc. ? 156).
3. in indefinite relative and temporal clauses when these
are dependent upon another clause containing a potential
See the last selection
optative or an optative of wish.
loss

In

all of

hvvaiTO^ in Lesson

LXXX.

these cases the use of the optative

not obligatory, and the original mood

is

is

optional,

frequently retained,

except in those clauses mentioned under 3), where the


When the optative is employed in
optative is normal.

way

this

as a representative of the subjunctive, the dv,

many instances accompanies the subordinating


conjunction when the subjunctive follows ( 145), disapwhich

in

pears,

and
(af,

5
ov

becomes

el

dv becomes $
dv becomes
dv becomes

irpiv

becomes circi
becomes , etc.
Conditional and Relative Sentences

165.

(=
sion

A. Conditional clauses are regularly introduced by

followed by the indicative or the optative, or by lav


In the concluel
if, followed by the subjunctive.

1 if,

any form

may

of the verb, that

modifiers constitute a complete

in itself or with its

sentence,

is

permitted

provided only that the combination of the two clauses


intelligible.

regularly

The negative

of

the conditional clause

is

is

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

320
B.

Relative clauses are introduced by relative pronouns

or adverbs, such as

os who,

oiroBcv lohence,

bans

whither,

may

antecedent of the relative

whoever,

and the

as,

where,

The

like.

be either a) definite, or

b) indefinite.
a)

When

the antecedent

may take any form

definite the relative clause

is

that occurs in an independent sentence,

the negatiA'e being either ov or


acter of the construction

which he does not know,

pass! ( 162).
b)
is

When

the antecedent

general or indefinite in

are

known

according to the char-

employed

oiSev (matter)

may

is indefinite,

reference,

its'

this not

come

to

the relative clause

and such clauses

as indefinite or conditional relative clauses.

The negative

is

regularly

, and

the modal types are in

general the same as those employed in conditional clauses


(see above).

Hence conditional

clauses with 1

indefinite relative clauses are treated together,

under three heads

and
and that

(e'ai^)

those with (a) the indicative ( 166),


(b) the subjunctive ( 167), and (c) the optative ( 168).
Many temporal clauses have the same modal construc:

tions as indefinite relative clauses, but for convenience


their treatment is deferred to 170.

166. Conditional axd Relatr^e Clauses with


THE Indicative.
A. Conditional clauses ( 165 A) have l with any tense
The apodosis may be of any form that
of the indicative.
i
makes sense when combined with the protasis:

,
a)

',

hut if you prefer, remain.

The future

threat, a

indicative with el generally expresses a

warning, or the like

the conclusion

may

be of

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


any form

, -|5

el

321

-,

if

you

won't hold your tongue, you will have trouble.

For unreal conditions


l,

147

see 152

for object clauses with

b.

B. Relative clauses ( 165 B) with the indicative may


have either a definite or an indefinite antecedent, the negain the latter.
The
in the former case,
tive being
main clause may have any reasonable form ov I Gcol
veos tohom the gods love dies young

,- ,
(Men.),

does that tvhich

is

not injurious injure ?

Conditional and Relative Clauses with


When the subjunctive is employed
THE Subjunctive.
167.

in conditional

tory

word

is

and

indefinite relative clauses, the introduc-

in standard classical

Greek regularly accom-

panied by the adverb dv ( 145). The subjunctives of


the progressive and the aorist action-stems are most com-

mon

see 143.

A. Conditional clauses with the subjunctive are intro= l dv. The subjunctive correduced by kav (di/,
sponds exactly to the subjunctive in similar clauses in
English (but 7iot in Latin) kav
if these

things be true.

The apodosis most frequently has

either (a) the present

indicative, or equivalent (universal or general conditions),

or (b) the future indicative, or

some other form of expres-

sion referring to the future (sirmple future conditions)

a) eav tis
he

is

),

fortunate.

b) cav Tis

honest, he will never have wealth.

if one have friends,

|i if a

man

be

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

322

$,

,.

Relative clauses Avith the subjunctive are introduced

B.

by OS

The types

(see 145).

same

of clause-combinations are the

as
;

above (A)

do they prevent you

from doing whatever you wish ?


See also

169

a.

Conditional and Relative Clauses with


THE Optative. When the optative is employed in con168.

ditional

and

indefinite relative clauses (definite

relative

clauses do not have either the optative or the subjunctive), the introductory
if

word

the indicative were used,

the same as

is

i.e. cl,

Avould be

it

, \.

The

optative corresponds to the English would, should, etc.,

and

to the Latin present

and perfect subjunctive

The most frequent form

tions. ^

in condi-

of apodosis in optative

the potential optative ( 163) exactly as


should
See further
would.
in the English sequence
conditions

is

169

b.

,
A.

Conditional clauses:

should be necessary either


should choose

B.

to be

to

do ivrong or

wronged rather than

Indefinite relative clauses

Many

Cyrus might give

classes

Is
to

embai'k in

conditional and indefinite relative sentences

These are of

those which refer (a) to the present

versal present, (b) to the

tive.

it

us.

are general or universal in their reference.

two

if

wronged,

do wrong (Plato).

should hesitate

the vessels that

169.

to

to be

dv

The subjunctive

^:)asi,

{i.e.

uni-

and are usually known

in conditions in Latin is

an

as

optative, not a subjunc-

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

323

present (or past^ geiieral conditional (or indefinite relative) sentences.

a) Present general conditional and

indefinite relative

sentences have the present indicative (or equivalent) in the

main

'

i\\Q

present indicative with

subjunctive with

to

,
^

clause, while the conditional or relative clause has

either

|-,

cav

os

1, os,

;.,

(pres. ind.)

or the

167: uavx'

tls

find out all things, if one shun not the

.,
it is

possible

ei

toil,

if gods do any-

thing disgraceful, they are not gods (Euripides).

b) Past general conditional and indefinite relative sentences have the past-imperfect indicative (or

equivalent,

gnomic aorist ( 136), past-imperfect with


( 135),
or aorist with dv ( 136)) in the main clause, and the
optative introduced by el, os, oaxis,
in the conditional

i.e.

-, '
\.

or relative clause

e'i

if he rode out anywhere, he

would

take Cyrus about on a horse with a golden bridle.

The meaning of the optative in such a sentence is the


same as that discussed in 168 the protasis presents the
;

situation as a vague supposition: supposing the one thing

happen, the other always hapjiened.

to

See further, temporal

clauses of indefinite frequency 170.


,

Temporal Sentences
170.

Temporal clauses

refer to a time that

, ,

is

either

1) prior to that of the main clause; such clauses are

introduced by
cirel

the like

lireC,

eirel

(when

=)

after,

after

that;

as soon as,

and

or

2) the same as that of the main clause

introduced by

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

324
0T,

6,

while,

when;

and the

like

',

3) subsequent to that of the


ws,

U7itil ;

than

as long as; ws, cv

or

, ,

ov irpiv not before

4s

main clause introduced by


, and the like, all meaning
;

-- irpoxcpov

until,

= until.

woi sooner

Sentences of the last type (3) refer, again, either

a) to thQ past:

they

ol

u'aited until the generals arrived ; or

b) to
let

th.Q

future:

ol

us wait until the generals arrive.

The temporal clauses in sentences of the last class (3 b)


have the construction of final clauses ( 160; 164, 2;
179, II B, c).

All other temporal clauses have the construction of


ordinary conditional and relative clauses ( 165-169):
Indicative
irals when the boy was
ten years old.
they did not

depart until they (Jiad^ said

'

',

this.

Subjunctive (regularly with av):

ivhenever you return home to your mother,

? -,

mits you to do whatever you wish, whenever she

Optative

SHE per-

weaving.

tvhenever he (himself)

oi

would turn back,

these loho were listening

on this side and on

The

is

would open ranks

that.

example

temporal sentence of
the example
indefinite frequency in the joasi (cf. 169 b)
under the subjunctive, the temporal sentence of indefinite
last

illustrates the

frequency in

\h\Q

present ( 169 a).

In conclusion be

it

observed that

means

before

and

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


is

before seeing

followed by the infinitive : irplv

=)

325
;

irpCv {not

but that

before asking this;

followed by the indicative when the


reference is to past time (see above), but the subjunctive
when the reference is to future time or to the universal
before

present
ings

until

and that

(a) as

is

lo7ig

', ^, and the like have two meanIn the former case their

(b) until.

as,

clauses have the constructions allowed in clauses intro-

duced by

0T, etc.

by

tions introduced

.
;

in the latter case, the construc-

Uses of the Imperative

The

171.

imperative expresses

tions, the latter

are three imperatives

common).
The imperative

,,

a-yc, d'ye

is

commands and

prohibi-

There
and perfect (not

or one of its compounds.

with
:

progressive, aorist,

frequently preceded by

etc.

come

In prohibitions the aorist imperative


used, but the aorist subjunctive with

is

,,

,
come 7iow

not ordinarily

instead ( 157).

Uses of the Infinitive

The infinitive was originally a verbal noun, many


whose uses are exactly like those in English. We may

172.
of

note the following


Infinitive in indirect discourse (negative usually

I.

1T9,

II.

ally

),

I.

Infinitive not in indirect discourse (negative usu-

).

When

"

is

regu-

to die is sweetest

(Bac-

the infinitive has a subject expressed,

it

larly in the accusative case.

a) as a noun:
chylides).

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

326

In this use the infinitive


forms of the article (,

known

is

as the articular infinitive

sound mind
standing)

is

heaven

(i.e.

by the neuter
and when so used is

often preceded

, , ),

to

have a good under-

greatest gift (Aeschylus).

b) as a complement of a verb:

/ am ashamed

you

to tell

eLiretv

the trutJi.

Note especially

I am

a)

am

about

likely

intend

to,

to,

am

(^destinedy

to,

with the future or progressive

to

(rarely aorist) infinitive.


y8)

verbs of hoping, expecting, promising,

etc.,

with

the future (also with the aorist or the progressive) infinitive.

7) verbs oi preventing,

complement

c) as a

of

etc.,

with the

infinitive.

an adjective, adverb, or noun


good
in a manner most beautiful to

skilled in speech,

at riding,

behold,

|-

tve

time

it is

Note especially oios and

to be

oios re

were not able

going away.

fit,

to

find

e) with
f)

with

out.

we have come

d) to express 2^urpose:
to learn.

'

able:

to express result, 151.

170

before hearing,

TTpiv before: irplv

end.

g) in an absolute construction
ciros

seems

to

80 to speak,

me.

I may

h) in exclamations:
suffer this
i)

(^absolute infinitive'^

as

say, etc.

command

it

almost ( 116 b).


to

think that

I should

to express a

or wish (chiefly in poetry).

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

327

Uses or the Participle

The

173.

plays a most important role in

participle

In origin an adjective,

Greek syntax.

it

combines in

its

uses adjective and verb, exactly as the infinitive combines

verb and noun. The three action-s|iems and the two timestems ('131-133) all form participles and there are eleven
in all.
See 143, Lessons XLVII, LIII, and Exercises
35 and 38.

The negative

regnlarly

is

but when the participle

has a general or conditional force


cases the negative

The
I.

is

and

in certain special

..

uses of the particij)le are

those in which the adjectival character of the par-

ticiple is
II.

more prominent

those in which the participle

mates a

finite

Circumstantial.

The

distinctions

lute.

In

B.

its attributive

- an

Supplementary/.

between these uses

tions of an adjective.

the article

more nearly approxi-

verb

A.

174.

{Attributive Participle^.

open door

is

not always abso-

use the participle has the funcIt is

used either Avith or without


the present blessings ;

(i.e.

,-

standing open).

Note especially the use of the participle with the article,


noun being omitted (/",
103 d).

the

The corresponding

expressions in English are the one who,

he who, they who, etc. (cf. Exercise 18)

who understands,
wrong,

the one

whoever does no

the things that ivere said.

In its circumstantial use the participle is added to


noun or pronoun and expresses circumstance, manner.,

175.
a

the expert,

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

328

'--,$

means, cause, purpose (usnally future participle), condition,


he said ivith a laugh (see Exeror concession: YeXaaas
vOS

cise 35).

young (wheyi young,


(Men.). TJi

etc.) he willing to

he

BeXe as you are

heed your elders

came

to

sit

down

beside us.

Note especially
a) Certain participles of time and manner are often used

with an adverbial force


ginning, at first;

c)

in

,5

, , ,

be translated with.

straightway,

such are
finally

continually ; etc.

b) Similarly

midst,

the

at the

hastily;

etc.,

same

'

in the be-

may

time,

often

ti6vs

and similar expressions often attach them-

selves to a participle, although grammatically they belong


Avith the finite verb:

-6

}XTa|i)

he

came

in in the midst of his play {while playing).

d)

concessive participle

e) In like

manner

preceded by are,

The

young.
since
f)

is

frequently preceded by

although.
participles expressing cause are often

ota, or

participle is

since she is

sometimes omitted

are

you are experienced.

"

Participles expressing cause, purpose, etc., are often

preceded by

as.

This shows that the participle sets

forth a ground of belief entertained by the subject of the


main verb or of some other person mentioned prominently
in the sentence
the belief) that

g)

tls

you are going

to

with the thought (in

become what?

circumstantial participle in the genitive agreeing

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

329

with a noun or a pronoun is used as a genitive absolute,


The subcorresponding to the ablative absolute in Latin.
ject may be omitted when it can be easily supplied from
while we tvere saying
the context
on the ground
these things;

(see f) above) that Croesus was being besieged.

h) Instead of the genitive absolute an accusative absolute is used when the verb is impersonal: |- it being
permitted, since

when
176.

In

it

its

it is

permitted,

ivas possible

for him

to

become king.

supplementary use the participle completes


It agrees either

the idea of the main verb of the clause.

with the subject:

1.

know

that

I am

wise; or

with the

2.

See

are wise.

object:

I know

that

you

f) below.

Note especially the supplementary participle with


a) verbs

--

meaning

pear, and the like

cease, endure, be, ap-

begin, continue,

they are contirt-

ually learning.

b) verbs meaning
like

do

rejoice, grieve,

c) with

/ delight

ivell,

do

escape

chance,

anticipate, the participle containing the

I
I chanced
departed,

was just saying,

to be sitting,

ill,

and

tlie

in answering questions.

observation,

main idea

we had just
he was un-

consciously supporting the slayer of his son.

d)

05

common than

/ am

plainly with a participle


it is

clear that.

is

more

330
e)

(or

conscious

-''^

/ know

(lit.,

OF GREEK

THE FIRST

(or

I am

with myself^ are followed by the

participle either in the nominative or in the dative

(or

I am

ovtl)

--

conscious of

being foolish.
f)

verbs meaning know., he ignorant of remember, forget,


and similar verbs of percep-

show, hear, perceive, announce,


tion are frequently followed

by a participle (progressive,
by a clause with
as
when

","

future, aorist, etc.) instead of


in English

he learned that Cyrus was doing these things.

g) vith certain verbs which


is

may

by on and a

the infinitive (some also

/)

be followed also by

There

verb).

finite

usually a difference of meaning, thus

)-

(or

(or

18)
I begin

I am ashamed at telling ;

I a7n ashamed

by telling

to tell.

Iknoio that

Viv

I know how

I am

to tell.

Xc^civ

learning ;

/ begin

to learn.

}/

/ am plainly
I appear to be, etc.

telling a falsehood

Uses of the Verbals

Many' verbs in Greek form a verbal adjective in


-TOV which denotes necessity or duty.
It is
-Tos
sometimes accompanied by the copula
but more frequently this is omitted.
There are two constructions, the
177.

negative of each being

a) Personal (passive) construction.

with

its

subject in gender, number,

expressing the agent,

if

it

The
and

verbal agrees

case, the

word

occurs, being in the dative case

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

331

105

man

-ye
( 120 b):
should not be honored before the truth (Plato).

The

b) Impersonal (active) construction.


the neuter forms

or

The word

with the infinitive.

ing

verbal has

(eVrt) and equals in mean-

for the agent stands

in either the dative or the accusative:

Xcktcov in fact

God

is

GrOOD and

one

should speak so about Hiin (Plato).

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES
two kinds

Interrogative sentences are of

178.

Word

I.

questions,

i.e.,

how? and the

those which are introduced

like.

tis

tives are used with a single verb

xivas ovv viro

cvpoi-

\.

whom then and b^ whom would we find, etc. ?


Indirect word questions (see 179, II) are intro-

dv,

a)

by-

who f
where ? irtos
Frequently two or more interroga-

interrogative pronouns, etc.

duced either by the interrogatives indicated above or by

, ,

the corresponding indefinite relatives:

or

or

or

or

or

etc.

II. Sentence questions, i.e., those which are not introduced by an interrogative pronoun, etc., and which accordingly admit the answer ^es ! or no ! Such questions are
and ,
often introduced by the emotional particles
which merely heighten the tone of the question, and do
not imply either an affirmative or a negative answer
or
do you speak Grreek?

'
,'
;

a) Direct sentence questions are often introduced

1)

ov,

all of
;

(for

tl

^'),

which imply the answer yes:


do you not speak Greek f

in truth?

is

not

by

GOD good

then

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

332

,
,

2)

which deprecate an affirmative

reply

do not speak Greek,

i/ou

do you ?

surely

do not rule over you?

these also

b) Indirect sentence questions are regularly introduced

by

if,

tvhether ( 179, II)

65 I

know

not whether, etc.

c) Alternative sentence questions are introduced

a) in the direct form by irorepov

the two)

or? (whether)

<

which {of
or?: iroTcpov
;

which

wronged?
in the indirect form by the same particles as are
employed in the direct form, or by l ... , or
is

iroTcpov

worse, to do wrong, or

'
is

ivhetlier

to be

or.

often omitted in the direct form of an alter-

native question, and sometimes even in the indirect form:

-5

are

you aicake or asleep?

INDIRECT DISCOURSE,
179.
I,

Etc.

In indirect discourse two constructions are allowed:

with the

infinitive ; II,

followed by a

with

or

that, el whether,

(For the use of the participle in a manner that approximates indirect discourse
see 176 f ).
etc.,

/ declare,

After

I.

/ am

finite verb.

telling, saying,

say,

and

and sometimes after


I said, the main verb

the assertion stands in the infinitive (negative usually

The
case,
it is

subject of the infinitive

but

is

of

).

regularly in the accusative

the same as the subject of the leading verb


regularly omitted and a predicate noun or adjective
if

it is

stands in the nominative :

the

man

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


he

sai/s that

is

wise,

not know.

-,

,,

manner verbs

a) In like

finitive,

eivai

selves to be philosophers,

333

we declare our-

clScvai he said he did

(^).,

of thinking:

by the

are regularly followed

in-

the subject and predicate being treated as above

I think I know,

clSevai

I thought 1

heard.

When

b)

said that

)
is

it

is

would not

Finally

employed

the infinitive represents a potential (optative

or indicative), dv

it

retained
he right

(=

should be observed that

in indirect discourse

he

^.

when an

infinitive

always of the same

it is

action-stem or tense-stem as that of the original verb-form

(see 131).
II.

The verbs

I am

telling.,

are regularly followed by

or

saying and ciirov

that

and a

I said

finite verb.

In like manner most verbs of knoiving, remembering., per-

such as

ceiving, etc.,

knotv,

remember,

learn, vrhich frequently are followed

by a

participle ( 176 f), often allow the construction with

on

and ? The negative is regularly the same as that which


or ").
would be employed in the direct form

A.

After

OTt or

changed,

'a

primary tense ( 53) the verbs that follow

retain their original form, the person alone being


if

necessary, exactly as in English.

The same

rule applies also to indirect questions ( 178).


The subjunctive is never employed in indirect discourse

in

Greek unless

it

would have appeared

in the direct

of the statement or question Qe.g. after eav,

questions of appeal ( 156), etc.).

form

etc., in

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

334

After a secondary or

B.

'past

rect statement or question

tense

verbs in an indi-

all

maj remain unchanged

).

if

necessar}-), or, as frequently

happens, an indicative or a subjunctive

may

be shifted to

the optative of the same action-stem or tense- stem:

OTTOxcpos

them

the point of asking tvhich of

'

(the

(^
-"

??

person alone being changed,

6--

was just on

tvas the tviser

d-yyeXov

he hade the messenger

).

report that he would come sooner than Astyages himself would

((

wish

An

a)

indicative with dv

never changed to the opta-

is

a past-iraperfect or pluperfect indicative, seldom.

tive

An

aorist indicative in a subordinate clause remains un-

changed.

b)

When

the leading verb becomes an infinitive (see

above), verbs in subordinate clauses

may

the optative form after secondary tenses.

subordinate verb
c)

The verbs

is

I,

be changed to
Occasionally a

attracted into the infinitive.

in various dependent clauses

which are

not strictly in indirect discourse, but which contain or


imply the thoughts of a person other than the speaker or
writer,

may

be changed from indicative or subjunctive to

optative after secondary tenses, exactly as


really in indirect discourse (II, B).

clauses with

',

dv,

if

they were

Such clauses

final

irplv dv, etc. ( 160, 170, 3 b),

clauses depending on an infinitive which

is

introduced by

a verb meaning advise, command, plan, etc., and the like.

When
tive,

is

thus changed to an opta-

I might

aid him, if he should be in

a subjunctive with dv

dv disappears
was going that

, ).

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

(^.,

need

tW, iav

tl

335
See also

164, 2.

THE NEGATIVES
180. The uses
compounds see

two negatives

of the

and

and their

144) have been generously illustrated


in the foregoing paragraphs ( 146-179).
Frequently
two or more negatives are employed in the same clause,
;

as

159;

also

cf.

ov,

160

Note

c.

especially:

When

a negative (simple or compound) is followed


same clause by a simple negative, each retains its
own force but when followed by one or more compound
a)

in the

'^

negatives, the negative

there

strengthened

is

was no one who

ovBels

ivas not suffering something,

there is no one tvise.

An

which \vould ordinarily have the negais usually negatived by


if the
verb upon which it depends is accompanied by a negative
or is in a question with a negative idea implied.
b)

infinitive

( 172, II)

tive

CONJUNCTIONS, PARTICIPLES,

(')

181.

but, yet

mon

after a negative

It is frequent in

hut also.

'

objections,

commands

regularly stands
182.

For

is

not only

abrupt transitions

(well, well hut, nay,

hut come,

let

really, hut indeed ( 184).

tive, i.e., it

(ap") then,

never stands
see 178, II.

marks a
especially com-

other)

(jif.

( 190) and

stronger contrast than

Etc.

'

us he going!

nay

questions,
hut, etc.)

yap hut
nothing except.

nevertheless.
first in its clause.
so,

accordingly

always post-posi-

first in its clause.

THE FIRST TEAR OF GREEK

336
183.

again,

turn

iyi

always post-positive.

again, in turn. hack, hack again.

184.

(for

apa) sure, surely, hence for; always

-/e

(or

post-positive,

and

indeed,
so f

indeed, for truly,

ircus

ircos

'yap) hut indeed^

ydp) aye surely,

wahrP

nicht

word

In

, but

many

instances

I.

(for

187.

to

best not to

is

by an emphatic

.5 WU.

also certainly.'

un-

derstand perfectly,
186.

it

to reproduce its force

regularly emphasizes the

It

etc.

least,

follows.

it

pronunciation

certainly/

'

The

at

any rate; always post-positive.

particle

is

a post-positive parti-

which regularly emphasizes the word it follows


where?
where pray?
what?
cle

pray?

188.
either

or.
.

how

surely

in truth ?

than; often repeated:

or.

what

(or

Questions are often l>egun with

...
:

you not know?

see ITS. II.

189.
.

or do

For

the very one who.

os

only a strengthened form of

ircos

irov

if indeed,

el
is

So

emphasizing par-

(y'j a post-positive, enclitic,

even, at

translate

not

not

is it

of course.

185.
ticle

how (why^ not ?

truly,

(or

hut surely ( 181}.

and. also,
see 195.

regularly emphasizes the

hoth

When
word

means
or

and.

For

also, even, it

expression

which

it

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


precedes

I too.

in particular also,

175

although.,

190.

particles

and

and

184.

in the

d.

337

same way

as.

yet, 196.

one of the most characteristic

is

in classical Greek.

It

is

always post-positive

( 182) and is used to distinguish the word or phrase or


clause with or in which it stands from a word, phrase, or

clause which

is

Thus

to follow.

always calls for a

which it is itself connected.


Moreover, this answering phrase or clause regularly contains
in the same position as that occupied
by \i4v in the first phrase or clause (regularly the
word,

etc.,

to balance that with

second word),

times

usually not translatable, but some-

is

may

it

be

rendered on the one hand, ivhereas,

while, etc.
is

a post-positive conjunction,

clause or phrase in which

,
?, ,

it

and indicates that the

stands

preceding clause or phrase containing

it

may

coordinate with a

is

often be omitted, but sometimes

and, but, on the other hand, while, yet,

'

may be rendered

be sure, etc.

you have a friend,

I have

teacher

pupil learns.

Sometimes the clause or phrase for which


conjunction (a weak

'

and or
'

is
'

calls

does

frequently employed as a
but

')

when no

-clause

may be followed by more


regularly stand between
Both
and
and its noun, a preposition and its case, etc.

Furthermore,

precedes.

the article

in the

not.

the

not follow, and, conversely,

than one

speak Greek, you do not.

'

teaches, the

to

In translation

left.

'

in the right {hand)

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK

338

191.
.
.kv
and hi are frequently employed
with forms of the article Avithout an accompanying noun.
In this usage the article retains its original demonstrative
force ( 103), and the forms
ol
are accordingly
.

often written with an accent

.
,

the

other.

'

some things

ov

truly,

I know,

and further, and


.

I do

others

not knoiv.
verily.

yet

yet.

surely not.

ivhat then ?

of course.

i.e.

193.

was saying), therefore; always postany rate,


not therefore?

noiv (as I

'

positive,

oxiv

at

( 178, II).
191.

whosoever.

therefore not.

irtp,

an intensive, enclitic particle, which

in writing, as in pronunciation, attached to the

emphasizes

eiircp

T and,

195.
.

=Lat.

and.

never said ''you and

/ and you
The

/"')

tirst

it

both

(the ancient Greek

often stands at a

^, indeed,

considerable distance from the second tc (or

often

175 d).

Kaiirep although (

que.

is

word

one who.

the very

if indeed,

even as. just as.

others.

always post-positive,

verily ;
.

some

the one is learning., the other is not.

oii

'

192.

... b hi the one

...

oi

shows a marked tendency to be the second word in its


group
met both Hippothales the son of Hieronymus
and Ctesippus.
For other examples, see the end of
Lesson XXXV.

it

LT
.

nor.

'

whether

or.

'

neither

THE FIRST YEAR OF GREEK


196.

TOi surely, doubtless;

and

post-positive) and

197.

as,

say.

quam

ttVT about five,

eiireiv so to

as,

Temporal

c)

d) Declarative
f)

Consecutive:

how

beauti-

that, in

147

as,

a.

, = ',

=
=

130

to,

147
160 a.

179, II

order that,

so that,

g) Prepositional:

f.

when, 170.

that,

Final

many

speak, 172, II, g.

inasmuch
as,

e)

the

as

as beautiful as possible,

as though to receive, 175

b) Causal

(usually

ol

celerrime.

ful!

post-positive.

There are many uses:

that; proclitic.

a) Comparative

and

however,

therefore.

enclitic

surel/,

yet.

339

with the

a.

infinitive, 151.

c.

OEDER OF WORDS
198.

The

subject of the order of vi^ords in Greek

of very great importance, for, although there

is

one

is

a certain

normal order for many of the parts of speech {e.g. the


adjective shows a marked tendency to follow its noun, a
negative to precede the word

emphasizes, etc.), there

it

is

a far greater freedom or elasticity in the arrangement of

words in Greek than in any of the less highly inflected


There are many disturbing elements, but in

languages.

general word-sequence follows

which

uppermost

is

in the sentence

in the

the

mind

is

thought- sequence

expressed

,-,

the \vord

'

word was GOD. So


and if to EQUALS
sums are equal.

Thus

containing

-,

the new, hence the emphatic, idea, takes precedence


the

that

first.

EQUALS be

and

added, the

VOCABULARY
The following vocabulary
contains the

common

is

divided into tvro parts, of which the

the proper names and proper adjectives.

words which are

for all

first

the second part,

nouns, pronouns, adjectives, etc.;

Neither of these

is

complete,

and are ade-

of rare occurrence in the lessons

quately explained in the word-lists or the notes are omitted, as well as

some

of very frequent occurrence, like

and

particles are not treated

Moreover, preposi-

vaC, etc.

but with each there

is a
meanings and uses are
Following each preposition are given 1) the verbs comexplained.
pounded with it, and 2) the compound nouns, adjectives, and adverbs.
As a result the arrangement of the words in the first part of the
vocabulary is not strictly alphabetical. In many other instances, too,

tions

reference to the section in Part

the alphabetical order


position

is

at length,

II, in

which

its

slightly disturbed in order to bring into juxta-

words which belong

Sometimes these are placed under

together.

-), in

other instances a type-word heads the group.


In cases of extreme displacement cross-references are given.

a root

{e.g. ayep-

The principal parts of verbs are usually omitted, there being instead
a reference to the lesson in which these have been presented. All masculine and neuter nouns of the second declension and all feminine nouns
of the

first

declension are printed without the article

all

other nouns

have the gender indicated.

,
?

messenger.

a, see os.

.
--

s.v.

xvithout weight

(^).

see

good.

See

47

, and

KaXos.

-? ()

ornament, statue.
very much, too much.

-? ()

-
assembly,

field,
;

hring

to-

market-place,

market.

message,

country
pi.

to

the

cultivated fields.

Cf

(opp.

Prin. pts. Less.

LVIII,

hring home a

wife for oneself (or for another).

-5

() a place of

contest.

a struggle, agony.
341

an-

Lat. ager, Eng. acre,


lead.

gether, gather.

Prin. pts. Less. L.

hunting-expedition.

town)

vessel (jar, urn, cof-

hear

nounce.

fer, chest, etc.).

message.

contest;

342

cL-Slkos

- -- -

do lorong

-ov garrulous.

-9
, . -,
deceit.

without

().

-ov impossible

song.

ait always, forever.

6 ael

who for

im-

-$

().

-< follow (Dat.

throw a javelin,

- -ov in heaps,

want of

-ov (Adv.

Cf

(,

discourage-

topmost,

without

--

be

ashamed

the upper air,

()

truth.

-'

sicy.

take

Prin.

LXXIV.
- ()

an-ae-

for
pts.

oneself,

Less.

(^

shameful.
disfigure,

be ashamed.

LX, LXXV.

dishonor,

Prin. pts. Lessons

speak the truth.


( 42

(Lat.

Adv.

satis),

have enorigh of the

to

a taking, choice.

--

unwill-

crowds, in plenty, enough

in
Cf.

mic, haematology.

--

-)

-ov (for

ing.

blood.

M.

under-

outermost,

true.

()

seize,

of.

exact,

-ov at the furthest point,

the heights.

insult, outrage.

choose.

spoken

make

LX.

to be

(p^s) exact, accurate.

-^

ether.

ill)

--

(aldws awe, respect, shame).

-^

most

(Gen.

to

Prin. pts. Less.

stand thoroughly.

-5)

at.

common).
well (or

discouraged.

).

hit with

dart, javelin.

in crowds.

spirit,

ment.

spirit,

aim

javelin,

-ov bear-

away the prize.


() athlete.

sense of hearing, act of hearing ; report, saying

(or

contest (for a prize), task.


prize.

etc.).

be at the highest

hear, listen

mortal.

ing

. --

the time being

death,

to

culminating point, acme.

desires.

-ov loithout

respon-

117 a),

the cause.

Past-Impf.

Cf.

-5

point (of prosperity, etc.)

-?)

a-8oXos -ov (Adv.

the one

for (Geu.

point (of a spear,

injustice.

sing.

hlame-worthy

-ov

sible

(Ace).

injure

-8
-5

doing

().

wrong, unjust
d-SiKeu

-)

{-$

a-SiKOS -ov

-,, -,
.
food.

or

or

P.

be

captured (used as the pass, of

(- -).

hut, yet.

- -

181.

another (of many),

the other,
178, II a.

see

42.

...

,
otherwise.

343

. '

---<(8,
- - -.

each other. 2.
another time (fire).

-01S -oDs

at

- -ov
other^

strange.

-KOS
at

the

130

b.

time.

, -,
partly

175

c,

28

-4

do in turn, repay (Ace).


see

have no care for (Gen.

115 h).

be

it,

(A

amen.

Semitic word.)

each or both (of

-ov

Usu.

on

pi.

both sides.

Neiit. pi.

with

appos.

phrases, etc.

common

two

hold back,

LXXII.

open.

be led to the torture.

compel, force.

-ov unerring, blame-

-ov unworthy, undeserved.


Gen. avSpos () man, husband,

vir.

F.

-,

take captive

128.

up.

In comp.

sive force)
step up, go up.

Less.

LXXII.

(recognize

Less.

again)

LXXII.

take up.

Less.

LI II.

-8 ()

persuade.

ivind.

Less.

LX.

sell into

the men's apart-

Bopeas

without.

ovei)

north wind.

130.

human

being

(homo),

man, fellow, chap.


-ov human.

-os -ov loithout sickness.

{ ').
=

194.

instead

In comp.

wait for.

manliness.

up, back, again (with inten-

-(
-(
-

A.

and

slavery.

ment.

read.

M.

176, 2 a.

;-

-5
().
.
-,
-

both.

145.

-irfCe

Less.

necessity,

words,

= .

()

-.

aor. of

with,

LXXIV.

Less.

hold up,

to

up and

take

less

so

verily,

carry

make away

-.

change, exchange,

in

up,

--.
-, .

erring, sinful.

-.
6,
- --;.
two).

over-

offer,

hold out, endure.

failure, error, sin.

6$

tip,

take

-,
A.

miss, fail, err ( 115 e).

upset,

show forth, M. appear.


carry

carry away,

ignorance.

F.

up,

tiirn

ascribe.

88.

back, refer.

{-).

tvagon, carriage.

re-

throw.

partly.

ignorant

-is

up, refer,

set

LXXVI, and

Less.

()

fox.

(r/)

same

turn hack,

turn.

belonging to an-

stranger.

&

one time
See p. 42.

hi at

at another time.

see

-o-Ttts,

of.

124

a.

instead, in oppo-

sition, in return, against.

---

344

d|ios

give in return, repay.

say in return.

-,
--,

sound

turn.

A.

ask in
stand

LXXII.

Less.

against.

worthy of (Gen.

a|ios -a -ov worth,

117 a).

worth, value.

--

"rras,

-- disobey (Dat.).
- threaten

boast, threat.

(Dat.).

and

194.

().

^inharmed

().
- - (^\$
greediness

-raros)

behave

simply,

deal

')

--

b.

from, away from.


In comp.
from,

-\

Less.

uncover.

-'

-)-

set free

shut

away

Less. LIV.

-'

-).

(from).

79.

make thorough

of

trial

82 B.

--

-7

send

Compound

step

away, go aioay,
Less.

LXXII.

throio away, lose.

Less.

LIII.

90.

{away

Less.
jjoint

--

LXV.

otit,

Less.

be

from)

show, ap-

LXXIV

and

titterly

cow-

ardly.

tithe).

shoic (forth).

back,

carry away, carry

pay

(tribute, etc.).

he piit aioay, laid away.

- - --

be going away.

88.
93.

drive away.

Less. LIII.

-----,{
keep

away from, have or

receive in full.

-T)'ei

he v:as going aioay

-, -

complain loudly.

---F.

look

tou-ard.

point.

- -..
- --

-'

result, issue.

Less.

LII.

went away.

back, completely.

I.

- --

pts.

Aor. of

frankly.

124

Com-

single, simjile ( 41).

Prin.

die.

LIIL

fail to hit, fail.

vnthout harm,

-ov, G. -ovos

,{

be

away.

see oo-rrep

ttirXois

--

- --

-'-

kill {ktV- ktov-

trick, deceit.

sell.

pletely surprised.

- -

M.

LXXIX.

from, shut out.


answer.

once.

airas

give back, pay,

Less.

in reply, reply.

A.

- --

lose,

destroy,

M.

ish.

be destroyed, per-

lam

lost,

am

to,

ar-

undone.

come from (a place)

-rive.

give a tenth of (as a

make one stand aioay


from, M. stand away from,

345

d-TTopos
87,

revolt, etc.

-9

and

Less.

LXXII.

--

II.

a writing

off,

(un)dressing-

-5 () an uncover-

'

apKTos (v) bear.

()

frag-

one who

hard

--

is sent,

just now, a

- <----

ago, just.

ancient.

()

chief-

(Gen.

M. begin.
() ruler, archon.

115 g),

-ov inextinguishable.

-ov glad; usually with

--

the force of the adverb, gladly.

)
--,
gleaming.
silver

mines

(sc.

welcome, greet.

gasp, pant.

-'

() a

bright star

{cf.

the stars).

a small coin, money.

(41) of silver.

pleasing,

vertebra

made

--(orig.

pi.

from

dice

knuckle-

bones).

please,

pleases me.

08 - -

accepta-

ble.

"^

play with

dice.

gastronomer.

excellence, goodness, virtue.

05 - -

on

the left side,

the left

hand

-Tcpas xeipos

8.

moment

office.

- -

182.

silver.

apio-Tos

rob-

begin, ride

pass,

Pf.

on fire, M. lay hold

idle, lazy.

() a plunderer,

builder, architect.

unexpectedly.

178, II.

F.

Up,

- -ov

-ov imexpected.

cling to ( 115 c).

()

snatch

off.

beginning, rule, sovereignty,

he without a way,

to, set

Cf. harpy,

ber.

to deal with.

, ,

deny,

F.

-5

mes-

be at a loss.

-"(-88

a way, impas-

-iropos -ov toithout

it

Arc-

arctic,

-(, .

carry

senger

Cf.

a seising.

ansvjer.

-(8(-).

- -?

toIs

content

be

refuse.

ment.

satisfy.

satisfied.

turus.

-5 ()

...

be strong

loith one''s blessings.

an

-?
--- -?

then.

am

register,

ing.

of,

off,

sufficient,

room.

fasten

be

etc.

census.

-'

F. apKeVb) loard

enough,

Compound Nouns,

sable,

-ov best

on the

Cf. aristocracy.

astronomy.

- ()
- --

(sc. xeip).

superl. of

<o-voC

skilled in as-

tronomy.

toion, city ( 36).

left.

lives

near one's

()
city,

one loho
neighbor.

-9
(^?)

---

-4s

(),

to trip

-5-

346
not liable

throw, throiB

security.

(17) stability,

icithout form

(),

misshapen, ugly.

-9

e.

one's purpose, free

5
5

-- -, .

pass,

{-).

-tax,

() murderer, one who

commits a deed with his oion


court-yard, court.
(sc.

.
-9

-$

speechless.

(,

(cf.

withoiit

Cf.

).

()

loith-

be

king,

Hog).

28.

()

-,

-,
-,
47

palace.

,
'-

missile

See

etc.).

kingly, royal.

(arroio,

,.

dart,

better,

best,

Adv.

fut. of

eat

(-,

living,

liveli-

Pf.

meat).

(to)

burden.

aor. pass, infiu. of

Prin. pts. Less.

LXI.
deep

LXXII

hood.

live.

icalk, go.

step,

--

go.
(/3a-).

Prin.

manner of

life,

be burdened, vexed, an-

noyed.

king.

-<ra

queen.

speech,

diphthong.

cious.
-<ci>s

rub upon the touch-

()

see

out grace, unpleasant, ungra-

test, tor-

stone, test, torture.

self, 106.

make unseen

heaviness,

--
,- -.
()

--

kingdom.

Is

immediately.

05 - -

44

ill-luck.

a touch-stone,

rule (

to-morrow,

071 the

()

--

(6$).

morrow.
morrow.

(-wrepos

down by

Tos) iceighed

ture.

the

lyre,

heavy.

troublesomeness.

again, back again, 183.

bar-

foreign,

(-).

()

in turn, 183.

hand

) =

(,

from

scot-free.

dishonor

Prin.

hit.

Greek, foreign.

7iot

accomplishing

icithout

plete,

- -).

baric.

without an end, incom-

-i's

at,

(/SeX-

but, nevertheless, Lat. at.

are since^ 175

LX

pts. Le.SS.

firm, safe.

pts.

^]

Less

I stand

to be lived,
it

is

ov

not meet

to

- - harmful.

-- - . harm, mischief.
harm. Prin. pts. Less.

hurt,

LX.

44.

Pf. pass,

look, see.

the living.

($,

.-

see

347
*

when

called) aid, assist (Dat.).

''.()

see

ox, cow.

PI.

38.

ox-Stall.

coun-

determination,

--

take counsel xoith oneself, deliberate.

wish, he

will,

Less.

be

willing.

LXXV.

Gen.

Dat.

brief.

to knoio, recognize.

Pts.

Less.

(yvd,

Gen.

. -,
)
{ye

tongue,

at

lan-

judgment,

thought.,

intelli-

{y.yv).
see

()

Gen.

altar.

A.

yvCodi,

(17) oiol.

7<)

(or

gence, resolve

LXVII.

yvoiT}v,

yvQ)vai, 7^01^5).

Adv.

44.

for a short time.


Poetic
mortal {-).

groio old.

come

gxiage, speech.

slow).

Prin.

loiter

delay,

sloio,

- -

(),

take counsel, de-

Mid.

Frill, pts.

.
,

geometry.
aor. ptc. of

old age (yipwv).

- --

liberate.

Voc.

28 D.
(), a land-measurer,

geometer.

man.

old

, -- -

cowherd, herdsman.

sel.

the elders.

()

earth.

the north wind, Boreas.

()
(,

Part, yeyovos -via -os).


(o2)

sllOUt.

--

'^;',

(Infin.

Pf.

(. - {
, -.
shout.

any

knee.

rate, at least.

186.

---

wed'ding, marriage.

marry.

LXX.

Mid.

give

(of

184.

', --.
laugh.

be full of (Geu.).
35.

by race, hy birth.
-ov (yevvaiorepos

-6-

Tos) well-horn, noble.

pts.

horn,

Less.

LX

become.
(jyev-

() picture,

writings,

book, etc. {tor y

unarmed,

naked,

a writ-

PI. letters

.-)

lightly clad,

etc.

exercise, also a lesson.

a school for gymnastic

-?1 - training.

race, family, birth,

he

see

scratch,
x>aint.

alphabet),

the

epistle,

race, family.

draw,

ten character, letter.

185.

- ()

write, also

oneself (or

one's child) in marriage.

'
,

Less.

Prin. pts.

Prin.

yov- ya-).

skilled in

gym-

nastid exercises.

G6n.
wi^.

() woman,
39.

angle, corner.

348

()

-ovos

()

-ovos

guest.

loeep.

bursting into tears.

spirit.

Less.

'

o5v, 193.

out,

LXXIV

and

point

pts.

Le.ss.

90.

- - cowardly.

Adv.

-oraros,

wonderful,

skilled in

speaking.

part,

dine.

fearing.

See

LXVIII.

Less.

?.
'- -

directions, etc.:

I.

Compound Verbs

throio across, traduce,

---

--

show

succeed

in

--

--

carry through,

seize, arrest.

-\

second.

-- verse

xoith

) '? Prin.

receive.

(Dat.).

con-

--

(one) must converse.

(or devrepa) then, next.

LX.

In comp.

127.

distinguish, decide.

Voc.

master.

hither.

ivos

certainly, of course.
187.

carry.

tenth.

lord,

68 - -

public,

stealing, keep alive by stealth.

ten years old.

()

belonging to the

clearly.

ten.

-8

state,

vos accused by a daughter.

dinner.

-s

slander,

complain loudly.

6 -- -- -?;
aor.

clear. 83.

country, aevae, people.

district,

(') through,

terrible,

skilled,

,
'9

clear.

through, thoroughly, indifferent

(-orepoi,

deivws)

-- -- make
publicly.

coioardice.

. - -

people or

A, pass.
Prin.
show.

hind.

187.

hr[\Lo<i

exj)ense.

190.

pts.

Less.

dissolve, break up,

etc.

lack, need (Gen.).

-| -|a appoint, dispose,

arrange.

(or

twenty lacking one


there

far from

almost.

that which is

need,

(or

tico).

.-

ought

one

need,

is

(Infin.); Past-Impf.

- -

- ?-

divinity,

by chance.

-U,

Prin. pts.

heg, request.

LXXV.

-ovtos
needful.
desire

- - -
destroy

pass. part.

(it),

(to)

Mid.

(Gen.),

differ

from

utterly.

Pf.

differ,

(Gen.).

-6

-$.

use up, destroy.

exchange.

-,

aor. part, of Si

349

-- go

-- -

(out) through.

he

be able.

describe.

-
--

narrate,

LXXIV.

-4.

see

8).

(Gen., Dat.

(-

destruction

him, 21

b.

lodg-

of himself

ing.

23.

etc.

if.

two hundred.

SiaKOcrioi -ai -a

Prin.

teach.

8-

Less.

pts.

give.

See Less.

LXXIX.

Justice,

to receive

to

re-

(-orepos

^
-----

just,
it is

-().

Adv.
tell.

txoenty thousand.

pursue.

it

was necessary, ought (^).


see

-.

imagine, think.

()

89.

about

Less.

(to).

loish, be

XXI.

, ,
, .,

88.

()

band, tribe, nation.

if,

()

whether,
.

if not, unless.

el

whether

that!

or.

( 153, 162)

aor. of

notable.

shaft, spear,

39.

spear-bearer.

See

, -.
' ---, ,
,- ,
you are

opinion.

Gen.

130).

aor. of

aor. of

justice.

think, suppose, seem.

aor. of

aor. of

honest,
right for me to

twice.

().

seven

-- be willing,

punishment.

--

aor. of

trial, xtenalty.

?),

near (Gen.

custom, right, justice, lawsuit,

satisfaction,

Verbal

allow.

177.

seventy.

teacher.

8((>.

'
, ,
, .
',
-

LXVII.

give.

Ace.

gift.

as adv. freely.

lohere-

mode of life, hoard and

etc.

two.

for the reason that

ceive

)
.

twelve.

etc.

fore.

SkSdo-Ko)

power.

able, powerful.

aor. subj. of

-opilm separate, define.

Compound Nouns,

II.

80.

(17)

-'
Less.

do.

re-

tolcl,

lated.

-(-,

See

to give.

{--)

-|-

slave.

cli-

vide into parts.

, ,

see

( 05, 50 C).

see

-- --

guess.

91.

oh that
liken,

compare,

05

8 -OTOS ()

{)

as

likelihood.

likely.

is

it

--' -. -
--

350
Ikos

Compound Verbs

I.

()

likeness, image.

05 - - twentieth

see

LXXIV.

()

-aros

I am

( he.

re-

-,

Less.

clvai to be.

send out.
bring

-,

94.

part,

-;)

things

the

|- -|

that

away.
A.

peace.

^v one.

(or

deceive utterly.

?i-

javelins

awaken. A. pass.
awoke.

at

---

(Ace).

(-idys

-,

view.

F.

-{-

-),
come
- (- -,
common
in,

-,

pass, of

<-

he

entered.

tomed

eK (before a vowel,
124.

you xorought,

-(()

in.

completely.

-fj.

I am accus-

^) ont
:

of

aor. of

permitted.

of,

out

from.

of,

also

Infin.

test.

find

out, discover.

'.

In comp.

it is

examine,

next, or therefore).

elxov, past-impf. of
(part,

(more

going

.
(i.e.

strike out.

aor.

- -'
-.
-.
-- -- -

etc.) be
{it)

fulfilled,

go out.

in.

fut. of oiSa, 95.


e'er

then

A.

e|-

astonished, aor.

urns

--

etc.), aor. of

look into, look upon,

-> =

take

utterly enslave.

A.

throio

93.

etc.)

miss, err, do wrong.

nonnce.

go

(-^,

In

126.

to.

into, to, in

-,
-8

lead out, lead

out, expel.

into,

^s)

comp.

(aor.

reveal, show.

--".
-,

tip,

rear.

have been said.

carry out.

-era

^'.

exposed.

lie

194.

I said. Less. LIU.


I have said; see

cto

of

infin.

uncover.

93.

if really.

els

aor.

to.

-' - ---'
---

dress, garment.

not possible.

see

from, succeed

ceive

(ef/cotri).

pxit out, expose.

going.

91.

it is

of a river,

empty.

is likely.

-ovos

throio out;

cIkos

<!>s

II.

subj. of

-<.

Compound Nouns,

'-8
--?

etc.

child.

()

a putting

posure.
choice, selection.

out, ex-

- (8
-
cKaTcpos

351

from

--

that (one), he, she,

-$

sixteen (^0

->

see

inten-

willingly,

'

47

-|

?,

free, fit

Past-Iinpf.

-,

draio.

,iKtlv

()

i\iris -iSos

see

(part.

opposite, in the presence

here, in this case, there,

hither, here.

(also TO ivTeOOev) hence,

thence, henceforth.

$)

command

(-\).

on

within,

v-TOs

this

side

of

(Gen.).
iv-xiirvtov
'iv

dream

(inrvos).

{ivos, fvL), see tls.

for the sake of, on aC'


count of (Gen.).
130.

'ivtKa iVKv

-?

of myself.
my, mine.

23.

eviavTos year.

comp, also ^7-, A-, e/-,


in,
on,
among.
125.
comp. in, at, etc.
Compound Verbs
throw in.

ip-)

Aor. subj.

fall

In

--,

--)

--

- in, fall

()

it is

likely, it is like.

festival, holiday.

see K.

outside

upon.

display,

display oneself.

ter into,

six.

within, cherish.

sand.

sixty.

en-

put on.

Past-Impf.

of

(Gen.).

130.

- -
- ,

-,

unrestrained.

Gen. -ovos sensible,

here, there.

hope, expectation.

iv (in

I.

-is clear,

-,

thereupon.

drag,

iv.

5 - -

earlier

of,

there, theretipon, where^

see

see

A.

front

thence.

refute,

hope, expect, believe.

-,

of (Gen.).
within (Gen.), at home.

(-orepos

etc.,

'-

-;)
for a freeman.
'^.

tv

less.

least.

cross-question,

convict.

cXcvOcpos

-)

ev

48.

<08 - -

in the

rational.

sixth.

tionally.

(Gen.).

see

etc.

toay.

25.

etc.

Compound Nouns,
(= iv

II.

.
, - .
',

enjoin,

command.

there.

5 - -

-, . -

each (of two).


each (of many).

there, yonder.

CKctOev

6(.

in a row, next.

eiraOov, see

have

iirei

lohen, since.

whenever.

six

thou-

see

')

(iir',

etc.

upon,

352

In comp.

129 b.

7,

toioards, against, over, etc.


I.

-, -
Compound Verbs
A.

as time

passed.

-8, Past-Impf. -
display.
-- -
be in

---

-,
-.

town, come to town, etc.


of

summon.

call,

---,

Aor.

infin.

slay upon.

have charge

care

of,

- -.
-(
'5
--A.

ask.

come in

(in addi-

-,

aor. of

close

a slam.

tcith

-(

understand.

-, ---,
80.

fat. of

.
-'2

a dream appeared

ir-

upon (or

or place

set

him.

to

over-

II.

Compound Nouns,

etc.

()

promise,

profession.

eir-aivos praise.

fault

find

(with),

blame.

HTTos

come

see, observe, view.

for (Gen.).

-,
--

over)

middle

part,

aor.

-\

pf. of

to, visit.

tion to).

come
come upon.

into being after,

-,

towards,

on,

-8

()

cattle-shed, hut.

thereupon, then.

potir a libation upon.

-<,

see

command.
the commands.

-,

- --- -

iri-

-'

Past-Impf.

desire.

--5

--.

--)
()

overseer,

brought

place Upon.

-,

an end.

to

-ov (-orepos -ototos,

Adv.

bring to completion.

chief,

master.

suitable,

ser-

viceable (deriv. obscure).


-Tpoiros trustee, administrator.

88.

---'
,
--, -- <8
- --, .
-Tpi'irw

Verbal

entrust to

(Dat.

-7.

177.

).

meet

with

(Dat.),

obtain, receive

(Gen.).

-( -- -< -<

listen

country.

Past-Impf.

aor. of

to,

bliy.

love passionately, desire (Gen.).

on,

attempt.

-os (to) word, verse.

praise.

go

back, return.
aor. of

()

-ov belonging to the

folloio (Dat.).

hear (Gen.).

-,

-aTos

7-5 -

()

-yov

set foot

mount upon (Gen.).

lover, admirer.

work, deed,

vated fields,

()

etc.

see

culti-

(
{5

shall say, fut. of

cpia

-ov {-orepos -oraros) desolate,

readiness, preparedness.

iTos -ovs (to)

year.

()

(V well,

well done, good

wool.

'.

-(

strife.

- -6

was

come,

wiith

pass,

aor.

of

Prin. pts. Less.

gfo.

--

"?

cpcoTiKOs

(Adv.

-tDs)

erotic,

roris,

amoI

LIV.

()

<8 -? {)

-? -5 ()

-5

Prin. pts.

pf. of

fut. of

pf.

(-

a questioning.

.
of.

see

< =

eat;

-tos,

pf

( 87).

.
.

T.

comZeus who

presides over fellowship.

'(),
^Tcpos

see

-ov

one

other.
still,

furthermore.

-8

to

pass through

be p)rosperous

().

-ov well-made

be

--

be for-

().
(Dat.).
.
(- -,thank
tunate

en-

(straight)

ioioard (Gen. 130).

()

straight.

straightioay.

{
' -

cvpov

(-), straight

road (66).
eunuch.

-().

sumptuously

straight line

CTaipcios -a -ov pertaining to

see

easy

- -

(iOvs

not a lawful wife).

eii-iropos -ov

pass,

within ( 130).

Ziiis

calm, etc.

praise.

tertain

() comrade.
()
companion (i.e. a woman who

panions.

con-

(),

find a ivay, able (to do).

of a-rtpiu de-

pass,

ei)-KO\ajs)

full of resources, rich.

( 91).

CTaipos

is

satisfied,

(07.

-, see

-,

renown.
(Adv.

tented with one's food

prive of.

forms of

-.

a question.

, -with gen. eat

(,
<-,

be esteemed, be

having a beautiful

-'s

clothing, garment.

6,

F.

--

famous.

-u-Ko\os -ov

-arcs

-wraros)

(-urepos

appearance.

ask (a question).

((,

deem happy.

having a goodrepute, famous.

passionately desire.
Less.

be happy.

happiness.

-ov

-Tos (0) love (esp. of sexual


passion).
() Love.

Gen. -ovos blessed


a good genius, happy.
-ov.

--
-.
-8

cottieniiOMs.

said,

LXI.

c'ri

-ov ready.

deserted.

epis -iSos (17)

ipois

353

find.

of

two,

the

prayer.

(Dat.).

-,

see

itri.

pray,

pray

to

354

-.
,
-(8 see

. Zeus who

presides over hos-

1]

(fem. dat. of

hostile.

' '
?
part,

(v

it is

so.

/ am

being dis-

loell.

couraged,

ws

just as he loas

in wrath

without de-

(i.e.

I have seen

<()

().

(infin.

')

the loay,

suppose.

high esteem.

47

forthwith.

pleasure.

A.

and

he loent
least,

(,

by no

93).

^.

means!

past-impf. of

have come.

--

stupid.

one of the same age,


(,
companion.
age, prime of life,
be of age.
() comrade.

who paints from

(to) yoke or

team (of

mules, etc.).

'

yoke-strap.
rivalry, emulation.
vie loith, he jeal-

day.

/ suppose.

184.

See

178,

'

- - tame.
- - our.

each

twice a day.

half (an insep. prefix,


-tia

= .

every

on each

--'

( 96).

day.

day.

seek.

truly, surely,

sit

day.

-- -ous of; deem happy.


--

in (Dat.).

xire

painter.

-ous

I.

hold in

Adv. ijdews) pleasant,


Adv. with pleasure.

sweet.

animal.

one

179,

( /5,
, -,

by this time, already

()

life.

II.

think,

II,

-,
-

{).

live.

lead

I,

delight oneself icith, take pleas-

so long as (see 170).

they allow

life,

youth).

F.

lay).

iois until,

J5ar(?0n.

is well,

it

93).

(Ace), be one''s (Dat.)


leader in something (Gen.).
lead

he paid no

I cannot

tell,

hold,

LVI.

Less.

get.

heed,

or.

see

have in mind, in-

tend,

, {.

I went
be young

<

eJxov)

(,

Aor.

in which loay, in

o's)

(,

().

(Past-Impf.
(infin.

188.

lohich place, lohere.

--

have,

either

178, II

pitality.

I said

...

or, than,

at one''s hearth.

a hnlf-mina

half.

(=

semi).
c.

$9).

355

Itoas (>, 91).

()

-8

harness-maker''

driver

().

See

170.

and

see

choose.

see

Less.

see

'-

(), 1.
they went
they were

,
48).

either

none

aor.

, --.

be

{-% -)

in-

a hunting of wild beasts;

- -'

' =
--

().
, ,
,
-

boil.

fut. of

sea.

0-.

(door-stotte),

Aor.

door-keeper

-- -<ra

bury.

--

imperative of

--

gaze

sur-

Prin.

pts.

view.

LXV.
see

ISiiv,

88.

oblong

().

sacrifice, offer sac-

-<ra flatter.

()

LX.

at,

be

loonder,

an

rifice.

be of good cheer.
Less.

daughter.

shield.

death.

PL

door.

-- put

take courage

Dat.

hair.

()

by sea.

-Keiv.

mortal

{). Gen.

death.

, 8,

()

(), and

Gen.

treasure, treasure-chamber,

chamber, store-room.

Less.

he ran

'IQti

() huntsman.

, aor. of

prised.

().

run.

prey.

sou7id, ring, peal.

take

fested with wild beasts.

see

court,

the less.

(Gen.),

than

serve,

treat medically.

of,

wild animal, beast.

pass, of

worsted.

(or

care

a viewing, contemplation.

less ( 47

oihkv

-
6,
(~
servant.

-- view, contemplate.

or.

an attendant,

()

().

().

Gen.

see

-ovTos

-).

9).

(et>i, 91).

weaker

be

one should place

stillness, quiet.

-ov,

divine.

F.

warrior., hero.

{,

WrtS pZefflSed!

...

,
, ,

194.

aor. pass, of

LIV.

by the gods

see

..
,
,
,
8
,

Voc.

god, goddess.

-ov fighting against God.

shop.

tohen.

(,

irpos

reins.

18,
!

see

breast-plate.

,.

behold

--

ItSios

()

356

one''s

<$

Uvai

an atokward fellou\

going

to he

{,

Upov

()

Upa

()

holy place.

temple,

175d).
and

UpEia priestess.

93).

(Adv.

See

)- ( .
-

171.

$)

gracious

impv.

pass.

bad,

suffi-

<

ap-

-ov

worthless,

of

) horse, mare.
-' () horseman.

(,

I'lriros

160.

-5-, -,
lir-n-evs

<
<<

equally

equal.

8,

-,

Adv.

lohich

- -()
-

--

(,

strength.

see

pej-tain

camel.

basket.

( ')

or

29 C.

down, doion from,

against, according

purify.

a,

vep).

heart.

-oraros)

93.

(,

the

gen-

beauty.

to,

I.

etc.

In

comp.
down, against, etc.
often merely intensive. 127 b.
In Compound Verbs
come down.
he ended by
:

just as

to

conceal.

.
()

(-orepoj

strong.

(>,

qualities

labor, be loeary, suffer.

be strong.

tisually

the

tleman.

make a thing stand.


LXXII.
they made me king.

loom, etc.

()

noble.

well,

well-born and well-bred,

loTOs anything set upright; mast,

t<rxis -vos

LX.

beautiful,

possessing

perhaps, probably.

See Less.

most nobly,
see

9.
-os

( ?,ill.

/ am

groom.

-<(),

doing harm (pepy-).

?)

Adv.

ill.

worse.

Prin. pts. Less.

call.

See

in order that.

it is

do

yearning, desire.

Adv.

craven,

ill-born,

I am

a late aor.

pease.

kindle, burn.

LXX.

Less.

cient, able, worthy.

be

196.

and

Less. LXIII.

- !

194.
yet.

of time, opportunity.

Upctov animal for sacrifice.

come

189.

due measure, the right point

itpivs -t(os (0) priest.

see

purification.

-ov purifying.

although (reg. with part.,

offerings.

, -.
(,

()

-s

and, even, also.

93).

Upos -a -ov divine, holy.

clean, clear, free

from pollution.

one

loho has no professional knowl-

edge

private.

private citizen

-8

beseeching,

go (or come) down,

thrown doion, put down,


render judgment against

(gen. of the person

ace. of

the penalty).

--.
-

suppose, guess.

poetic,

pass.

Pf.

cover up.

-
-8

pity.

Less. LXIII.

doion.

sit

--

-8<

-$

II.

asleep.

lie

Compound Nouns,

etc.

through.

sleep

).

Opposite (Gen. 130).

dowmoards, beneath, in
Kol

97

leave, leave

break down, put

dissolve, end, etc.

yoke,

-- - --<ra

hence

lodge,

-ovs

()

be

make

head.

-5 ()

-<ra

-( -,

Pf. pass,

-'--

---

turn down, overturn, sub-

-- --

dare, take a

hence

risk,

it

possibly.

weeping, wailing

due.

put down.

88.

-- -<
--

despise

(Gen.

116 h).

(older

hear and obey, overhear (Gen.).

-. -- -{achieve.

Impf.

-, .

form

'()
- ()XLVIII.

is likely,

().

/cXt/'w)

^-

(eKXrjo-a) shut.

report,

--

use up, destroy.

-|,

().

danger, risk.

observe care-

fully, consider.

herald.

one loho plays and sings

to the lyre

curately), perceive.

- --

occupy.

gain,

profit.

learn thoroughly, observe {ac-

--'-

urge, com-

gain, profit.

un-

guest.

-,.

see

mand.

-<

down,

see

seize upon, catch, find.

behind.

the

world below.
lie.

- -

(-

spy, inspector

).
=;

fell asleep.

-ov ridiculous {ye-

- -- - , ..

- -- -
97.

doxon.

lie

re-

LXI.

Less.

turn.

scatter (seed, etc.).

-,

he ended

by saying.

--,

357

fame, glory.

inherit.

,().

lean.

Less.

couch, bed.

Gen.

hold down, restrain,

- shared

()
in

the State,

mon.

thief

common,
in

com-

$
-

(5

in disorder.

-- -- order, arrange,

escape one^s notice.

strength, power,

(to)

have poicer, be master of (Gen. Hog).


(), PI.
(), Gen.

flesh, meat.

47

better.

knock.

()

acquire,

come

Prin.

()

to

pts.

()

lion.

?)

much, too much.


(Adv.
perse-

-<

vering, earnest.

()

pilot.

in a circle.

circle,

(, ) dog, bitch.
pack of hounds, ken-

(--).
- -ov having authority

wolf.

--

mas-

distress, grieve.

Pass.

be grieved.

mistress.

(-).

pain, grief.

lyre.

sheepskin, fleece.

-- -

Poetic

beseech.

entreaty, prayer.

nel

ter,

()

possessiOJi,

rest,

henceforth.

very, very

property.

Gen.

remnant.
remaining, the

hidden, secret.

possess.

collect.

leave.

conceal.

LXXIV.

,-

reckon-

- --- -
-and

distinguish, de-

-- -- Strike,

)8

reason,

account,

report,

tale,

ing.

cide, judge.

Less.

Speak well of one.


word,
sjjeech,

say.

tell,

--

possess,

170, 2 c.

see

rule.

----

Less.

-,
-.
,
-- .
LVI.

fem. of

deck, adorn.
-ovs

358

ornament, universe.

order,

lamp.

--

prevent.

loose.

79.

village.

dull,

dumb, deaf, deaf

, -
-

obtain by

lot,

obtain

(- -).

Ace.

()

Less.

(-orepos

bright, brilliant

see 113 g.

-
-
()

hare.

grasp, receive.

and dumb.

LX.
-oraros)

lesson.

act of learning.

pupil.

learn.

take,

().

()
()

84 and Less.

LIII.

-ov blessed, happy.

my friend.

- deem

happy.

359

by

long, far.

far.

from

afar, afar.

more,

very,

and

most, especially,

...

certainly

rather than,

much

as

as

possible.

3().
-8

()

mad

be

rage,

()

one

call

-5 ()

''

see 190, 191.

however.

siirely,

loait,

() part.
- - middle, medium,

midnight.

middle

to witness.

in

life.

whip, flog.
xmthout rea-

(),

mid-day

south.

- - filled

- -.
with, laden with

117).

comp.

with,

share

change

one''s

In

after.

with,

129

differently.

goad, whip.

the

midst.

()

loitness.

196.

await.

-ovs

(Gen.

seer.

oracular response.

Gen.

after,

c.

mind, repent.

-.
^ '
.
.. 8
-,

-,
-(
$ (
' 8
in vain,

idly,

son.

give a share of, share.

Verbal

89.

45.

large.

and

Adv.

greatly.

Comp.

Super.

-Otis,

lad.

have a share

dark, black.

aor. part,

certain, be destined) to do (In-

limb by

limb.

from) limb.

()

song,

tune,

often witli a part.

these things are


yoti

).

see Less.

my

have

not, see 144, 180, 178 II


160 c.

unless,

lest,

159.
67.

blame

against

XXXVII.

object of care,

.
-{

(Pf.

for the better.


between (Gen.), meanwhile;

lyric

lyric poet.

a care for this.


remember.

87.

part.) fortxine being changed

verse.

care,

let

98.

change.

-? ()

tive

re-

of.

of

loose, give up.

fin.).

an

88.

change,

tract.

intend {be about, be

-oDs

after,

transpose, change.

Mid.

smile.

be

se7ld

summon.

47.

'$

see

Impera-

(rivi),

charge

by no means.
ing.

at

all.

51.

no one, nothNeut. as adv. not

360

'

longer.

'-

manage; tend

never.

710

what

nor.

see

-$

month.

jealousy,

-8(

hate.

reward.

ire, loages,

laio.

c. 818).
28 D.
remembrance.
-<rw remember, remind.
make mention ! imperawhich serves as
of

-.
tive

aorist to

with

-yis

difficulty.,

reluctantly,

not only

hut

also.

fate,

doom, death.
sung

lyric poetry

music,

--

- one

- ()

,-
-a

recently married.

youth.

cloud.

island.

-- - ,
()

ship, 38.

vcKpos

()

%.

conquer.

-.

sickness.

29 C.

mind,

corpse.

see s.v.

()

-- --

dead.

childhood.

icho has just

() islander.
{v^js () fasting).

sea-fight.

vcKpos

() one

() mind,

()

young, new,

from

(\( (-)).

see s.v.

-(-

I.

victory.

tale,

myth,

vavs, Gen.

179

/asi

labor, be weary.

word, speech, proverb,


see 178

the

-$. Adv.

and

()

to

literature, music, etc.

)
-

i-ites)

vea veov [veurepos

come

alone, only,

^
of

customary

the

fresh,

commit adultery.

ven-

use; acknowledge, believe in;

deem, regard, believe.

veov

adulterer.

of

observe as a custom, pjractise,

scarcely.

portion, fate.

teacher

law.

() mina (=

distribution

anything assigned, hence,

custom,

51.

<(>

()

pasture.

68 ()

els,

due, hence, righteous

geance.

sheep.

of

see 192.

Gen.

is

indignation,

sheep.

05 - -

,
,
,

tend flocks in pastures.

-5

not yet.

neither

flocks.

to

he

ill.

thought, purpose.

'

have in

vovv in accordance

-- - loith (one's) wishes.

perceive,

think, suppose, plan.

vvv

dis-

tribute, assign, dwell in, occupy,

now;
Gen.

just now.

()
midnight.

night.

->

)0

361

|vos

(^ -)

happiness,

^5

nected with another by


hospitality, hence,

ties of

guest

(less

(> --

entertain as a guest.

-ows (to) sword.

5
8

mass, bulk.

'

24, 105, 110.

this.

way, road,
along
the road, on the loay.
oSovs, Gen.
() tooth.

()

happy, prosperous.

,,

deem happy.

?)

ola (see

know.

^ --

with partic,

175

e.

-ov pertaining

to

the

house, belonging to the family.

()

--

house-servant.
inhabit, dwell.

()

household,

house,

family.

() plural of oIkCov = oIkos.

-{ --aros

()

()

suppose.

skilled in

manthink,

179, I a.

--

am

qualified,

am

.
-, -, .

one and the same.

(,

of the same

age.

- -ov like, similar,


manner, equally.

()

same, nevertheless.

dream.

gone.

()

reproach.

reproach, charge against

,
,,
one.

()

name, noun.

Aor. pass.

, <,-., ,

name,

call.

see

in-

forms

direct

respectively
;

-
-

how

of
;

that,

in order that.

148, 149, 160.


behind, after (Gen.)

back,

back

again,

after

(Gen.).

'-

see.

temper, mood, wrath, anger.

reach

after (Gen.).

see

have

Epic

in anger.

see

LXI.

(-).

adj.

roast.

as, lohat sort of.

able.

-,

-.

see

eye

(see ttcDs;) how, as,

estate, etc.

such

oios

(^).

household management.

aging an

olos

room, chamber.
administer a

manage

household,

116 b.

dream.

95.

-a

()

all the

oIkos house, room, household.


oIkcios

before.

little

-ov short-lived.

in like

21 b.

irpoTcpov

j^ain, grief.

whence.
ot to him.

bliss.

- -ov scant, few, small,

frequently host).

oSos

- -ov

Stranger, foreigner, one con-

See

Less.

-ov (Adv.

oxit,

straightforward, right.

reach

upright,

362

OpBpLOS

--

at day-break.

opKos oath.

-hasten; Mid.
-8 (, )

motion,

in

set

start, hasten.

opvls

cock,

bird,

boundary,

limit,

(0)

hen,

rule,

standard.

-'

'

opiKOs

and

-rrep

oo-Tis

- -=

many

how

great

! etc.

see oo-tis.

21

,)
II,

late.

see

-,

see

irais.

Gen.

710

(-).

(,

as adverb.

j'lciy thing ,

child, boy,

from

no

one.,

educate.
child, baby.

chant the paean

noth-

(as adv.) not at all.

never yet.

),

honor

See

long ago.

--

vjith

(iraLUv,

paeans.

134.

ancient.

back, again.

-ov neither.

46.

(ert).

= \.

cordingly, not then

game.

'play.

not, nor, not even.

longer

training, education.

not,

never.

vision

little

ovSeis

7
8 -

serpent.

boyhood.

by no means.

ing,

-8 ()

XIX.

and

()

be borne, hence, ride.

no ! 144,
180, and Lessons VI,

8
178

eye.

see

girl; servant.

27.

b.

lohere, gen. of

(,

see

see

, see <8.
of him.

ovtws

thus, so.

it is.

, ,.8 -.

whenever.

oTi that, because.

,,

25, 105,

in this respect,

-ovs (t6) advantage, profit.

ivhat-

loin, loins.

lohen.

nor.

- ,

o|/is

how many

as,

()

-vos

this.

08 .
68
8,

whoever,

as great as,

see

Gen.

see 194.

oircp,

102.

until.

Is

153 b.

24,

27, 178, la.

ever.

as

he.

196.

owe.

quail.

which.

loho,

8
,8

of a mule.

-8 ()

-os

see 193.

thus

--

OS

neither

meanwhile.

() mountain-animal,

-- fear, dread.

OS

not yet.

,
-, ((),

mxile.

i.e.

110.

opos -ovs (to) mountain.


opevs

never.

surely not.

etc.

opos

then, ac.

-, -,

see iras.

()

alongside,

In comp.
amiss.

beside,

129

d.

by,

near.

by, beyond,

I.

--

363

iras

irept

Compound Verbs

everywhere.
iravToios -a -ov of every sort.

throw beside, throw

altogether, certainly.

to.

-$8.

?
--'
--

give over

-'

down

sit

summon.
from another,

-- -

--

obey (Dat.

prepare, provide.

put

beside.

-,
-,
- (^-,-.

be beside oneself.

- -,,
-.
\.^

by,

-,

see

-,
-, .

see

in.

--.

-8
--

Compound Nouns,

-- .
-?
-?
-

try.

8,
, ,
of

()

poverty.

look at from

II, fut.

See Less.

--

XXIV.

five thousand.

fifty.

etc.:

-.
see

-ov resembling,

see

see 194.

bring to an
side-entrance,

en-

end.

around,

trance.

proverb.

iras

82

--

like.

irap-o8os

fut. of

send, escort.

-ov parallel.

-oraros)

(-orepos

----.

I,

the side, observe.

II.

trust, faith.

trial, attemj)t.

pass,

hold beside, furnish, jwe-

sent.

trust in (Dat.)

faithful.

be present, be at hand.

pass

p)ersuade ; Mid.

trust

see

A.
pass

to cease, stop /

).

(,-).
irCo-Tis -8 ()

bring to one.

-,

make

-- -(

beside.

-' --

Less.

pts.

Mid. cease.

7-

remain

Prin.

LXVII.

96.

call to one,

--

(-5
-- --

stiffer.

take.

-'

all.

-ov wholly wise.

beside.

sit beside.

take

not at

6 iropa-

to.

one loho gave.

the

very,

altogether,

be at hand.

Gen. iravTOs,

the whole, every.

In

about.

comp.

around, about, over, exceeding.

all,

4.'].

-ov titterly bad.

() mother of all.
-5 () assembly

-epos

(ayep-).

full suit of armor.

in every way.

I.

129

e.

Compound Verbs
lead around.

-,
go around.
-, Past-Irapf.
I,

excel,

II,

treat,

handle.

surround.

survive.
93.

91.

-,

364

ireaciv

-,

-,

see

gird (oneself)

II.

loalk about.

--

'
,

,-9,

etc.

-- be at
--

--

consider carefully.

Compound Nouns,

city.

citizenship, government,

republic.

overjoyed.

'.
.

()

see

<, see
'8, see

citizen.

pertaining to

zens, political.

weigh dnion.

press,

--

' '7

sharp, hitter, harsh.

fall.

08,

see

<.

street.

See

most.

- more

s irXi<rTov

Pf.

,
---

Strike.

when?

- (- -)

why

(of

account

flock.

speech.

side?

()

poem.

poet.

many-colored.

one time

Less.

at an-

lohich

XXII.
;

on

which

where?
sonieiohere, someI suppose, about (with

what,

two)

iroiel-

U, take

of.

()

do.

make a

some time,

at

in the loorld ?
8' at

whence? how?
make,

much?

ever, once, at length,

lohither?

I,

'

hoio

river.

other.

,-

proceed, go.

be rich.

iToUa

see Less. XLIII.

29 C.

i-ich.

irov-

sea.

ford, strait, way, device.

irXovTos wealth.

10

depraved.

bad,

badness.

(-

toil

130.

times.

the evil one.

eirXivcra sail.

"
;

-d

(to) multitude, quantity.

except.

as

many

mould, shape.

irXoCs (0) voyage.

much-learning.

quam maxime.

irXio)

Superl.

for the most part.

-.

47

citi-

many.

PI.

much.

adv.

loandering, travels.

-,

Comp.

45.

drink.

--, .

much,

wallet.

irio-Tus,

loar, fight with.

hostile.

gray.

()

irepi-XuTros -ov very sad.


-i's

of what sort?

loar.

loith.

preserve.

II.

-rrpiap-UTcpos

numerals).

Gen.

()

--

foot.

older.

:.

J.

365

(-).

do, fare

LX, and

Less.

-arcs

Prin. pts.

see %%

(ro)

I.

c.

thing, event.,

--

Compound Verbs

IGO b, 170, 172, II

irpv 6e/ore.

in preference

comp.

-^,

go toward.

Compound Verbs

-',

A.

see

()

be zealous

-,

--

place before, set forth,

she^therd.

ancestor (yev- yov-).

eager, zealous.

-ov by the roots

(pi^a.

root).

()

forward, proposition

irpOTcpos -a

See

'--

dear

(-orepos

Stretching

().

-ov former,

etc.

supplement

().

(-acTTepos

-is

-)

to.

face, person (in a dia-

--

in front of (Gen. 130),

former.

()

-ov first,

as adv. first.

beggar.

wife

asked

before (he could speak).

wpos toxoard, with reference to, in


addition to, by.
In comp.
:

to.

logue, etc.).

fore, formerly, sooner,

toward, besides, by.

irpoo-

irpOTpos, see irpo (end).

sooner.

(to) irporepov be-

his

add

furthermore.

Trpo<r-Ti

-, -8

rare.

to,

Compound Nouns,

II.

to

to.

the assigned task.

put

().

assistant

-is

obei-

attach to oneself.

assign

etc.

sheep

-?

make

to.

-'

honor, value.

Adv.

to.

-5 standing near('aa).

bring before one, present.

-ov

belong

--

sance

stretch forth.

Compound Nouns,

Very

to,

be placed by, belong to.

-'

indicate in advance.

()

come

97.

do previously.

---$-)

at-

call to oneself.

propose, expose.

II.

hold

pay

see

-,

send forth.

-<

--.

(like a corpse)

-,

to.

tention.

before, be laid out

lie

jrray

Past-Impf.

toward,

choose {in preference).

-Oes,

A.

- -

124 d.

I.

(-,

Past-Impf.

--(,

F.

prior.

forth,

before,

to.

expect.

-',

In

--.
before,

from

one.

affair.

irpo

lead toward.

require besides, beg

129

f.

learn by inquiry, hear,

Prin. pts. Less.

inquire.

Gen.

yet.

(6)

-irvpos

oi

never

LXX.

fire.

not
yet.

yet.

oiSt

'

-irws

offer

how?

366
for

sale, sell.

somehow,

by

chance.

stade

length,

,)

paSios -a -ov (Adv.

gether

to-

rhythm, temper, disposition.

-)

Sabbath.

(Adv.

point out,

--

(
-(? ()

-aros

Semitic

indicate

by a

XLVIII.

()

--=
($
-

expedition,

().

general, be gen-

be

soldier.

Aor. pass,

I.

examine careLess.

LX,

thoughtful.
;

target.

dark.

rect (late) spelling

--- -

A less cor-

is o-kotivos.

your, yours.

'-

tirge

if ye turn not.

In

loith.

-ovs (to) darkness.

87.

(-, -, -, -, -, -)

-,
-

comp.

com-

with,

125 b.

pjletely.

o-Koiros xi:atchman, spy

general

()

scene,

LXV.

05 - o-KOTivos

()

-aTos

- -,

shadow.

consider.

de-

breast.

see

eral of (Gen.).

41.

of iron.

(- <-

-os

pass,

87.

twist, turn,

stage-building,

582

army.

sign, m.ark, tomb.

tent,

c.

army.

iro7i.

fully,

Pf.

of.

05
'

silence.

-'

equip,

5, , .
08
deprive

clear.

Prin. pts. Less.

sign.

stage.

-5 () mouth.

word.
-is

-,
-ovs

strength.

<5

see

spatch.

cppcvcra floio (pev- pu-)

() saying, phrase, verb.

-arcs

8, ?,

song).

-.

stitch

a measure of

{i.e.

600 Gk. feet

Eng. feet)), race-course, 200yard dash, stadium.

easy.

a reciter of epic poems,


rhapsodist

do

be earnest,

earnestly.

Compound Verbs

A.

sociate with.
sit

doion

--

as-

icith.

gather together,

collect.

come

--

together,

agree,

agree with.

play with.

---

sit

down

beside

loith.

hasten,

be eager.
haste, zeal, earnestness.

send with.

loalk about loith.

bring together, be useful,

be advantageous.

-- - -

bring

-- - -

soundness of mind,
good sense, self-control.

be with.

- -- -<

of sound mind, discreet,

sober.

together, collect.

367

assist

in

driving out.

pile together.

-, . (-^ --

-(>

live xoith.

meet

happen

with,

to.

experiences.
II.

Compound Nouns,

-?

--- -8
(--5

etc.

born with, akin

-^s

to.

pardon.

()

6
(=

--

--

ally

-s

).

(). (-

perhaps.

(Comp.

Superl.

and

AdV.

sympathetic

sym-

(for

--

(or

soon

as

as.

5,
.
-

(bbbv) with all speed, at once.

event,

chance,

misfor-

T and.

195.

tune.

a bringing together,

synagogue.
orvv-8ov\os

see


iVeKOv

felloio-

beget;

bear (young),

slave,

-05

(--

being

--,

with,

--

inter-

very

much,

vigor-

near, nearly, almost.

'

see

save.

thank-offering for

deliverance.

-5 ()

carpenter.

T\os as adv. finally.

bring to

an

Te'Xcos

-a -ov

completed,

accom-

plished.

- - completion, end.

leisure.

()

()

end, complete, x)ay (a debt, etc.).

21 b.

(,

TOKOS child.

Tc'Xos -ovs (to) end, fulfilment, issue.

ously.

8, (,

-ovos

cut the throat.

very,

to

lay eggs.

a helper in xoork.

course, company.

(,

quick.

as quickly as pos-

sible.

drinking-bout,

07'der, assign.

),

posium.

, .
().

arrange,

- -

counsellor.

an

- make lower, humble.

burial

counsel.

loeight, talent

store-room, closet.

quickly

book, etc.

-8
-8

a balance,
$1080).

- -

a writing,

c.

body.

?
,

an end; die.
() a tax-collector.
see tCktw.

bring to

368

Tp\|ilS

.
,
-

',

()

vup

enjoyment.

at that time, then.

, ..

'
, , -705
, -< - -,
-,

see

see

see

fourth.

see

manner,

profession,

art,

table.

means.

make by

devise.

put,

88 and

LXXVI.

honor, value, price.

-- hold in honor, value.

Mid. turn

trim.

a turning.
turn, luay, manner,

see TK-.

See Less. LX.

(oneself).

See

place.

see

art,

) m this place ().


Less.

see ovtos.

writer of tragedies.

-)

(^-orepos

in ivhat

way?

way.
in ivhat manner.
in every

- - -,

honored, precious.

for

-, \.

rear, nourish.

-< (uphold honor) as-

Less.

one who has suffered wrong,


avenge (Dat., 120 c).

nourishment, food, nurture.

sist

(,

nurse.

vengeance.

; who?

Tis;

run.

tvhat?

27.

or

why?

any one, any thing, some


one, some thing, a, a sort of, etc.
somewhat, at all.
27.

tIs

tI

&.

Toi in truth, surely.

three times.

he spoke as follows.

<,

in such a

- -.
-- -

Less.

c).

--

undertake, en-

dure, dare.
Toiros place.

great, so tall, so long, etc.

much.

, ,.
=

see

.()

despotic rule.

so

()

Gen.

son.

<()

ToaovTOS

Strike.

absolute sovereign, tyrant.

see

TOKOS, see

so

176

fortune, chance.

kv

tomb.

such, so great,

ToiovTOs

case.

LVIII.

so bad, etc.

\.

third.

obtain (Gen.); chance (with

hit,

then.

tKtyi

-- -

participle,

196.

therefore, surely, moreover,

See

LX.

water.

39.

39.

- - your,

vester.

sleep.

above, on behalf
ing.

127 c.

of,

concern-

369

tiiro

{ ')

-- - --

In comp.

under, by.

somewhaty

under, by,

secretly.

129 g.

I.

Compound Verbs

show

a glimpse

- -- -'-

you

go under, get

he loas

remaining,

'
---^
-' -

a roioer

serve,

minister

to (Dat.)

II.

Compound Nouns,

---

-'?

()

etc.

() a

a)i

oneself,

--now !

secretary.

answerer, actor,

left,

remaining.

() {an under-rower)

underling, servant.
-a -ov latter, behind, next,

later than, after (Gen.).

vo-Tcpaios -a -ov

next day.

on the day

-(

after,

on the

next day.
vs.

Gen. ios (,
weave.

) swine, boar, sow.

oh! ah! alas

-- -

show.

and
dvov declare, say.

and

94, 179,

I.

voice.

'

- - jealous.

()

-ov beloved, dear,

friend.

-ov loving

mankind.
com-

-ov loving one^s

appears.

is

treat

affectionately,

wont.

- (Adv. ^)

friendship.

Mid.

(show
oneself) appear,

2b

port, fame.

--

see

it

flee.

flight.

love, kiss, be

.see

as

receive

rades.

,, .-.

come

win.

prophetic voice, saying, re-

-ov

iJo-Tepos

Mid.

off.

carry off for

a carrying, motion, load.


a small basket.

hypocrite.

-5

bear, endure,

carry

lead,

wages.

left.

under, expose.

{serve, as

(-))

-'---

tm-

derstand, reply.

no

-ov slight, paltry, of

account.

bring,

80.

take up (under)

leave

bald.

drug, medicine, cure.

bind under,

under, put on.

--

see

of.

receive

fasten on.

A.

ignorant

clearly

g.

,- ,-,. -

under.

-, --'

are

176

see

-(

secretly, give

be-

fitting a friend.

--

friendly.

fond of words, fond


of argument, fond of literature.
-ov

-
-

-$ - --S

eager for knowledge.

-ov loving loisdom.

Mid.

terrify.

fear.

LXVIII.
go

to

and

fro, go (or

come) frequently.
murder, gore.

(
4)ovvs

-'

Mid.

,
or

point out (to)

point out

to

oneself)

ponder, pAan.

Xiip,

he

(Adv.

--

-- consider, reflect ;

ety.

-.
() guard.

guarding.

precautions.

-,
.

{)

nature, natural bent,

see

bright.

spelling

()

light.

A
is

(serve

need,

there is

Infin.

one ought,

etc. (Infin.).

()

thing, matter,

possessio7i.

- -ov useful.
- - serviceable,

to be

()

the

Anointed One.
in

<(

for

good.

rubbed on (as

time,

time.

for a short time.

gold.

-.
-

of gut,

oneself with) use (Dat.).

time,

guard.

character.

Gen.

anger.

made

ointment), anointed.

being on the loatch, taking

---

string

chord,

have a care for (Gen.).

- {) care, heed, anxi-

47 B.

thousand.

in

thoughtful,

prudent.

Dat.

hand.

See

bile, bitterness,

$) - - --

intention, per-

right mind,

,-

()

worse.

gut,

-5 ()

char-

features,

vjidow.

mind, inten-

(ro)

ception, prudence.

see

Gen.

tion, pride.

one''s

() an instrument
a mark engraved

impressed,

acter.

proud.

-ov

grace,

(17)

think, have understand-

-aros

favor

pi. xp<ri(v).

ing, intend.

Gen.

for marking

-.

seek to

(Dat.).

() murderer.

-Kos, see

--

rejoice, enjoy.

please,

favor, kindness, gratitude.

-- murder.

tell.

- - difficult, ])ainful.

pursue knoiol-

edge, be a philosopher.

Less.

370

full

of light,

less correct

(late)

coined gold, money.

,.
-0

-TOKos

eggs.

see

of gold.
laying

-ov

golden

371
space, place,

country,

-,

station.

apart

apart,

XiapCs

from (Gen.).

130.

-- -(

speak

- ()

fitting

time,

hour,

life, life,

good

9,

as follows, thus

time

is

to be

197.

in the

(ixriTtp jtist as.

soul.

so

so.

194.

that, so as to

Indie, or Infin.

(followed

151).

-ov serviceable, beneficial.

see

().

same way, just

5
,
.
(, .
by

sir

it

life,

see

bear false

witness.

breath of

see

season,

loriting.

liar.

-ovs {t6) falsehood.

.
() -,
-, .
-

springtime, prime of

lie.

-is lying, false.

being.

Gen. ovtos,
in truth.

egg.

falsely,

oh

shoulder.

one''s

see

-^:

\^

II

Proper Nouns and Adjectives

'

*8

'

'
fifth

(i.e. nosegay),
a collection of Greek idyls, odes,

Agis,

a king of

Archida'riuis,

during the

'AveoXoyia, Anthology

quarter

last

of

to

($

MeXea-ypos.

*8 -

Athens.

()

Athens.
a7i

Aeolian.

Aeschylus, an

Athenian

tragic poet, 525-456.

" Uncle

the

Aesop,

Remus"

of ancient Greece,

who

said to have lived duiing the

first

half

the sixth

of

centuiy.

known as Aesop's
Fables includes many stories of
The

the twelfth century a.d.

the

century.

-ov Athenian.
AloXcvs - ()

is

elegies,
and epigrams ranging
from the seventh century b.c. to

son of
Sparta

collection

later authorship.

'AvrC^oipos

'

-'

the sixth century, poet laureate


the court

Samos.
reon's

there

"

Polycrates,

of

are

extant,

an Athe-

Apollodo'rus, father

of Hippocrates.

'5-

-ov Argive.

'ApYiios

Artem'bares, a Medan.

Atri'dae,

namely,

A'treus,

i.e.

sons

of

Agamemnon

and Menela'us.
pher,

pupil

of

a philoso-

Socrates

and

founder of the hedonistic school


of philosophy.

'5

<8

Only fragments of Anacverses

is

of

Antisthenes,

nian.

kinsman
He was handsome,

and rich, but very immoral and utterly unscrupulous.


Anacreon, a lyric poet of
at

Antimoe'rus

'Apio-TMTiros Aristippus,

brilliant,

s.v.

of Mende, a sophist and a pupil


of Protagoras.

Alcibiades, a
of Pericles.

See

but

and

Aristotle, philosopher

scientist (384-822 b.c).

Aristophanes, Athe-

nian comic poet (445-385 b.c),


the most brilliant representative
of the Old

Comedy.

preserved a large collec- "Atds A'tys, son of Croesus.

tion of inferior imitations

known

as Anacreontics.

Glaucon, father of Char-

Androu,

son of Andro'tion, an Athenian.

mides.

372

373

rop5ios

TopSios

Gurdius, son of

Phrygia and

Midas, a king of

famous Midas.

father of the

the

of

named one

'-

()

Hellas,

Greece.

i.e.

Epicu'rus, a philosopher

the most

Crorgias, one of

famous

0O"YVIS

Plato

sophists.

and founder

of his dialogues after

him.

Epicure'an

the

of

school of philosophy.

Epichar'mus, a comic
poet of Sicily and a contemporary
of Aeschylus.

'

He was

the

first

great comic poet of Greece.


Dni'i'us,

a king of Persia.

Delphi, a famous oracle of

Apollo in Phocis.

Demo' crates,

father of

Lysis.

Demo'critus,

cele-

the

fifth

century.

Demophon,

father

/)

of

see Zevs.

Testament.

sists

The New Tes-

documents, in part

con-

of

With the exception of the


book of Hebrews and an occasentence
of

ment

is

of

Alexandria.

He

end of the third


century b.c. and wrote numerous
mathematical treatises, of which
the most celebrated is his " Elements of Geometry " in thirteen
books.

the

elsewhere

New

Greek

the

Testa-

innocent of literary re-

finements, while the language

dialect

the

Common

dialect.

tragic poet (480-406 b.c).

, ,
Gen.

as

or

pher of Ephesus,

Diogenes Laerin

the

He

third

wrote,

century

A.D., the lives of the philosophers.

() a Dorian.

one of the

He'ra. Her most important


temple was at Argos.
Heracli'tus, a philoso-

form of the

known

Heliodo'ra,

loves of Meleager.

about SOO

tius (i.e. of Laerte).

probably

Zeus.

)'
, ',

tive of the colloquial

post-classical

Euripides, an

is

main that of the common


people. The New Testament is
the most important representa-

in the

The Euxine Sea.


Athenian

transla-

tions.

style

Euclid, a famous mathe-

matician

part of original Greek

in

sional

ac-

flourished at the

Menexenus.

tament

an

Euthijde'mus,

quaintance of Socrates.

brated philosopher of

,,

EryxV-

son of Acu'menus,
physician at Athens.

machus,

Gen.

'
poet,

who

flourished

B.C.

Heracles.

Theog'nis, an early elegiac


and perhaps the best repre-

374

'

()

sentative of the sententious style.

He employed
(see

Less.

the elegiac couplet

III).

Many

commonly

verses

the

of

attributed

young Dorian

Theodo'rus, a mathema-

have been a teacher

title

AvSos a Lydian.
(ot) the

$
lyric

noble, in his verses.

tician, said to

Laconisms, the
one of Plutarch's essays.

to

Theognis were written by other


He frequently mentions
poets.
his friend Cyrnus, a

of

Melea'ger, a late Greek

poet,

He

Syria.

Lycians.

tury B.C.,

born at

Gadara

lived in the

first

and was the

first

make a noteworthy anthology

of Socrates.

in

cento
of

Greek poets.
McvavSpos Menander, an Athenian
Hippo'crates, son of Apollodo'rus, a

friend of Socrates.

See Less. LII,

Callias.

"5 ()

father of

Hipponi'cits,

'IiriroviKOs

the lonians.

comic poet of the

late fourth cen-

and the best known representative of the New Comedy.


His plays abounded in sententious sayings, more than seven
hundred of which, each consisttury,

ing of a single verse, have been


'

preserved in a collection

Cadmus,

the

reputed

founder of Thebes.

the

bibliographer,

'.

libra-

Lysis.

3Iede.

Median.

rian of the great library at Alexandria.

of

Media and

vastly enlarging the

boundaries of his empire, Cyrus

gained for himself the title of


" The Great." His rule extended

3
monian.

b.c.

-ov

Lacedae-

?
"

-ios

-a -ov

Nicias, son of

Xicer'atus, an Athenian general.

Nico' teles.

Olympus, a mountain in

Mysia.

sophist.

a Mysian.
Mysian.

Kvpvos, see

from 558-529

-08

Clibu'lus.

By

single-

Mithrada'tes, a Persian

name.
MCkkos Miccus, a

(ot) the Cilicians.

Persia.

known

Menander.
Mcvc^cvos Menex'enus, a friend of

Calli'machus (c. 310240 B.C.), poet, literary critic,

Kvpos Cyms, king

(i.e.

verse quotations) of

-apos (0) Caesar.

philologist,

as

Homer.
Orpheus.

Sav6nnros

375

Pythag'oras,
a celebrated Greek philosopher of the

son of

Xanthippus, a

sixth century.

05
Pericles.

Xenophantus.
Xenophon, soldier, country gentleman, and author (born
0.430 B.C.). The quotations in
the Lessons are from his Memorabilia or Memoirs of Socrates,
of whom he was a great admirer.

- ()

Sardes or Sardis,

capital of Lydia.

Solon, an Athenian states-

man

of the sixth century.

()

Athenian tragic

Sophocles,

poet

an

(497-405

B.C.).

- -ov Syrian.

Pan., a rural god.


Par'aliis, a son of Pericles.

an Athe-

Pausa'nias,

nian.

-ovos

() a Paphlago-

an Athenian statesman (died 429 b.c).


Pericles,

One

() a Persian.

plays of Aeschylus

is

called the

(^).

first

great phi-

losopher of Greece, pupil of Soc-

and

teacher

one

of

Aristotle

friend of Plato,

who named one

of his dialogues after him.

() Phason,

the brother

of Hippocrates.

Phile'mon, a comic poet,


one of the rivals of Menander.
Philip-

Plutarch, a Greek au-

thor and lecturer of the

He

the

Timo'theiis, Timothy.

(428-347 B.C.).

tury A.D.

of

loves of Meleager.

Phaedrus, an Athenian and

B.C.).

Plato, the

lyric poets.

of the

nCvSapos Pindar, one of the chief


lyric poets of Greece (518-442

rates

Greek

Timar'ion,

-Ovs

Persians

Terpander, one of the

earliest of the

nian.

-?

Socrates, Athenian phi-

losopher (469-399 B.C.).

wrote

first

cen-

Parallel

of famous
Greeks and
Romans, and innumerable essays

Lives

ing

is

known about

these.

Phrygia.
Phrygian.

sophist of the fifth century.

Noth-

either

of

() a

on miscellaneous subjects.
Protag'oras, a famous

pides, son of Philome'lus.

Char'mides, the father of


Plato's mother.

Printed in the United States of America.

'TpHE

following pages contain advertisements of a

few of the Macmillan books on kindred

subjects

The Elements

of

Greek

By FRANCIS KINGSLEY BALL, Ph.D.


Instructor in Greek and

German

Cloth,

in the Phillips

i2mo,

Exeter

illustrated, xvi

Academy

+ 283

pages, $1.00

Concise, adequate, accurate, and well arranged.

chapters of moderate length

the ground in

fifty

them too long

for a lesson.

for beginning

Xenophon.

superior, notably so in

in

many

Gives a very good preparation

The

scholarship of the book

The arrangements and

ing of the book are convenient and effective.

digms assembled at the end

eral,

and

word

The

lists

print-

The para-

and vocabularies

selections are included for reading, and, in gen-

great pains have been taken to


reliable

is

comparison with that to be found

Beginner's Books.

are given

Covers

none of

make

instrument for the hand of the

the book a good


skillful teacher.

" Elements of Greek " was written not from the

standpoint of the college professor, but from that of the


teacher and the student.

It is the

outgrowth of years of

practical experience in the schoolroom,

marked

success the final

and has stood with

test constant

class use

critical teachers.

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY


Publishers

64-66 Fifth Avenue

New Tork

under

A First
IN

Greek Reader

TWO PROGRESSIVE PARTS WITH HINTS AND VOCABULARY


By

E.

C.

MARCHANT,

M.A.

Fellow of Lincoln College, Oxford, and Formerly Classical Master


at St. Paul's School

Cloth,

Part

contains

i2mo,

short

illustrated, xi

sketches

+ j2

for

pages, 45 cents

reading

on

subjects descriptive of ancient Greece and its cul-

Greek mythology, and

ture,

The
Part

subject

II

is

the

of

the

fables.

twenty exercises that form

Adventures of

Odysseus,

adapted

from the Odyssey, and turned into simple prose,

which

is

meant

to be Attic.

There are very few notes, but the Hints contain suggestions as to Greek
tion

that will help the reader

syntax and construc-

now and

will

use hereafter.

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY


Publishers

64-66 Fifth Avenue

New York

be of

Greek Prose Composition


By H. pitman, M.A.
Lecturer in Classics at the University of Bristol

Cloth,

i2mo, 60 cents

This book aims at bringing the student as quickly as


possible to a comprehension of the principles on which

Greek compound sentences are constructed.

The

exercises begin

the chief tenses

of

worked
use

is

in

from the

by

affording practice in the formation

of

regular

first,

given throughout.

mainly with the forms

verbs.

Prepositions

and constant practice

The

earlier exercises,

of the regular verbs, are

are

in their

which deal

made

short

and simple, the aim being to pass on to the usages of the

moods
in

as quickly as possible.

any uses

No

attempt

of the cases except those

frequently and are most easily grasped.

Proses at the end

may

is

made

to

work

which occur most

The Continuous

be found convenient for revision, and

desirable as a change from the

monotony

of constantly

rendering sentences into Greek.

There

is

a Special Vocabulary to each exercise as well as

a General Vocabulary of

all

the words required.

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY


Publishers

64-66 Fifth Avenue

New York

Tales from the Cyropaedia of Xenophon


ADAPTED FOR THE USE OF BEGINNERS,
WITH VOCABULARY. NOTES, AND EXERCISES
By CHARLES H. KEENE, M.A.
Elementary Classics Series

Cloth,

The Tales here given


Books

i6mo,

viii

+ 113

pages, 40 cents

are selected from the

of the Cyropaedia.

They

are

much

first

three

abridged from

the original, and, for the benefit of beginners, the language

has been greatly simplified, especially in the earHer sections.

The

Exercises are based on the text.

The Vocabulary
with those of the

text,

the Vocabulary on

word recurs
cabulary

divided into sections corresponding

is

its

and each Greek word


first

may

be found by means

book

explained in

When

occurrence.

in a later part of the

is

its

the

same

place in the Vo-

of the Index.

The Notes supplement the Vocabulary in the few cases


.where an explanation of the text
suitable

for

contain

many

Vocabulary.

is

required in a form not

The Cyropaedia does not

historical or literary allusions that call for

elaborate comment, and for that reason

use of those

who

is

well suited for the

are beginning the study of the

langage.

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY


Publishers

64-66 Fifth Avenue

New York

Greek

A First

Greek Reader

Stories and

Legends

WITH NOTES. VOCABULARY. AND EXERCISES

By
Late Fellow

F.

H.

of St.

COLSON, M.A.

John's College, Cambridge, and

Head Master

of

Plymouth College

Cloth, i2mo, xxiii

The

stories

pages, $1.00

arranged in this book have been arranged with

especial care that they should be

Greek

in substance, as

At the same time they have been

well as in form.
simplified

+ 164

and adapted, as

far as possible, to the

freely

form

of

ordinary Attic Greek.

The aim

may not

of the

author has been to provide a book which

only be an introduction to Thucydides and Xeno-

phon, but

may

also give the student

Greek personages and Greek

The

stories

shorter stories

Mythology,

are arranged

some knowledge

life.

by

subjects,

beginning with

and Fables, and proceeding to

Stories

of

of

Athenians,

Stories

Stories
of

from

Spartans,

Miscellaneous Stories, Stories of Alexander, Stories of the

Games and

Oracles,

and

Stories of the Philosophers.

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY


Publishers

64-66 Fifth Avenue

New York

^ uUSl

^^j^^Su^^^^

{o^

djutSi

3'

/7

^tiA^ ^*^)--<<:-^

<!

22

^>-^^^(. uC^^^l/

^AyKAA^A^^AA^^t^C
^l/Zc^uoc.^^^-^

^^

<:t^-t^

^^"^^^
IfU: ^^ps^y^^^ u

^HaAJuX

You might also like